A Seed That Fell On Good Ground

A SEED THAT FELL ON GOOD GROUND
Counter-conditioning for the bewildered herd
1
2
3
PDF Book Edition: version009_Apr2020
Copyright © 2020 Deano
The right of Deano to be identified as the author of this work

has been asserted in accordance with sections 77 and 78 of the
Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988.
All Rights Reserved.
No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any

form or by any means without the written permission of the
publisher.
4
This Book is Not for Sale!
Modern society is governed by the pursuit of money and

wealth. As the old saying goes, the love of money
is the root of all evil.
This book is about a small influential group that, through the

fraudulent production of money, have bought out everything and
everyone along the way. In defiance of this system of selfish greed,
this book is made available for free to anyone wishing to read it.
It is my small gift to humanity.
5
Chapters
Preface 10
Introduction 13
Chapter one Naming the Culprits 22
Chapter two The Historical Plot 38
Chapter three The Hierarchy of Power 46
Chapter four The Organisational Structure 55
Chapter five Secret Societies 76
Chapter six Financing the Plan 88
Chapter seven The Bewildered Herd 101
Chapter eight The Georgia Guidestones 117
Chapter nine Food for Thought 124
Chapter ten Water – The Source of Life 142
Chapter eleven In Sickness and in Health 155
6
Chapter twelve Education or Programming? 175
Chapter thirteen Mainstream Media Propaganda 188
Chapter fourteen The Film Industry 206
Chapter fifteen Climate Change & Agenda 2030 224
Chapter sixteen Geo-Engineering 242
Chapter seventeen 5G and Everything Smart 262
Chapter eighteen Numerology and Gematria 277
Chapter nineteen New Age Religion 298
Chapter twenty The Reset - Social Cataclysm 314
Chapter twenty-one Time to Act 331
Chapter twenty-two Conclusion 345
Prologue An Open Letter 349
7
8
Dedication & Thanks
To my parents, for my moral upbringing,

preparing the good ground.
To Paul R. Temple, for

correcting my grammatical errors.
To Montse Cortés, for the cover.
To David Dees for the inside cover (ddees.com)
To all the truth-seekers that face daily ridicule

during their struggle to alert humanity.
To anyone that takes the time to read this book,

knowing it may well contradict what one
has been conditioned to believe.
You are the principle reason
that motivated this publication.
9
Preface
My particular journey down the rabbit hole which is detailed in

this book began earlier than the author’s. Our paths crossed in
Spain over ten years ago, when we found ourselves working
together. On occasion, if the author was still enough for any length
of time, we would talk. One particular exchange I remember
having was about the classic conspiracy topic – the fluoridisation of
water. My comment regarding the policy of adding this toxic
residue from industrial processes to drinking water was met with a
rebuttal, commenting something about it being the reason for the
reduction in the numbers of cavities. Back in those days it was best
not to pursue such matters. Whether or not he was aware of the
statistics or merely reacting as he had been conditioned to, I do not
know. The chances are it was a conditioned, knee-jerk response to
some perceived crazy talk.
Fast forward from that conversation and head over to a
different part of Spain, Navarra. The author and I met up again in
Pamplona to start the Camino de Santiago with twelve rescue dogs.
That month would see us exchange information and opinion on a
number of topics. It was clear from our conversations that he had –
to say the least – snapped out of the conditioning which prompted
him to defend fluoridisation of the water. The transformation from
‘bewildered’ – someone who receives their information and in
many cases opinions from mainstream sources – to fully fledged
truth-seeker had been well and truly made.
My first ‘toe-dip’ into this world began post 9/11 when I
watched the Zeitgeist series of movies on the recommendation of
another conspiracy tin-foil hatter, my old workmate, Spencer. So
10
began a journey which continues to this day. The term conspiracy

is both accurate and misleading at the same time. Accurate, in that
every aspect of the world in which we live is undoubtedly being
perverted by a group of conspirators. Of which, much will you
learn from this book. The actual definition of conspire being – to
join in a secret agreement to do an unlawful or wrongful act.
Misleading, in how it is used by many people nowadays. Merely
uttering the words conspiracy theory implies that the person
challenging the official narrative is some kind of lunatic, someone
likely to believe any far-out story they hear on the internet. It is a
double-whammy because the other person also becomes the
grounded, sensible one, who has science and right-minded
authority figures on their side. It succeeds in immediately shutting
down any meaningful dialogue. I recall now my days, pre-Zeitgeist;
how I used to dismiss everything Spencer said or take it with a
giant pinch of salt, and laugh at how crazy he was for purchasing
physical gold. As we stand now on the precipice of another
recession, this time with bail-ins, it doesn’t seem so crazy.
The use of this word conspiracy, and others such as racist, anti-
Semite, homophobe etc. are in such common use nowadays, not by
accident. These words have been purposefully introduced at
different times to control our conversations. I still remember
discussing the difference between the words racist and racialist
when I was at school, nowadays racialist is never used. This not-so-
subtle manipulation of the language was needed before
multiculturalism came along. Articulating the idea that races have
traits is racist now, and racism is bad. In the past it used to be
racialist; the word didn’t come with any baggage. No amount of
explaining will get rid of the tag of racist, although the spell is
wearing off somewhat. What this does is stop us from getting at the
11
facts and having reasoned debate. It acts as a barrier which keeps us

from arriving at the truth.
At some point, both the author and I have been able to break
the conditioning, as have many of the people we know – although
many have not. One thing it seems on which the majority of people
can agree, even if they can’t put their finger on exactly what, is that
something is not right with the world. Upon reading this book you
will be left in no doubt that there is a grave threat, a centuries-old
conspiracy, if you like. This book will go a long way towards
beginning to break the conditioning to which we have all been
subjected since day one, explaining not only what is wrong, but
also who is responsible, how they are doing it and why. Let us be in
no doubt: we are in a fight, only we have not presented yet. This
book is a call to stand up and to start resisting the grave threat we
face.
Mark Twain
Preface by Paul R. Temple
12
Introduction
What would you do if you uncovered a plot to murder

someone? I expect most decent people would try to warn the
targeted victim, to try to somehow thwart what had been planned.
Ok, so what would you do if you came across extensive
information of a plot, orchestrated by a small elite group, to
implement tyrannical control over the whole world and ultimately
cull a large percentage of the population?
Now, immediately, I expect the vast majority of readers to think,
that’s crazy. How ridiculous! Why haven’t we heard about it on the
news and so on. It would be quite a normal response to think that
any person making such an absurd claim is either crazy or at least
one of those tin-foil hat conspiracy theorists that believe anything
out of the ordinary. I totally understand this response and would
not expect anything different when presented with such an
uncorroborated and monumental accusation. However, as I intend
to prove, I am certainly not crazy, don’t align myself to the CIA-
founded term ‘conspiracy theorist’, but rather see myself as
13
educated, extensively travelled, of rational thought and with

strength of character to face the truth, whatever that may be.
Along with thousands of other ‘truth-seekers’, I think all would
agree that after personally coming to terms with the elements of
such a monstrous plot, by far the hardest and most frustrating
burden to carry is how to warn friends, family and ultimately, all
fellow human beings. Despite facing ridicule, losing friends and
seeming pre-occupied with the same agenda, I now appreciate an
innate stubbornness and determination in myself that can face up
to personal humiliation while devoting an organised, logical mind
to pursuing the truth. Might I add, there is absolutely no personal
gain from going to all the effort of writing this book or attracting
ridicule, other than to calm an underlying desire to do what my
sound human instincts tell me is right. I stand firm in the belief
that, in my case, the seed fell on good ground.
Facing the challenge of exposing the lies, there are two principal
factors that make the task of awakening people to the truth,
seemingly impossible. Firstly, all of mainstream media, which
includes television, radio, newspapers, magazines, news websites, as
well as Facebook, YouTube and Google, is controlled by the same
small elite group that controls the ominous agenda. Hollywood
movies, the most influential and successful musicians, political
leaders, the education system, financial institutions, the legal
system, globalist companies and some religious institutions also
have the same tentacles of power providing their direction and
content. Talking of Hollywood movies, The Matrix quote at the
beginning of this introduction is a good example of how predictive
programming is used in many blockbuster films. By inserting
similarities or scenarios envisaged by those that are steering the
14
direction of the world, this is done to psychologically prepare the

masses for future planned events.
Secondly, and quite possibly just as influential as the first, is a
continuous psychological attack on every individual from the
moment they are born. The relentless conditioning of their minds
makes most people incapable of challenging a life-long
accumulation of propaganda and lies which they formulate into
believing as the truth. This can be summarised much better by
Frantz Fanon who wrote in 1952:
Sometimes people hold a core belief that is very strong. When they
are presented with the evidence that works against that belief, the
new evidence cannot be accepted. It would create a feeling that is
extremely uncomfortable, called ‘cognitive dissonance’. And
because it is so important to protect the core belief, they will
rationalize, ignore and even deny anything which doesn’t fit in
with the core belief.
Michael Tellinger, in his thought-provoking book ‘Ubuntu’,

explains the same thing in his typical straight forward manner:
So begins a life filled with lies and deception, so deep and severe,
that most of us have simply chosen not to believe it because the
consequences of such allegations being true, are simply too horrific
for most people to deal with.
To add to the complication of whether individuals can accept

the truth when presented with it, Leonardo Da Vinci (former
Grand Master of the Priory of Sion) illustrated how some people
get it, and others simply do not:
There are three classes of people:

Those who see,
15
Those who see when they are shown, and

Those who do not see.
I agree to a certain amount with these claims. There are

certainly people who view the evidence and understand what it is
all about while accepting that their held beliefs were wrong or what
they have been told by the mainstream narrative is a lie. Then,
there are equally a lot of people that simply cannot see the wood
for the trees, or as may be the case, the power of their cognitive
dissonance is simply too strong for their minds to overcome. To
give one such example, a close family member, more intelligent
than myself, well-read and exposed to a great deal of what you are
about to read, still cannot somehow allow himself to believe that
there is some sort of conspiratorial and nefarious plan to rule the
world.
Presuming that truth-seekers are a certain type of people that
fall into Da Vinci’s category of ‘those who see’, from a personal
perspective I don’t know if this is due to personality traits, a moral
upbringing, an exposure to world travel, avoiding the Orwellian
telescreen for many years, eliminating fluoride and toxins from my
diet or simply self-confidence and having a rational and logical
mind. I suspect it is a combination of them all, linked to a strong
innate survival mechanism that is willing to face up to the threat
rather than bury my head in the sand. What I do know is that once
you have taken the Red Pill there’s no going back to a life of
ignorance. However, from experience, I am a strong believer that
the truth, no matter how hard to swallow, brings a sense of
liberation from a society built on lies.
There is also something to be said for people that, I believe,
simply do not want the truth to be as described. Overwhelmed by
cognitive dissonance and an unpreparedness to face a different
16
reality to what they believe in, they will search for any mainstream
media narrative to counter what they realise deep down makes
sense. For such people, ignorance is literally bliss, sinking into an
episode of Strictly Come Dancing or the X-factor is simply easier to
handle rather than facing up to the prospect that their children are
likely to perish before old age or, at best, be slave-like Proles to
Orwell’s ruling inner party. Understanding this common mentality,
sometimes truth-seekers have to step back and respect this request
for ignorance. After all, these are not the sort of people that are
going to make up the critical mass needed in order to overturn this
nightmare that is already in its final stages.
Due to the secretive nature of the hidden hand behind the vast
complexity of elements that make up such a long-term plan, there
is not a single document or short paraphrase that explicitly reveals
their guilt or outlines their true intentions. Instead, the process of
unveiling the puppet masters and their relentless scheming relies
on joining the dots and revealing their consistent approach towards
the same tyrannical agenda to bring in a One-World Government,
One-World Currency, and One-World Religion. This New World
Order (Novus Ordo Seclorum), as they call it, is forecast to be
founded after a period of world chaos and will reign over a total
world population of between 500 million and one billion people as
stated, for example, on the Georgia Guidestones. Bearing in mind
that the current world population is over 7.6 billion people, I
suspect that you, I, and the majority of what Walter Lippman calls
the Bewildered Herd, are not on the list of survivors.
In a speech made significantly on September 11th 1990, George
Bush senior spoke to Congress and the World, revealing his
allegiance to the New World Order:
17
We stand today at a unique and extraordinary moment. The

crisis in the Persian Gulf, as grave as it is, also offers a rare
opportunity to move toward a historic period of cooperation. Out
of these troubled times, our fifth objective – a New World Order –
can emerge: a new era – freer from the threat of terror, stronger in
the pursuit of justice, and more secure in the quest for peace. An
era in which the nations of the world, East and West, North and
South, can prosper and live in harmony.
An insider to the plan for a New World Order was H.G. Wells,
a former member of the British War Propaganda Bureau during
the Second World War. His book ‘The Open Conspiracy’ was
written before the art of spin and political correctness dressed up
speeches like George Bush’s to make the prospect of a One-World
tyrannical government sound all nice and rosy. Wells spells it out
more honestly:
A One-World Government and one-unit monetary system, under

permanent non-elected hereditary oligarchs who self-select from
among their numbers in the form of a feudal system as it was in
the Middle Ages. In this One-World entity, population will be
limited by: restrictions on the number of children per family,
diseases, wars, and famines until one billion people who are useful
to the ruling class, in areas which will be strictly and clearly
defined, remain as the total world population. There will be no
middle class, only rulers and servants. Satanism, Luciferianism and
Witchcraft shall be recognized as legitimate One-World
Government curricula with no private or church schools.
Children will be removed from their parents at an early age and
brought up by wards as state property.
18
One of the most well-known proponents of an all-controlling

totalitarian World Government was David Rockefeller. In his
memoirs he says:
Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the
best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and
me as internationalists and of conspiring with others around the
world to build a more integrated global political and economic
structure – One World, if you will. If that’s the charge, I stand
guilty and am proud of it.
Back to the present, it could be argued that while on the verge

of a third World War, with world debt levels unsustainably high,
an obvious increase in financial instability and a continual
systematic break-down in societal values, that the planned ‘Ordo
Ab Chao’ (as read on the back of the American $1 bill) is
approaching its final stage. You don’t have to be religious to
understand the link to Revelations in the Bible, but what is
fundamental to uncovering the truth is that the hidden hand are
following it to the letter and do have a religious agenda, albeit a
dark one.
The following chapters will start off with the history and origin
of the centuries-old plan to enslave the whole of humanity,
identifying the perpetrators from the outset. Although protected by
a clever fire-wire, resulting in an attached stigmatism to even
mentioning or associating the culprits with anything negative, this
mechanism in itself also highlights their true origins and the depth
of their deceit. Many people ask how it would be possible for such
an enormous global undertaking that spans centuries, to be
systematically organised and managed. This requires a look into the
hierarchy behind the hidden hand, along with their expansive
19
network of secret societies, international think-tanks and

institutions that far exceed those of national governments.
One thing that is fundamental to the success of such an
enormous plan for complete world domination is that it requires
almost unlimited funding. Therefore, a brief introduction as to
how the financial resources have been cunningly utilised, whereby
money is simply printed out of thin air, also reveals the key players
at the top of the pyramid.
To comprehend the nature and complexity of all the elements
that comprise such a global conspiracy, some of the main
components will be taken separately to give an insight into how
this has been achieved. This includes controlling the population by
social-engineering, determining what they eat, controlling their
medication, manipulating the education system, and even down to
altering the air that is breathed and water that is drunk and most
importantly, controlling their minds.
It seems that the vast majority of the population does not even
see what is happening right before their eyes. Then again, an
insider to the plot, Aldous Huxley, described in ‘Brave New World’
(1931) how the majority of people will actually end up sleep-
walking into a form of slavery that, with the help of medication,
they would learn to love:
The perfect dictatorship would have the appearance of a

democracy, but would basically be a prison without walls in which
the prisoners would not even dream of escaping. It would
eventually be a system of slavery where, through consumption and
entertainment, the slaves would love their servitude.
20
It’s time to jump straight in and identify this relatively small

group of secretive power brokers that for centuries have connived
and plotted behind the scenes, to bring about the complete
totalitarian control over all humanity.
21
Chapter one
Naming the Culprits
Before going any further, one very important aspect has to be

addressed. Anybody that wishes to investigate the truth about a
small elite group with plans for global domination will come to the
same historical conclusion that the principle instigators are known
in society as what we call Jews. Although the intermarriage with the
aristocracy, royalty and Black Nobility has muddied the waters,
fundamentally the top of the pyramid of power are unanimously
from this small racial group. However, a well thought-out tactic to
prevent further investigation into the truth, to smear researchers or
to disarm opposition to this ominous agenda is to immediately call
it anti-Semitism. People have been fired from their jobs, politicians
forced to stand down, journalists hounded out of the profession
and individuals stereotyped as being racist.
To give one such example, Henry Ford was known as the arch
anti-Semite, mainly due to being the man behind ‘The
International Jew’, but at the same time he employed thousands of
Jews in his factories. He also worked closely with a Jew, Rosika
Schwimmer, on his Peace Ship crusade and his Jewish architect,
Albert Kahn, designed many buildings for him. In his newspaper
22
from the 1920’s, ‘The Dearborn Independent’, the subject of anti-

Semitism was addressed as follows:
It is not anti-Semitism to say that the suspicion is abroad in every

capital of civilization and the certainty is held by a number of
important men that there is active in the world a plan to control
the world, not by territorial acquisition, not by military
acquisition, not by governmental subjection, not even by economic
control in the scientific sense, but by control of the machinery of
commerce and exchange.
It is not anti-Semitism to say that, nor to present the evidence
which supports that, nor to bring the proof of that. Those who
could best disprove it, if it were not true, are the international Jews
themselves. But they have not disproved it.
Someday a prophetic Jew may arise who will see that the promises
bestowed upon the ancient people are not to be fulfilled by
Rothschild methods, and that the promise that all nations were to
be blessed through Israel is not to be fulfilled by making them
economic vassals of Israel; and when that time comes, we may
hope for a redirection of Jewish energy into channels that will
drain the present sources of the Jewish question.
In the meantime, it is not anti-Semitism. It may even be found to
be a world service to the Jew, to throw light upon what purpose
motivates certain higher circles.
The wise words of Captain Archibauld Maule Ramsay ring so

true today, over half a century later. In his exposé ‘The Nameless
War’ (1952), he reveals the Hidden Hand’s fingerprints behind all
major revolutions and wars. He explains the truth behind calling
out the perpetrators:
The phrase anti-Semite is merely a propaganda word used to

stampede the unthinking public into dismissing the whole subject
23
from their minds without examination: so long as that is tolerated

these evils will not only continue, but grow worse.
Henry Makow Ph.D. is a rare Jewish voice that speaks up for the
truth. On anti-Semitism he says:
The bankers’ Satanic Conspiracy is the source of anti-Semitism.

The sooner Jews rise up to oppose it; the sooner anti-Semitism will
end. Obviously, many Christians are involved. When I criticize
Rockefeller, no one says anything about anti-Christianism.
A lot of people don’t realise that the term Semite derives from
Shem, one of the three sons of Noah described in the book of
Genesis. Hence, a Semitic person is ‘of Sem’, using the anglicised
pronunciation of the name. These include many Arab
communities as well as many of the current inhabitants of Palestine
and elsewhere in the Middle East. Historically such people were
grouped due to the Semitic origin of their spoken language. To be
more precise, the political definition of a Semite is one who is a
member of any number of peoples of the ancient Middle East,
including the Akkadians, Phoenicians, Hebrews and Arabs. It is
obvious from these four groups that make up Semitic people, not
just one, that the term anti-Semitism has been foisted on the non-
thinking public as alluding to the Jews, which makes the modern
definition a well-planned deception. According to Dr. Ken Matto:
The term anti-Semitic began around 1883, just about the time the
Zionists were growing in popularity calling for an established home
land for the Jews. It seemed that a term was needed to beat down
everyone and anyone who opposed the Zionists. That term was
anti-Semitic which is used to this very day on anyone who opposes
anything alluding to the nation of Israel or any Jewish person. It is
24
used as an intimidation and terror instrument defaming the

character of anyone.
Therefore, to make it clear from the outset, I have absolutely no

grudge against any specific religious or ethnic group. This includes
Jews, Christians, Muslims or anyone else for that matter. Once
there is an understanding of what the term Semitic actually means,
it enables me to present myself as absolutely pro-Semitic.
Furthermore, peace-loving Jewish people need to be aware of how a
small elite group of imposters is using their name to forward an
agenda for world domination and will ultimately throw them
under the bus, so to speak, as they will do to anyone else that tries
to stop their agenda.
To back up this assertion, it must also be clarified that the
perpetrators do not originate from the Twelve Tribes of Judah
mentioned in the Bible and therefore have no claim whatsoever to
this Semitic group. They are of Khazarian origin and only
converted to Judaism in 740AD under the rule of King Bulan and
are therefore not Semites. Historian Arthur Koestler refers to them
as the ‘Thirteenth Tribe’ and explains:
The story of the Khazar Empire, as it slowly emerges from the past,
begins to look like the most cruel hoax which history has ever
perpetrated. Genetically, they are more closely related to the Hun,
Uigur and Magyar tribes than to the seed of Abraham, Isaac and
Jacob. The conversion to Judaism required an act of genius
because Judaism was a reputable religion with sacred books which
both Christian and Mohammedan respected: it elevated him above
the heathen barbarians, and secured him against the interference
of Caliph or Emperor.
I have compiled the historical evidence which indicates that the
bulk of Eastern Jewry – and hence of World Jewry – is of Khazar-
25
Turkish rather than Semitic origin. The evidence from

anthropology concurs with history in refuting the popular belief in
a Jewish race descended from the Biblical tribe.
Schlomo Sand, Professor of Contemporary History at the

University of Tel Aviv, describes Khazaria in his book ‘The
Invention of the Jewish People’:
The story begins in the fourth century CE, when some nomadic
tribes accompanied by the Huns surged westward. These Khazars
were a coalition of strong Turks or Hunnic-Bulgar clans who
mingled with the Scythians from between the Black Sea and the
Caspian Sea. The Khazars collected taxes from them all and ruled
from Kiev in the northwest to the Crimean Peninsula in the south,
and from the upper Volga to present-day Georgia. At some stage
between the mid-eighth and mid-ninth centuries, the Khazars
adopted Jewish monotheism as their particular faith and rite.
Proselytes have always striven to find some direct genealogical link
to the patriarchs of Biblical mythology, and this tendency affected
many of the Khazars, who wanted to believe that they were
descended from the Israelite tribes.
Gerard Menuhin, the Jewish son of the great violinist Yehudi

Menuhin, in his book ‘Tell the Truth and Shame the Devil’, agrees
with the assertion that the so-called, predominantly Jewish
perpetrators are not historical people of Judea but imposters that
adopted their mask of Judaism centuries later:
The fact that this family of coin-dealers only assumed their Jewish
identity through the 8th Century Khazar conversion to Ashkenazi
Jews, while inescapably retaining their Asiatic and Mongoloid
traits, does not prevent them from claiming Jewish heritage.
26
Who are these beings exactly – beings whose nature is unnatural

and whose ambitions are contemptible; who are therefore inferior
to those they seek to dominate? In descent, part Khazar, part not;
in belief, part pious, part not. They have no common ethnicity or
religion, and cannot, according to the Bible, be ascribed to the
Semitic races. They have no connection to Palestine. As a vagrant
grouping their effect should be negligible. Yet they have so
unsettled and tormented the world that it can never be at peace.
Today, Khazars comprise the majority of Jews everywhere and
reflect the non-Semitic, militant, as opposed to the orthodox,
tendency of Jewry. Although the Ashkenazi created the Zionist
movement, they have no claim to be descended from the Jews who
might once have lived in Palestine.
Herbert G. Wells wrote in 1920:
It is highly likely that the bulk of Jews’ ancestors never lived in

Palestine at all, which witnesses the power of historical assertion
over fact.
Therefore historians, Jewish professors, prominent writers and

the son of a famous line of Jewish Rabbis all seem to agree that the
conspiracy headed by the international banking cartel are not of
Judean origin at all, but are from the Crimea, previously known as
the kingdom of Khazaria. Have you heard of Khazaria before? I
wonder why not. Why was such an important empire not included
in the school curriculum or in history books found in all the main
bookshop chains?
In 2012, a comprehensive study by Eran Elhaik of the Jewish
ancestry came to the conclusion that contemporary Eastern
European Jews comprise the largest ethno-religious aggregate of
modern Jewish communities, accounting for approximately ninety-
27
percent of over thirteen million Jews worldwide. In the report the

author refrains from using the term Ashkenazi Jews because they
disagree with the narrative that European Jews migrated from
Palestine and settled in Germany before migrating eastwards. The
ancestral study goes on to agree with previous assertions that the
vast majority of modern Jews are in fact of Khazar origin and
therefore have no tie whatsoever to the land currently known as
Israel:
The Khazarian hypothesis considers Eastern Europeans Jews to be

descended of the Khazars. The Khazars were a confederation of
Slavic, Scythian, Hunnic-Bulgar, Iranian, Alans, and Turkish tribes
who formed in the central northern Caucasus one of the most
powerful empires during the late Iron Age and converted to
Judaism in the 8th century CE. Following the collapse of their
empire and the Black Death (1347 – 1348) the Judeo-Khazars fled
Westwards, settling in the rising Polish Kingdom and Hungary and
eventually spreading to Central and Western Europe.
Though Judaism was born encased in theological-historical myth,
no Jewish historiography was produced from the time of Joseph
Flavius (1st century CE) to the 19th century. Early historians
bridged the historical gap simply by linking modern Jews directly
to the ancient Judeans, a paradigm that was later embedded in
medical science and crystalized as a narrative.
Our PC, biogeographical estimation, admixture, IBD, ASD, and
uniparental analyses were consistent in depicting a Caucasus
ancestry for European Jews and pinpointed the biogeographical
origin of European Jews to the south of Khazaria.
Further proof that most modern Jews are in fact of Khazarian

origin, rather than descendants of Judea is illustrated by the fact
that the term Jew did not exist in either the Rheims (Douai)
28
Edition of the Bible printed in 1582 or the King James authorized

translation, first printed in 1611. It was only introduced in the
1769 revision onwards due to pressure from powerful, well-
financed international pressure groups that began to arise during
the 18th century. The modern colloquial idiom ‘Jew’ replaced a
person belonging to Jehudah (Judah, or Palestine). It is a
misrepresentation and has significant historical ramifications. To
put it simply, Khazarian Jews are not, and never were people from
Judea.
The main thing to take from this rather lengthy, but necessary
pre-emptive rebuttal of any claim to be anti-Semitic is that the
perpetrators of such a monstrous plan to control and cull the
majority of humanity are not Semites. Therefore, any claim to
being anti-Semitic does not hold water and will not prevent further
investigation into a tiny group of psychopaths that will adopt
whatever nationality or religion best provides cover for their dark
conspiracy.
So, irrespective of whatever race, religion or nationality that
these imposters have used as a front, it’s time to narrow down and
name the culprits for what they really are. That statement in itself is
complex because the Hidden Hand purposely conceal themselves
behind an array of misleading titles including: The Deep State, The
Illuminati, The Black Nobility, Zionists, Jesuits, Sabbatean
Frankists, The Priory of Sion, Kabbalists and Freemasons, all of
which feed into the hierarchical structure but are not the head of
the snake. These terms do not best describe the glue that holds
them all together.
Henry Makow, Ph.D., is one of very few outspoken Jews on the
subject. He explains the multiple terminology used to describe the
same elite group:
29
The Illuminati Order was preceded in the 1500’s in Spain by the

Alumbrados, a Christian heresy started by crypto Jews called
Marranos. The founder of the Jesuit Order, Ignatious of Loyola,
was a Marrano/Alumbrado. Thus when people today argue
whether it is the Jesuits or Zionists or Illuminati who are
responsible for our troubles, they are really talking about the same
beast.
Eustace Mullins (1923 – 2010), known as the world’s leading

expert on the Rothschilds and their central banking system,
confirms this belief when he says:
In fact, I point out that all the conspiracies in history – especially

during the last 5,000 years – are actually different aspects of the
same conspiracy. Some people fix on one aspect of the conspiracy,
and say this is the problem, others say another thing, but the thing
is all the conspirators work together. All the conspirators are part
of the same operation. And this is what people are very reluctant
to believe.
Taking the most popular term, the Illuminati, this was a group
founded in 1776 and fronted by Adam Weishaupt. According to
William Guy Carr, he was tasked to adopt the rituals and rites of
illuminism for use as initiation into Grand Orient Masonry. By
1788 there were over 2,000 Lodges in France with over 100,000
individuals. Quoting from the fantastic work of Juri Lina, in
‘Architects of Deception’ it states:
On 1st May 1776, a secret society was founded in Ingolstadt,

Bavaria, and called themselves the ‘Perfectibilists’. Heading the
organisation was the 28yr old University Professor Adam
Weishaupt. In 1779 this new subversive organisation was
30
rechristened ‘The Illuminati Order’ and their slogan became ‘The

Illuminati Must Rule the World!”
On 1st May 1998, exactly 222 years after the founding of the
Illuminati (222 years being a third of 666, which in turn is a third
of 1998), the European Bank was established, which is actually a
cartel of private banks. The Masonic bankers were therefore trying
to realize the Knights Templar idea of creating a European Super
State by means of the banking system.
The reason for selecting the exact date was not by accident, as
will become apparent later in the book with the choice of dates for
all so-called terrorist attacks or prominent historical events. The 1st
May is an occult holiday known as Beltane and when you realise
that the same elite group was behind Communism, the fact that
they also celebrate May Day is no surprise.
The website humansarefree.com goes on to say about
Weishaupt:
In 1770, the money lenders (who had recently organised the house
of Rothschild), retained Weishaupt to revise and modernise the
age-old Protocols designed to give the Synagogue of Satan ultimate
world domination so they can impose the Luciferian ideology
upon what remains of the human race, after the final social
cataclysm, by use of satanic despotism. He acted under the
direction of Baron Amschel Mayer von Rothschild, a Knight of
Malta and the real architect of the Bavarian Illuminati.
The plan required the destruction of all existing governments and
religions. This objective was to be reached by dividing the masses,
whom he termed Goyim (meaning human cattle) into opposing
camps in ever increasing numbers on political, racial, social,
economic and other issues.
31
The term Illuminati is derived from the word Lucifer, which

means bearer of light or being of extraordinary brilliance. The
Latin word illuminatus, means one who is illuminated. This refers
to a person who has received the full extent of the initiation that is
available through Freemasonry where initiates are known as
Masters of the Temple. According to William Guy Carr in ‘Pawns
in the Game’:
The Illuminati was organized to carry out the inspirations given to

the High Priests by Lucifer during the performance of their
Cabbalistic Rites.
Therefore, from now on in this book the perpetrators of the

historic plan will be referred to by their true and overriding loyalty,
beyond all racial, political and national affiliations. They are simply
and accurately Luciferians. In fact, to confirm the link between the
plan for a New World Order and the all-seeing eye of Lucifer, the
controlled Wikipedia quotes David Spangler of the United Nations
Planetary Initiative as saying:
No one will enter the New World Order unless he or she will
make a pledge to worship Lucifer. No one will enter the New Age
unless he will take a Luciferian initiation.
One of the most famous 33rd degree Freemasons, Albert Pike,

confirms this loyalty in a letter written to the Palladian Councils,
(14th July, 1889):
Lucifer, the Light-Bearer! Strange and mysterious name given to

the Spirit of Darkness! Lucifer, the Son of the Morning! Is it he
who bears the light, and with its splendours intolerable blinds
feeble, sensual or selfish souls? Doubt it not!
32
That which we must say to a crowd is – we worship a God, but it is

the God that one adores without superstition. To you, Sovereign
Grand Inspectors General, we say this that you may repeat it to the
Brethren of the 32nd, 31st, and 30th degrees – the Masonic religion
should be, by all of us initiates of the high degrees, maintained in
the purity of the Luciferian Doctrine. Yes, Lucifer is God, and
unfortunately Adonay is also God. For the eternal law is that there
is no light without shade, no beauty without ugliness, no white
without black, for the absolute cannot exist as two Gods. Thus the
doctrine of Satanism is a heresy; and the true and pure
philosophical religion is the belief in Lucifer, the equal of Adonay;
but Lucifer, God of light and God of good is struggling for
humanity against Adonay, the God of darkness and evil.
Any book on the subject would not be complete without a

quote from William Cooper’s book ‘Beyond a Pale Horse’ (1991).
A man of incredible insight, eventually paying for it with his life,
he said:
They are and always have been Luciferian and internationalist.

They give allegiance to no particular nation, although they have
used, on occasion, nationalism to further their causes. The
ultimate objective of the leaders is a determination to win for
themselves undisputed control of the wealth, natural resources,
and manpower of the entire planet.
For anyone that doubts the link between the Luciferian Khazars
and Freemasonry, in 1866 Dr. Isaac Wise wrote in the ‘Israelite for
America’ that:
Masonry is a Jewish initiation, whose history, degrees, charges,

passwords and explanations are Jewish from end to end.
33
However, so as not to taint the lower levels of Freemasonry,

who I am sure do a lot of good work in the community, Professors
Cosandey and Rennes said in Munich 1785:
All Illuminati are Freemasons, but far from all Freemasons are
Illuminati.
Occultist and author Manly P. Hall also reaffirms the

connection been the upper echelons of Masonry and
Luciferianism:
When the Mason learns that the key to the warrior on the block is
the proper application of the dynamo of living power, he has
learned the mystery of the craft. The seething energies of Lucifer
are in his hands and before he may step onward and upward, he
must prove his ability to properly apply energy.
I hereby promise the Great Spirit Lucifer, Prince of Demons, that
each year I will bring unto him a human soul to do with as it may
please him, and in return Lucifer promises to bestow upon me the
treasures of the earth and fulfil my every desire for the length of
my natural life. If I fail to bring him each year the offering
specified above, then my own soul shall be forfeit to him.
Although Luciferianism seems to be what you may think as

Satanism, it also encompasses the recently popular New Age
religions seen promoted by the likes of David Icke. Quoting from
the website compellingtruth.org:
Luciferianism is a system of belief which involves black magic

(magick) in its worship of Lucifer, and often other so-called deities
in pursuit of deeper understanding, power and connection with
the true self, known as ‘enlightenment’. Luciferianism may include
any number of combinations of beliefs tending towards New Age
34
type of spirituality or occult spirit worship, atheism, or a

monotheistic belief in Lucifer as God.
David Spangler confirms this is his book ‘Reflections on the

Christ’ (1978):
Lucifer comes to give us the final gift of wholeness. If we accept it

then he is free and we are free. That is the Luciferic initiation. It is
one that many people now, and in the days ahead, will be facing,
for it is an initiation into the New Age.
Most of the Luciferian secret societies claim to have

illumination and Gnostic teachings invert the truth, making Satan
the God and God the enemy. Although the Luciferians don’t
normally like to admit it, the apostle Paul tells us that Lucifer is in
fact Satan who masquerades as an angel of light, the same Satan
that the book of Genesis describes as leading the Fallen Angels, or
Nephilim:
And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of

light. (2 Corinthians 11:14)
Therefore, whatever your religious beliefs, if any, all you need to

take from this is that you don’t have to be religious in any way to
understand that there is a tyrannical plan for a New World Order.
However, what you must realise is that the Luciferians that have,
for centuries, continued incessantly towards their ultimate goal of
world domination, are following their own religious doctrine. This
can be best summarised by Professor Revilo P. Oliver in his
‘Conspiracy or Degeneracy’ presentation, (2nd July, 1966):
A theory that a conspiracy has been working consciously for many

centuries is not plausible unless one attributes to them a religious
35
unity. That is tantamount to regarding them as Satanists engaged

in the worship and service of supernatural evil. The directors of
the conspiracy must see or otherwise directly perceive
manifestations which convince them of the existence and power of
Lucifer. And since subtle conspirators must be very shrewd men,
not likely to be deceived by auto-suggestion, hypnosis, or drugs, we
should have to conclude that they probably are in contact with a
force of pure evil.
Enforcing this view that the Luciferians have some sort of

occult or supernatural influence, Manly P. Hall, a 33rd degree
Freemason, boasts in his book ‘The Secret Destiny of America’:
There exists in the world today, and has existed for thousands of
years, a body of enlightened humans united in what might be
termed, an Order of the Quest. It is composed of those whose
intellectual and spiritual perceptions have revealed to them that
civilization has a secret destiny. The outcome of this 'secret destiny'
is a World Order ruled by a King with supernatural powers. This
King was descended of a divine race; that is, he belonged to the
Order of the Illumined for those who come to a state of wisdom
than belong to a family of heroes-perfected human beings.
This Chapter intended to name who is behind the historical

plan to obtain complete control over humanity. Although many of
the perpetrators are from the international banking cartel, and
outwardly purport to be Jewish, overcoming their divertive tactic of
anti-Semitism, it has been clearly shown that not only are they not
Semitic in origin, they are first and foremost Luciferians. Rather
than trying to summarise the true intentions of all Luciferians, it’s
better to leave it to one of their advocates, one of America’s most
famous Jewish pornographers Samuel Roth:
36
Our major vice of old, as of today, is parasitism. We are a people

of vultures living on the labour and the good nature of the rest of
the world. But, despite our faults, we would never have done so
much damage to the world if it had not been for our genius for
evil leadership.
37
Chapter two
The Historical Plot
Before looking at the hierarchical power structure of how the

Luciferians recruit through Secret Societies, and have international
think-tanks and institutions all working towards the same agenda,
it needs to be addressed whether or not a centuries-old plot to
enslave humanity actually exists.
A fascinating insight into this plot was researched by the highly
respected Naval Commander, William Guy Carr, in the early
1900s. In his aptly titled book ‘Pawns in the Game’, he reveals the
plot:
In 1773, when Mayer Rothschild was only thirty years of age, he

invited twelve other wealthy and influential men to meet him in
Frankfurt. His purpose was to convince them that if they agreed to
pool their resources they could finance and control the ‘World
Revolutionary Movement’ (nowadays known as the New World
Order) and use it as their manual of action to win ultimate control
of the wealth, natural resources and man-power of the entire
world.
38
Although this statement may seem hard to corroborate, proof of

such secret meetings and the resulting plot were made known by
what has been called an ‘Act of God’, and has been well
documented. In 1785, a courier was travelling by horse from
Frankfurt to Paris carrying detailed information of the plan for
world domination and in particular, instructions for the planned
French Revolution. The origin of these documents was the Jewish
illuminati in Germany with the package addressed to the Grand
Master of Masonry in France. The courier was struck by lightning
while passing through Ratisbon and was killed. The documents
retrieved on his person were handed over to the Bavarian
Government.
Captain Archibauld Maule Ramsay explains the same event in
‘The nameless War’ (1952):
In 1785 there happened a strange event, which makes it seem as

though the heavenly powers themselves made a last moment to
warn France and Europe against these massing powers of evil:
lightning struck dead a messenger of the illuminati at Ratisbon.
The police found on the body papers dealing with plans for world
revolution.
Carr goes on to describe how, after various governments failed

to act on the information made known by the Bavarian Police, the
sister of Marie Antoinette (the daughter of Emperor Francis I of
Austria, who married Louis XVI of France,) wrote to her to warn
her of the revolutionary plot, which connected the international
bankers and Freemasonry. Because she refused to heed repeated
warnings, she and her husband died under the guillotine.
In ‘Rise of the New World Order’, J. Michael Thomas Hays
goes on to explain:
39
In October 1783, Joseph Utzschneider, a lawyer who had dropped

out of the illuminati in August, presented to the Bavarian Duchess
Maria Anna a document which detailed the activities and goals of
the illuminati. The Duchess gave it to Duke Karl Theodore
Dalberg, the Electrar Paliatinate of Bavaria. After discovering from
these documents the intention to take over the world by
overthrowing all civil government, he issued a proclamation on
March 2nd 1785 identifying the illuminati as a branch of the
Freemasons and ordered that their lodges be shut down.
In 1786, the Bavarian government gathered together all the
confiscated documents from closing down the lodges and raiding
the houses of illuminati members Baron Bassus and Count
Massenhausen. The findings were published in a book titled ‘The
Writings of the Order and Sect of the Illuminati’, which was
circulated to every government and crowned head of Europe.
According to Carr, between 1917 and 1919, White Paper

archives show that the British Government was given full
particulars regarding the secret power behind the tyrannical plot,
which was predominantly made up of international bankers. The
information was officially submitted by British and American
intelligence officers and is confirmed in archives by Mr Oudendyke
(Republic of Netherlands Government in Leningrad) and Sir M.
Findlay.
In 1849, ‘L‘Anti-Semitisme’, a publication written by Bernard
Lazar revealed how Benjamin Goldsmid, his brother Abraham,
their partner Moses Mecatin and his nephew Sir Moses Montifiore
(all financiers in England) were affiliated with their continental
plotters to bring about the revolution in France.
In 1905, further afield in Russia, Professor S. Nilus had arrived
at the same conclusion and printed a book called ‘The Jewish
Peril’. This describes a very similar plot for world domination by a
40
small handful of international bankers. The conspirators would use

Darwinism, Marxism and Nietzcheism to bring it about. The
original documents to source this book came from a woman who
had stolen them from a wealthy international banker who had
returned to her apartment after addressing top level executives of
the Grand Orient Lodges in Paris 1901. The same documents were
later translated into English by Victor E. Marsden in 1921, and
titled the ‘Protocols of the Elders of Zion’.
Zionism was officially organized in 1897 and was to be used as a
part of the plot. Describing this is 1917, Louis Marshall (Legal
Representative of Kuhn-Loeb & Co.) wrote:
Zionism is but an incident of a far-reaching plan, it is merely a

convenient peg on which to hang a powerful weapon.
Further sources that highlight such a historical plot include a

special meeting of the Emergency Council of European Rabbis
held in Budapest in 1952. In Rabbi Emanuel Rabinovich’s
somewhat racist speech, he explains that the plan was already then
seen as nearing completion:
You have been called here to recapitulate the principal steps of our
new program. As you know, we had hoped to have twenty years
between wars to consolidate the great gains we made from World
War II, but our increasing numbers in certain vital areas is
arousing opposition to us, and we must now work with every
means at our disposal to precipitate World War III. The goal for
which we have striven so concertedly for 3,000 years is at last
within our reach, and because its’ fulfilment is so apparent, it
behoves us to increase our efforts, and our caution, tenfold. I can
safely promise you that our race will take its rightful place in the
world, with every Jew a king, and every Gentile a slave.
41
Our control commissions will, in the interests of peace, and wiping

out inter-racial tensions, forbid whites to mate with whites. The
end of the white man, our most dangerous enemy will become
only a memory. We have turned all the inventions of the white
man into weapons against him.
A similar assertion in 1931 came from Jean Izoulet, a Grand

Orient Mason and member of the Alliance Israelite Universelle. In
‘Paris la Capitale des Religions’ he wrote:
The meaning of the history of the last century has been that the
300 Jewish financiers, all masters of the chair, will rule the world.
More recently, there are countless quotes from prominent

political leaders and international business insiders that speak
proudly of a plan for one small group to control the whole world.
Some of them dress it up as a perfectly humane idea that everyone
shall live as one, but the majority cannot conceal their real agenda.
Here are a few examples:
We are on the verge of a global transformation. All we need is the

right major crisis and the nations will accept the New World
Order.
(David Rockefeller)
We have before us the opportunity to forge, for ourselves and for

future generations, a New World Order. A world where the rule of
law, not the law of the jungle, rules all nations. When we are
successful – and we will be – we have a real chance at this New
World order. An order in which the United Nations can use its
peacekeeping forces to fulfil the promise and vision of its founders.
(George H.W. Bush - 1991)
42
We shall have World Government, whether or not we like it. The

only question is whether World Government will be achieved by
consent or conquest.
(James Paul Warburg - 1950)
We are moving towards a New World Order, the World of

Communism. We shall never turn off that road.
Mikhail Gorbachev (1987)
Although many people are wary of David Icke due to his

conclusion that behind this historical plot is a bloodline of
Annunaki (Nephilim) reptilians, credit must be given for over
thirty years of research on the subject. Whether deep down Icke is
actually some form of disinformation agent, awakening those
searching for answers but then steering them down the New Age-
Gnostic rabbit-hole of cosmic one-ness, the majority of what he says
makes complete sense. Arguably, it is only the final conclusion to
who heads the plot that he is either misguided or purposely
distracting his growing number of followers. What I would agree
with is the following quote that the vast majority of people, who
simply dismiss the idea of a world conspiracy, are ignorant of the
information widely available:
People who believe that there is no major world conspiracy which

involves a small number of people manipulating humanity through
a hierarchical structure of control toward a New World Order, all
have one identical factor in common. They have, in actual fact, not
looked genuinely into the abundance of well-researched
information on world conspiracy to see if there is one!
If people genuinely look at the abundance of historical

evidence available, it leaves little doubt of a secretive plot for one
43
small group to control all the world’s resources, including the

population and rule by a single world government. In all essence,
that’s what Globalism and the United Nations effectively are, even
if you don’t realise who is actually pulling the strings. However, as
part and parcel of this plot are the future utopian ideals of the
Luciferians, which is where war, famine, dramatic population
reduction and global financial meltdown come into the nefarious
agenda. They have not yet been achieved, but all the signs show
that we are approaching the final stages of the plan. As a 33rd
degree Mason and outspoken proponent of the plan, Albert Pike,
in his letter to Mazzini (15th August, 1871) described the necessity
for three world wars. Bearing in mind that this was written before
any of the World Wars, he said the First World War was to
overthrow the Tsars in Russia and turn the country into a
stronghold of atheistic Communism. The Second World War was
to be orchestrated to defeat Nazism and promote Zionsim while
establishing the sovereign state of Israel in Palestine. Finally, World
War III is planned between Political Zionists and the Muslim
world. After destroying each-other, Pike then goes on to say:
The remaining nations, once more divided against each-other on

the issue, will be forced to fight themselves into a state of complete
exhaustion physically, mentally, spiritually and economically. After
World War III is ended, those who aspire to undisputed world
domination will provoke the greatest social cataclysm the world
has ever known.
Commander William Guy Carr summarises the agenda of the

historical plot when he says it will require:
The Abolition of: all ordered national governments, inheritance,

private property, patriotism, the individual home and family life as
44
the cell from which all civilization have stemmed, and all religions
established and existing, so that the Luciferian ideology of
totalitarianism may be imposed on mankind. In the final phase of
the conspiracy the government will consist of the despot, the
Synagogue of Satan, and a few millionaires, economists, and
scientists who have proved their devotion to the Luciferian cause.
All others are to be integrated into a vast conglomeration of
mongrelized humanity, by artificial insemination practiced on an
international scale.
Although the evidence provided shows a clear historical

indication of a dictatorial plot to rule over the world, the following
chapters will add more clarification. They will reveal how all the
separate elements are designed to work like cogs in a wheel, all tip-
toeing towards a One-World Government, ruled over by a tiny elite
group of Luciferians.
To finalise this chapter, I will leave it to a quote from
Republican Larry P. Macdonald, who was killed in the suspicious
shooting down of Koreans Airlines 007 in 1983. As the newly
elected leader of the John Birch Society, he was openly anti-CFR
and anti-Trilateral Commission. He seems to have ended up like
anyone that challenges the Luciferians on an open stage:
The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a One-

World Government combining Supercapitalism and Communism
under the same tent, all under their control. Do I mean
conspiracy? Yes, I do. I am convinced there is such a plot,
international in scope, generations old in planning, incredibly evil
in intent.
45
Chapter three
The Hierarchy of Power
Any large organisation has to have a hierarchy of control and

leadership in order to function efficiently and manage all the
various departments that descend from the power structure at the
top. The New World Order is no different and operates more like
a globalist mega-company than a seedy bunch of Luciferians
meeting in the basements of their stately homes.
Referring back to the quote from William Guy Carr in the
introduction, describing how Mayer Rothschild met in the 18th
century with twelve other international banking bloodlines, it is no
surprise that more recently researchers conclude that at the top of
the hierarchical pyramid of power is a tightly knit group of thirteen
family bloodlines. This secretive group is known as the ‘Supreme
Council of Thirteen’. They were and still are the executive body
that rule over the ‘Council of Thirty-Three’ and ultimately the
‘Committee of 300’. He continues:
The Supreme Council used the Ingolstadt lodge to organize a

campaign to infiltrate into Continental Freemasonry, and, under
the cloak of social enjoyment and public philanthropy, organize
their revolutionary underground. The plan was to establish Lodges
where they could recruit non-Jews of wealth, position, and
46
influence by means of bribery, corruption and graft so as to make

them disciples of Illuminism.
Juri Lina confirms the same conclusion that Commander Carr

made in 1950 by stating:
Above all higher degrees of Freemasonry is the Supreme Council

of the Order, whose members are called Areopagi. Their chairman
is the secret King of the Illuminati, whose name and residence are
known only to the Areopagi. They are the invisible class, the
hidden part of the conspiracy.
In ‘Illuminati Defector: Rothschilds Rule with Druid Witches’,

Henry Makow Ph.D. describes the defection of John Todd in 1972
and relates his testimony that:
Halloween is an appropriate time to learn that a ‘Grand Druid

Council of 13 Witches’ control the Illuminati, and meets eight
times annually on the Witches’ Sabbaths when millions of occult
practitioners engage in orgies, which sometimes involve human
sacrifice.
The Rothschilds lead the Illuminati. On the top of each pyramid
you will see a capstone with an eye in it. The capstone is the
Rothschild Family or Tribunal that rules over the Illuminati. They
were the creators of it. The eye is Lucifer, their god and their voice.
The Council of 33 is directly under them, that is the 33 highest
Masons in the world.
According to Dr. Webster Tarpley and James Higham, the

ruling families that sit at the top of the pyramid seem to
correspond quite well with the leading banking dynasties that
control the Federal Reserve and Bank of England, among all other
central banks. They list the family bloodlines as including:
47
Rothschild, Kuhn, Loeb, Lehman, Rockefeller, Sach, Warburg,

Lazard, Seaf, Goldman, Schiff, Morgan and Schroeder.
At the top of this Supreme Council of Thirteen, the name

Rothschild keeps coming up time and again in historical texts.
Almost a hundred years ago, Major General Count Cherep-
Spiridovich made this quite clear in his 1926 publication of ‘The
Secret World Government or the Hidden Hand’:
Baron Edouard A. Rothschild V. is today the uncrowned ruler of

the world. He controls the 300 men of the Hidden hand, owns
$300,000,000,000 and 90% of the world’s press. Most of the
statesmen are his obedient valets!
The author of ‘13 Bloodlines of the Illuminati’, Fritz

Springmeier explains:
The Illuminati are an elite group of thirteen bloodlines. They are

what are called generational Satanists. That means that they have
practised their religion down from one generation to the next.
They lead double lives. They have one life that the world sees and
then they have a hidden life that the world doesn’t see. There have
been very few people that have been able to break through the
secrecy.
Although not daring to mention the top of the Luciferian

hierarchy by name, President Wilson in the last days of his
presidency is acknowledged for saying:
Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of

commerce and manufacturing, are afraid of somebody, are afraid
of something. They know that there is a power somewhere, so
organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so pervasive, that
48
they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in
condemnation of it.
One of the best sources of information on lower down the

pyramid structure of hierarchy, effectively at the level of managing
world affairs is a book by Dr John Coleman aptly titled
‘Conspirators’ Hierarchy: The Story of the Committee of 300’. He
explains:
The Committee of 300 is a product of the British East India

Company's Council of 300. The East India Company was
chartered by the British Royal family in 1600. It made vast
fortunes in the opium drug trade with China and became the
largest company on earth in its time. Today, through many
powerful alliances, the Committee of 300 rules the world and is
the driving force behind the criminal agenda to create a New
World Order, under a Totalitarian Global Government. With its
aristocracy, its ownership of the U.S. Federal Reserve banking
system, insurance companies, giant corporations, foundations,
communications networks, presided over by a hierarchy of
conspirators — this is the enemy. Secret societies exist by
deception. Each is a hierarchy with an inner circle at the top, who
deceives those below with lies, such as claiming a noble agenda;
thus, duping them into following a web of compartmentalized
complicity.
The enemy is clearly identifiable as the Committee of 300 and its
front organizations, such as the Royal Institute for International
Affairs (Chatham House), the Club of Rome, NATO, U.N., the
Black Nobility, the Tavistock Institute, CFR and all its affiliated
organizations, the think tanks and research institutions controlled
by Stanford and the Tavistock Institute of Human Relations and
last, but certainly not least, the military establishment.
49
The Committee of 300 are made up of the wealthiest family

bloodlines on earth, many of which originate from what is known
as the Black Nobility, Venetians that married into European royalty
and aristocracy. Examples of such immensely wealthy Venetian
families include the Mocenigo, Cornaro, Dandolo, Contarni,
Morosini, Zorzi and the Tron dynasties. As these families and their
vast fortunes spread throughout Europe, the Guelphs (another
word for the Black Nobility) supported William of Orange in his
seizure of the throne of England and the East India Company.
Eustace Mullins gives an insight into the history of the leading
families that make up the Committee of 300 in ‘The British East
India Company – the Drug Company of the Venetian Black
Nobility’:
It has taken centuries of patient effort for the World Order to

attain the power it exercises today. Its origins as an international
force go back to the Phoenician slave-traders, continues through
the Phanariot families of the Byzantine Empire, then the Venetian
and Genoese traders and bankers of the Middle Ages, who moved
into Spain and Portugal, and later into England and Scotland. By
the 14th century, the Genoese controlled the Scottish landlords.
During the Middle Ages, European power centres coalesced into
two camps: the Ghibellines, those who supported the Emperor's
Hohenstaufen family and the Guelphs, from Welf, the German
prince who competed with Frederick for control of the Holy
Roman Empire. The Pope then allied himself with the Guelphs
against the Ghibellines resulting in their victory. All of modern
history stems directly from the struggle between these two powers.
To understand the mind-set of such a small group of what are

effectively, psychopaths that seem to lack the same empathy that
normal human beings are born with, Dr. Webster Tarpley and
50
James Higham explain in their similar titled book ‘The Concept of

Oligarchy’:
At the centre of oligarchy is the idea that certain families are born
to rule as an arbitrary elite, while the vast majority of any given
population is condemned to oppression, serfdom, or slavery.
During most of the past 2,500 years, oligarchs have been identified
by their support for the philosophical writings of Aristotle and
their rejection of the epistemology of Plato.
Aristotle asserted that slavery is a necessary institution, because
some are born to rule and others to be ruled. He also reduced the
question of human knowledge to the crudest sense certainty and
perception of ‘facts’. Aristotle’s formalism is a means of killing
human creativity, and therefore represents absolute evil. This evil
is expressed by the bestialist view of the oligarchs that human
beings are the same as animals.
Oligarchs identify wealth purely in money terms, and practice
usury, monetarism, and looting at the expense of technological
advancement and physical production. Oligarchs have always been
associated with the arbitrary rejection of true scientific discovery
and scientific method in favour of open anti-science or more subtle
obscurantist pseudo-science.
The oligarchy has believed for millennia that the Earth is
overpopulated; the oligarchical commentary on the Trojan War
was that this conflict was necessary in order to prevent greater
numbers of mankind from oppressing “Mother Earth.” They’ve
constantly stressed race and racial characteristics, often as a means
for justifying slavery.
According to Dr John Coleman, the Order of the Garter is the

secret inner group, acting as an elite group within the Order of St.
John of Jerusalem which is the British part of the Knights of Malta.
He specifies the Knights of the Garter as the leader of the
51
Committee of 300. As an example of the sort of characters that are

members of such organisations, he cites Lord Peter Carrington
who is also a member of the satanic Order of Osiris and other
demonic groups. Similarly, he says Lord Palmerston ‘is an example
from history of another Knight of the Garter who was totally corrupt,
pretended to be a Christian, and practiced Satanism’.
There are many references to the Committee of 300 in
historical publications. To give an insight into how their power and
influence was received in the past centuries, here are a few quotes:
All this talk about peace and the League of Nations, World
Courts, outlawing wars, war to end war etc are tricks to fool us
regularly and to keep us busy. The only way of salvation is the trial
of the Hidden hand. How to start it: summon to court any of the
300.
William Jennings Bryan (Cross of Gold Speech 1896)
He lived with learned men, said Disraeli of his father, who again
returned to England in 1788. These were the Illuminati and the
Learned Elders of Zion or the 300 men.
(Benjamin Disraeli – 1st Earl of Beaconsfield (British Prime
Minister 1868 & 1874) aka ‘The Father of Zionism’).
Soult has since always shown an extreme attention to Mrs

Bismarck-Menken and to her son, the future Man of Blood and
Iron. A Jew and one of the 300 of the Hidden hand, Soult
occupied the highest posts in France until his death in 1851 and
betrayed every Christian Ruler.
(Maj. Gen. Count Cherep-Spiridovich - 1926)
We must daily remember Christ’s words and fight his foes. Let us
not listen to the 300 or their valets, but to one, who dares openly
52
to accuse Satansim – Bolshevism, and whom 300,000,000

Catholics regard as the Vicar of Christ.
(Pius XI - New York Times 19th Dec, 1924)
Therefore, at the top of the hierarchical pyramid of control sits

the secretive ‘Supreme Council of Thirteen’, ruling over the
‘Council of Thirty-Three’ and then the wealthiest bloodlines which
include Royalty and Global Corporations that form the
‘Committee of 300’. Coordinating so many international banking
institutions, companies, monarchies and political leaders would
require an extremely organised central body that effectively brings
them all together, producing a single agenda for each to slot into.
This is explained in ‘Rise of the New World Order’ by J. Michael
Thomas Hays:
Today, 95% of the goals of the Great Plan are public, and they
have actually been letting it out for decades their intentions of
forming a One-World Government. The 5% of the plan that is
still secret is contained by the modern day masters of the Great
Plan and are the upper echelon, 33rd degree and higher, of the
modern day incarnation of Luciferian Babylonian Mystery
Religion called Freemasonry. The other 95% of the orchestration
of the Great Plan is right in the open for anyone who cares to
open their eyes to see, represented by The Royal Institute for
International Affairs, The Council on Foreign Relations, The
Bilderberg Group, The Club of Rome, the Trilateral Commission
and the United Nations. These are all organisations started and
controlled by the masters of the Great Plan.
These six international institutions are collectively known as the

Round Table. They were originally founded by Cecil Rhodes after
his looting of the gold and diamond mines in Africa. They are
53
effectively think-tanks and controlling bodies that steer the

direction of the One-World Government. Each of these very
influential bodies will be looked at in more detail in the following
chapter.
54
Chapter four
The Organisational Structure
Coordinating all the activities of the Committee of 300, their

national governments, global corporations, natural resources and
political direction is the Round Table Group. Consisting of six key
organisations, they all feed information between each-other to steer
all the key players towards their ultimate goal and objective, a One-
World Government. Quoting from ‘Rise of the New World
Order’, by J. Michael Thomas Hays:
Cecil Rhodes was financially backed by the Rothschilds and

acquired enormous wealth by developing diamond mining
properties in Africa, founding the DeBeers diamond company. At
one time, DeBeers controlled ninety-percent of the entire world’s
diamond market. The African country of Rhodesia (now
Zimbabwe and Zambia) was not only founded by Rhodes but
named after him.
As well as being a 33rd degree Mason, Rhodes was a member of the
Fabian Society which stated that World Socialism was inevitable,
and that there would be a difficult and painful transition period
for mankind in the near future. The Fabian Society was, for all
intents and purposes, the first Round Table Group member, and
served as the model for the future Round Table Group.
55
Although possibly with good intentions, the idea of combining

resources to make the world a better place may well have been
Rhodes’ initial idea. However, in his third will, Rhodes left his
huge fortune to Lord Rothschild. William Bramley explains that
the institutions Rhodes established ‘ended up falling into the corrupt
hands of the ‘Brotherhood of the Snake’ (the Luciferians), who would use
these institutions for the suppression of humanity’. According to
Professor Quigley, in March 1891 the secret society known as the
Round Table was formed, in the usual conspiratorial pattern of
circles within circles. Heading this secret society, Lord Rothschild
appointed Alfred Milner, who directed their efforts behind the
scenes at the highest levels of British Government, influencing
foreign policy and England’s involvement and conduct of WWI.
In ‘Tragedy and Hope’ (1966), he writes:
There does exist, and has existed for a generation, an institutional

Anglophile network which operates, to some extent, in the way the
radical Right believes the Communists act. In fact, this network,
which we may identify as the Round Table Groups, has no
aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other
groups, and frequently does so. I know of the operations of this
network because I have studied it for twenty years and was
permitted for two years in the early 1960s to examine its papers
and secret records.
In ‘Rule by Secrecy’, Jim Marrs explains:
The Round Tables started out as a collection of semi-secret groups

formed along the lines of the Illuminati and Freemasonry with
inner and outer circles, and a pyramid hierarchy. The inner circle
was called the ‘Circle of Initiates’, or ‘The Elect’, while the outer
circle was called the ‘Association of Helpers’.
56
According to David A. Rivera from modernhistoryproject.org:
The inner Circle of Initiates was led by Rhodes, and included an

Executive Committee with Stead, Brett, and Milner, the chief
Rhodes Trustee. Other members included Lord Arthur Balfour
(British Foreign Secretary who wrote to Rothschild promising his
support for the establishment of a Jewish homeland in Palestine),
Lord Lionel Rothschild, Sir Harry Johnston, and Lord Albert
Grey. The outer Association of Helpers was not implemented until
1909-1913, when Milner established it as the Round Table
organization. Their goal was to eventually establish a One-World
Government, which would be controlled by the international
banking community, under the cloak of Socialism. They saw
England, not as a European power, but as an Atlantic power, and
wanted to have a federation of the English-speaking world, which
would be controlled by them. In 1897, British and American
elitists met in order to come up with ways to accomplish Rhodes’
plan to consolidate their respective governments, which would
pave the way for a One-World Government.
In 1919, Milner established a front organization for the Round
Table, known as the Royal Institute of International Affairs,
which, after 1923, was headquartered at Chatham House (and is
sometimes referred to as the Chatham House Study Group)
located in St. James' Square in London. From 1919-1927, there
was an Institute of International Affairs that started to cover all the
Round Table Groups in the British dependencies, and the United
States (where it is known as the Council on Foreign Relations),
which was a front for J.P. Morgan and Co., who controlled a small
American Round Table Group.
Today you'll find the Institut des Relations Internationales in
Belgium, the Institute for International Affairs in the Netherlands,
the Institute for International Affairs in Rome, the Norwegian
Institute for Foreign Affairs, the French Institute of International
57
Relations, the Australian Institute of International Affairs, and

many others.
As seen in the schematic below, in addition to the Royal

Institute of International Affairs, the remaining members of the
Round Table Group include: The Bilderberg Group, The Club of
Rome, The United Nations (UN), the Council on Foreign
Relations (CFR) and the Trilateral Commission. Each of these
organisations is dominated by the Rothschilds, Rockefellers and
major manipulators like Henry Kissinger, who, in turn, answer to
higher powers further up the hierarchical pyramid.
In his books, ‘The Truth Shall Set You Free’ and ‘The Biggest
Secret’, David Icke explains the organisational structure of the
Round Table Group:
58
This network is not the most powerful expression of the

Illuminati. There are many more groups within its web, but these
Round Table organizations are a key part of its day to day
manipulation of politics, banking, business, the military (especially
NATO), education, and so on. These are the channels through
which the same global policies are coordinated outside of public
knowledge through apparently unconnected countries, political
parties, and institutions. The network was created to advance
through the 20th Century and beyond, the Illuminati agenda for
the centralized control of Planet Earth.
On a similar note, Dr. John Coleman says:
Funded by the English Rothschild family, the purpose of the

Round Table was to train business leaders who would secure the
vast gold and diamond treasures for the British Crown. It is only
one sector of the vast and all-encompassing Committee of 300. Yet
the Round Table itself consists of a maze of companies,
institutions, banks and education establishments.
The Royal Institute of International Affairs (RIIA) is a

registered charity of the Queen. However, according to its annual
report, it is funded by what Dean Henderson in ‘Big Oil and their
Bankers’, terms the four horsemen: Exxon Mobil, Chevron Texaco,
BP Amoco and Royal Dutch Shell. He goes on to explain that the
inner circle within the RIIA is dominated by secret society
influence including The Knights of St. John of Jerusalem, Knights
of Malta, and 33rd Degree Scottish Rite Freemasons. So, when you
see Prince William stood alongside his grandfather dressed in fancy
robes or the Queen herself wearing a long black cloak with a
Maltese Knight’s cross on it, you know where their allegiance lies.
59
Just to give one example of how a think-tank like the RIIA

operates: according to Daniel Estulin in ‘Shadow Masters’, they
sponsored a secret study involving Walter Lippmann and Edward
Bernays to investigate the effects of manipulating war information
for the purpose of mobilizing mass support for war. The
researchers discovered that less than ten-percent of people
understand that the process of reasoning requires the ability to
observe a problem without immediately passing judgement on it.
Since then, the brainwashers have used this fact to control war and
every important issue in society.
In America, the equivalent of the Royal Institute of
International Affairs is the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR). It
was founded in 1921 by Edward Mandell House, the chief advisor
to President Woodrow Wilson. House was a known Marxist with
the ideal of socialising the United States. In his book ‘Philip Dru:
Administrator’, House describes how America would be conquered
by controlling both the Democratic and Republican parties, as well
as the establishment of a state-controlled central bank. If anyone is
unfamiliar with the term Hegelian Dialect, this is where both sides
are controlled to bring about the desired outcome. Hegel explained
that the thesis and opposing anti-thesis, when combined, form the
synthesis originally sought after. In plain and simple terms, both
sides of political parties, Left and Right, Democrat and Republican,
Conservative or Labour, are all controlled by the same powers
higher up. Both sides are then manipulated to bring about the
desired outcome. In America this is abundantly clear when you
look over the past decades, observing that almost all Presidential
candidates, Democrat and Republican, have been CFR members.
In other words, it doesn’t matter who you vote for, politics is
60
effectively just theatre for the masses. According to Melvin Sickler

in ‘The Two Organisations That Run the United States’, who says:
The Council on Foreign Relations, right from its conception, was

to destroy the freedom and independence of the United States,
and to lead the country into a One-World Government. Important
financing for the CFR came from the Rockefeller Foundation and
Carnegie Foundation. In 1940, at the invitation of President
Roosevelt, members of the CFR gained domination over the State
Department, and they have maintained this domination ever since.
Rear Admiral Chester Ward, a previous member of the CFR for

sixteen years, made a clear warning about the true intentions of the
CFR:
The most powerful clique in these elitist groups has one objective
in common — they want to bring about the surrender of the
sovereignty of the national independence of the United States. A
second clique of international members in the CFR comprises the
Wall Street international bankers and their key agents. Primarily,
they want the world banking monopoly from whatever power ends
up in the control of global government.
Some people held out hope that President Trump was the real
deal and was going to ‘drain the swamp’ as he boasted during his
election campaign. However, as everyone is now aware, he is merely
a narcissistic stooge that operates under complete control of his
Luciferian masters. Highlighting one fact alone, within his
government he has over sixty key staff members that are either CFR
or Bilderberg members. However, in comparison, the Carter
government had 284 CFR members, which reveals who really steers
the policy agenda of the United States. Having said this, most
Americans haven’t even heard of the CFR and have no idea of its
61
power or influence in almost every aspect of their lives. One good

reason for this is that all of the principle media outlets and news
channels have editors or directors that are also CFR members.
Congressman John R. Rarick explains:
The CFR, dedicated to One-World Government, financed by a

number of the largest tax-exempt foundations, and wielding such
power and influence over our lives in the areas of finance,
business, labour, military, education, and mass communication-
media, should be familiar to every American concerned with good
government, and with preserving and defending the U.S.
Constitution and our free-enterprise system. Yet, the nation’s right-
to-know machinery, the news media, usually so aggressive in
exposures to inform our people remain conspicuously silent when
it comes to the CFR, its members and their activities.
The CFR is the establishment. Not only does it have influence and
power in key decision-making positions at the highest levels of
government to apply pressure from above, but it also finances and
uses individuals and groups to bring pressure from below, to justify
the high level decisions for converting the U.S. from a sovereign
Constitution Republic into a servile member of a One-World
Dictatorship.
Mike Culbert confirms this view about the influence of the

CFR in an article from the Independent Gazette, Richmond,
California (27th June, 1974):
There is a de facto secret government operating nationally and

internationally and involved in the highest circles of the U.S.
government, exercising an impact over domestic policies and
economics ranging between extreme influence to, at times,
outright control. This extreme influence to outright control
naturally includes the Presidency. The de facto secret government,
62
much of whose intellectual and financial muscle are to be found in

the New York office of the CFR, the great tax-free foundations,
and certain international firms and corporations.
Unfortunately, the Council on Foreign Relations is not the only

group proposing an end to the sovereignty of the United States. In
1973, The Trilateral Commission was founded to work for the
same goal, a One-World Government. Established by David
Rockefeller, after reading the Marxist ideology of Zbigniew
Brzezinski in ‘Between Two Ages’, the purpose was to link three
regions North America, Western Europe and Japan, hence the
term Trilateral. These trilateral regions have the largest share of
world trade and produce two-thirds of the world’s output. The aim
was to cooperate with economic relations, political and defence
participation, as well as to work more closely with developing or
Communist countries, to bring them on board with the plan.
In his book ‘With No Apologies’, Senator Barry Goldwater had
this to say on the subject:
The Trilateral Commission is international, and it is intended to

be the vehicle for multinational consolidation of the commercial
and banking interests by seizing control of the political
government of the United States. The Trilateral Commission
represents a skilful, coordinated effort to seize control and
consolidate the four centres of power – Political, Monetary,
Intellectual, and Ecclesiastical.
What the Trilaterals truly intend is the creation of a worldwide
economic power superior to the political government of the nation
states involved. As managers and creators of the system, they will
rule the world.
63
In ‘A People’s History of the United States’ (2015), Howard

Zinn explains that the Trilateral Commission actually serves to
represent many of the major banking, oil and media corporations.
It is a channel to bring powerful intellectuals together to discuss
the need to control populations and strengthen corporate interests,
ultimately to help them maintain power:
The Trilateral Commission apparently saw itself as helping to

create the necessary international links for the new multinational
economy. Its members came from the highest circles of politics,
business, and the media in Western Europe, Japan, and the
United States. They were from Chase Manhattan, Lehman
Brothers, Bank of America, Banque de Paris, Lloyd's of London,
Bank of Tokyo, etc. Oil, steel, auto, aeronautic, and electric
industries were represented. Other members were from Time
magazine, the Washington Post, the Columbia Broadcasting
System, Die Zeit, the Japan Times, The Economist of London, and
more.
Researcher Laurie K. Strand helps to summarise the role of the

Trilateral Commission in the book ‘People’s Almanac’ (1981):
Many of the original members of the Trilateral Commission are

now in positions of power where they are able to implement policy
recommendations of the Commission; recommendations that
they, themselves, prepared on behalf of the Commission. It is for
this reason that the Commission has acquired a reputation for
being the Shadow Government of the West. The Trilateral
Commission’s tentacles have reached so far in the political and
economic sphere that it has been described by some as a cabal of
powerful men out to control the world by creating a supernational
community dominated by the multinational corporations.
64
Swiftly moving on, the next Round Table member, the Club of
Rome is still one of the most important foreign policy arms of the
Committee of 300. Founded in 1968 by Italian industrialist,
Aurelio Peccei and the Morgenthau Group, the Club of Rome is a
global think-tank that deals with a variety of international political
issues. From the Club of Rome website, it almost sounds as if
individual human beings can participate in their non-democratic
projections. What they fail to mention is that they are an elitist
think-tank that completely bypasses the democratic process:
Scientists, economists, businessmen, international high civil

servants, heads of state and former heads of state from all five
continents who are convinced that the future of humankind is not
determined once and for all and that each human being can
contribute to the improvement of our societies.
More honestly, Dr. John Coleman, in ‘Committee of 300’,

describes the make-up of the Club of Rome:
It is a conspiratorial umbrella organisation, a marriage between

Anglo-American financiers and the old Black Nobility families of
Europe, particularly the so-called nobility of London, Venice and
Genoa.
The Club of Rome is very much involved with projecting world

population statistics and ultimately, looking at ways to reduce the
overall number of humans that inhabit the earth. Founded on a
Malthusian philosophy, Thomas Robert Malthus argued that
‘population was held within resource limits by two types of checks: positive
ones, which raised the death rate, and preventative ones, which lowered the
birth rate. The positive checks included hunger, disease and war; the
preventative checks, abortion, birth control, prostitution, homosexuality,
65
postponement of marriage, and celibacy’. Just from looking at this list it

doesn’t take a genius to relate such ‘positive and preventative
checks’ to how society has been manipulated to incorporate them
as the cultural norms.
Although the subject of Climate Change and Agenda 2030 will
be covered later in the book, it is somewhat revealing how
instrumental the Club of Rome has been in stirring up this agenda,
diverting the blame from globalist corporations to the new enemy,
humanity itself. Quoting from the horse’s mouth, in the
publication ‘The First Global Revolution’ (1991), it reveals:
In searching for a new enemy to unite us, we came up with the

idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages,
famine and the like would fit the bill. But, in designating them as
the enemy, we fall into the trap of mistaking symptoms for causes.
All these dangers are caused by human intervention and it is only
through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be
overcome. The real enemy, then, is humanity itself.
It does not matter if this common enemy is a real one or one
invented for the purpose. In the process of struggling against this
implacable enemy, democracy will be made to seem responsible for
the lagging economy, the scarcity and uncertainties. The very
concept of democracy could then be brought into question and
allow for the seizure of power.
Referencing an article from the Jeremiahproject.com, the Club

of Rome says that facilitating the management of the New World
Order agenda would require the elimination of most of the world’s
population through ‘war, disease, abortion, famine, and any other
means. One of the major goals of the Club of Rome is to reduce the world’s
population by two billion people’. This will be discussed in more detail
later in the book when population control is investigated.
66
In 1973, the Club of Rome’s own publication, ‘Regionalized

and Adaptive Model of the Global World System’, reveals that the
agenda is to divide the world into ten regions or what it calls
kingdoms. It claims that ‘there is no other viable alternative to the
future survival of mankind than a new global community under a single
form of government’. Knowing that the Luciferians are following their
own Biblical end-times agenda, it is interesting to note that in the
books of Daniel and Revelations it is predicted that, in the last
days, the world would be divided into ten regions headed up by the
Antichrist. This is just one of many examples that seem to show
that the Luciferian hierarchy is approaching the final stage of its
plan for the world.
Moving on to one of the most secretive of the Round Table
Group members, it’s time to introduce the Bilderbergers. In his
book ‘Truth is a lonely Warrior’, James Perloff explains:
Once a year, the world’s elite from government, banking, industry

and media hold an international summit at a five-star resort – a
different locale every year, in Europe or in North America. The
name ‘Bilderberger’ came from the first hotel used in 1954 – The
Hotel de Bilderberg in the Netherlands. The conferences, which
have no mandates from governments, are completely closed to the
public and reporters. Even the hotel’s employees are compelled to
leave; the elite’s own private staff temporarily run the facility. The
funding source for these meetings has never been revealed.
In effect, Bilderberg is an extremely influential lobbying group

where the ideas presented at the conferences are those which are
good for international banking and global corporations. The
website bilderberggroup.net sums up this secretive group of wealthy
elites as follows:
67
The Bilderberg organisers are accepted by those 'in the know' as

the prophets of Capitalism. Will Hutton, Deputy Editor of The
Observer newspaper in London and left-leaning Economist,
describes the private clubs of the elite as masterminded by 'The
High Priests of Globalisation'. The ecclesiastical allusion is not
accidental. The Bilderberg high-priests are a force against good, out
to wipe morality from the earth. For the organisers, Bilderberg
Conferences are an annual ideological assault by the world's most
power-hungry people. Not content with owning unimaginable
amounts of money and property they want to use that wealth to
acquire even more power for themselves. Power is the most
dangerous and addictive drug known to man.
One can't help but wonder, when the Bilderberg organisers,
Rothschild, Rockefeller, Kissinger and the rest have completed
their project of enclosing all global goods and services into their
own hands, enclosing too, the media to stop people freely
discussing what they are up to. What then? What happens when
the men who would be gods turn out to be the global devils?
There must certainly be some sociopathic minds behind Bilderberg
since they go to so much trouble to promote policies that lead to
exploitation, inequality and despair. These individuals seem oddly
switched off from the suffering they are clearly causing. Surely only
pernicious people would want to control the ideology of the
world's mainstream press, and undermine natural political
discourse. Public opinion and democratic institutions are a threat
when you want to own the world.
To put it in much simpler terms, James Morcan states in ‘The

Ninth Orphan’:
Bilderberg pulls the strings of every government and intelligence

agency in the Western world.
68
As to their hidden agendas and how they operate, to give one

example referring to the expansion of the European Union, Daniel
Estulin explains in ‘Shadow Masters’:
In 1996, the Bilderbergers decided to get rid of then-Serbian

President Slobodan Milosevic. Their master plan was put together
during the 1996 meeting in King City, north of Toronto, Canada.
The Kosovo War and the subsequent overthrow of the Yugoslav
President occurred because of political strategies secretly conceived
at this Bilderberg group conference. Their plan was to solve the
political problem that Milosevic’s political survival and continued
socialist policies created, in his rejection of their capitalist goals: to
turn all of Europe into a free market.
One of the best sources of information on the inner workings of

the Bilderbergers is from investigative researcher Daniel Estulin.
Summarising his conclusion as to what they are really up to behind
closed doors, in his book ‘The True Story of the Bilderberg
Group’, he writes:
Imagine a private club where presidents, prime ministers,

international bankers and generals rub shoulders, where gracious
royal chaperones ensure everyone gets along, and where the people
running the wars, markets, and Europe (and America) say what
they never dare say in public.
Whatever its’ early mission, the Group is now a shadow world
government, threatening to take away our right to direct our own
destinies by creating a disturbing reality very much harming the
public’s welfare. In short, Bilderbergers want to supplant
individual nation-state sovereignty with an all-powerful global
government, corporate controlled, and check-mated by militarized
enforcement.
69
Bilderbergers comprise the world’s most exclusive club. No one

buys their way in. Only the Group’s Steering Committee decides
whom to invite, and in all cases participants are adherents to One
World Order governance run by top power elites.
Before moving on to the seemingly only open member of the

Round Table Group, if you have any doubts of the influence that
the secretive Bilderberg group has over what you see on the news or
read in the newspapers, here’s an extract of a speech made by
David Rockefeller while addressing the Bilderberg meeting in
Baden, Germany (June 1991):
We are grateful to the Washington Post, the New York Times,

Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have
attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion
for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to
develop our plan for the world if we had been subjected to the
lights of publicity during those years. But, the world is now more
sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government.
The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world
bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination
practised in past centuries.
In ‘The Planned Destruction of America’, Dr. James W.

Wardner concludes that the Bilderbergers are:
An undercover group of world multinational global elitists who

own and control the public press and disclose to the citizens of
each country that which they desire us to know, and little else.
Last but not least, the ultimate of the Round Table members,
the United Nations (UN). A century ago, on 25th January, 1919,
delegates at the Paris Peace Conference formally agreed to the
70
establishment of the League of Nations. However, viewed as a

failed effort to create an intergovernmental organization,
supposedly devoted to world peace, in October 1945 it was
replaced by the United Nations. Their logo, illustrating a flat map
of the earth with the North Pole at its centre, significantly, has
thirty-three segments, the same number as the degrees of
Freemasonry. With its headquarters built on land provided by
David Rockefeller in New York, it has become known as a
bureaucratic organisation monitoring economic development,
promoting human rights and sending out soldiers from individual
nation states on peace-keeping missions. Through its specialized
agencies such as the World Health Organisation (WHO),
International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank, it governs
the lending of money to poorer nations and expects their
cooperation in return.
Although the hype about climate change and its consequences
for human freedom will be covered at a later stage, one important
point to note is that ‘Agenda 21’ (now called Agenda 2030) is an
action plan of the UN which was the outcome of the Earth
Summit in 1992. Buzz words like ‘sustainability’ and ‘smart growth’
or ‘Biodiversity’ make it all seem beneficial for humanity. This is
until one scrapes away the surface to realise that the real agenda is
one of mass population reduction, the end of private ownership
and complete control over every individual.
Daniel Estulin describes just one UN report called the ‘Global
Neighbourhood’:
It is a blueprint for the UN’s future role as a global super-

government. The secret proposals reflect the work of dozens of
different agencies and commissions, and are now being vigorously
advanced by the Commission on Global Governance.
71
Another significant part that the UN plays in the plans for a

New World Order is the promotion of a One-World religion,
otherwise known as the ecumenical agenda. The aim is to eliminate
the existing monotheistic religions of Christianity, Islam and
Catholicism by merging them into a New Age spiritual philosophy.
Former United Nations Assistant Secretary General Robert Muller,
confirms this in his book ‘My Dream 3000’, by stating:
I would never have thought that I would discover spirituality in the

United Nations! Perhaps spirituality is such a fundamental human
need that it always reappears in one form or another in life and
throughout history and that we are about to witness now its
renaissance in a global, planetary context. The religions are
working together to make a world spirituality organization — we
will talk together, study, inspire each other to re-in-store a global
spirituality. All co-operations will unite in a global co-operative to
preserve nature and humanity.
Although this new religion is effectively the same Luciferianism

followed by the top of the pyramid, it is dressed up in all sorts of
New Age forms that all tend towards the worship of mother earth,
known as Gaia. This is a pantheistic perspective which implies that
the earth itself is some form of God. This runs parallel with the
classic David Icke conclusion, and his real message; we are all one
and the same cosmic consciousness. Ultimately, it is about
controlling the human mind and hence the population. This view
is confirmed by Dr. Norman Myers in the ‘Gaia Atlas of Future
Worlds’, in which he states:
There is no longer any ‘we’ or ‘they’: for the first time, and for all
time, there is only ‘us’ – all of us humans, together with all our
fellow species and other members of the Gaian community. In this
72
New Age, there will be no individuality. Everybody will just be part

of the consciousness.
On 25th January, 1993, a collection of religious leaders

assembled around the Peace Altar at the UN’s Temple of
Understanding to inaugurate the ‘Year of Inter-religious
Cooperation and Understanding’. Dozens of religious leaders from
around the world signed what is titled ‘The Declaration of a Global
Ethic’. This document contains an alternative framework for
religion to which people will be held accountable. The document
dictates an irrevocable norm for all areas of life, for families,
communities, nations, races and religions. Quoting from ‘The
United Nations: A Luciferian Organization’, author Claire Evans
writes:
‘The Declaration of a Global Ethic’ states that there will be no

individual freedom. We can only do things that are approved by a
global government. One of the directives state that there will be
severe punishment for those religious leaders who preach
intolerance.
In the publication ‘Luciferian Worship at the UN will usher in

the Antichrist’, Geri Ungurean reinforces this claim by stating that:
The United Nations is steadily becoming the centre of a syncretic

new world religion, a weird and diabolical convergence of New
Age mysticism, pantheism, aboriginal animism, atheism,
communism, socialism, Luciferian occultism, apostate Christianity,
Islam, Taoism, Buddhism, and Hinduism. The devotees and
apostles of this new faith include the kind of strange admixture of
crystal worshipers, astrologers, radical feminists, environmentalists,
cabalists, human potentialists, Eastern mystics, pop psychologists,
and “liberal” clergymen one would normally tend to associate with
73
the off-beat, sandals-and-beads counterculture of the 1960s. But

today’s worshipers in this rapidly expanding movement are as
likely to be scientists, diplomats, corporate presidents, heads of
state, international bankers, and leaders of mainstream Christian
churches.
Therefore, even, what is effectively the current world

government, the United Nations also has seemingly hidden
agendas for massive population reduction and control, as well as
implementing the other prerequisite of the NWO, a One-World
religion.
Although beyond the scope of this book, each one of the
Round Table members could be investigated much further. The
obvious conclusion would demonstrate how they all intertwine
their activities in such an organised manner, all leading to the same
ultimate goal of a single world governing power, using a single
worldwide digital currency and adhering to a Luciferian One-
World religion. However, if you take one thing away with you from
this chapter, it is that most of the Round Table Group comprises
of private organisations where the members are selected by those
further up the pyramid of power. They are privately funded by
global corporations and banking institutions, all pursuing their
elitist agenda without any democratic process whatsoever.
Effectively, these hidden organisations that meet in secret are more
powerful than national governments and completely bypass the
democratic voice of the people. For those of you that doubted how
a hidden international organizational structure even existed,
perhaps you will now be more aware and hopefully more inspired
to investigate further.
Now it’s time to look into how the Luciferian hierarchy recruit
talented members of society and manages to manipulate them into
74
pursuing their centuries-old plot for complete control over all

humanity.
75
Chapter five
Secret Societies
Throughout history there have been many different secret

societies, each with their own hidden agenda, initiation rituals and
progressive levels of hierarchy. One of the oldest secret societies,
originally known as ‘The Brotherhood of the Snake’, supposedly
dates back thousands of years. As divisions arose within its leaders,
new secret societies were formed, taking with them some form of
secret knowledge or mysteries which originate from the early
Babylonian civilisation. This same hidden knowledge was passed
down through the centuries via the Knight’s Templars, The Priory
de Sion and more recently the Freemasons. Whether talking of the
Rosicrucians, the Ordo Templis Orientis (OTO) or the Knights of
Malta, in addition to possessing some form of secret knowledge,
they all believe in the power of symbols. These black magic signs
are ubiquitous in modern society, evident in company logos, music
videos, engraved in building facades and adorning advertisements.
Due to their occult beliefs, the prevalence of such symbols is
thought to bring magic power.
One of the most recognisable symbols is that of a pyramid with
the all-seeing eye, as seen on the back of the American one-dollar
76
bill. Coincidently, this didn’t appear until 1935, when Franklin D.

Roosevelt, a 33rd degree Mason, ordered the currency changed to
include it. Revealing the hidden relation to Freemasonry, when a
hexagram is drawn over the pyramid, five of the points spell the
word M.A.S.O.N. out of the Latin text. As regards the hexagram
symbol, it is interesting to note that the so-called Star of David has
absolutely no historical link to King David of Israel. It is simply a
hexagram symbol that was adopted by Solomon when he turned to
Pagan Gods and the occult. It has since been used in magic,
witchcraft and sorcery. In the Masonic book, ‘The Second Mile’, it
says ‘the six pointed star is a very ancient symbol and one of the most
powerful’. This belief is confirmed in ‘A Concise Encyclopaedia of
Freemasonry’ which states ‘it was considered to possess mysterious
powers’. Therefore the pyramid with all-seeing eye and other
insignia present in the Great Seal reveal who were really behind the
American Constitution and ultimately, the private Federal Reserve
Bank. The all-seeing eye was originally known as the Eye of Horus,
dating back to the Egyptian era; more recently it is known as the
Eye of Lucifer.
The ‘Committee of 300’ and Round Table Group generally
operate in secrecy. Although they bypass the democratic process
when manipulating the economy and politics from behind the
scenes, the member organisations are not secret societies as such.
However, any individual working at a superior level in any of these
controlling organisations will, no doubt, be high-ranking members
of Freemasonry or another similar secret society. It is well
documented that George W. Bush, his father, and the likes of John
Kerry are all members of the Skull and Bones secret society. Former
British Prime Ministers such as Tony Blair and Benjamin Disraeli
are believed to be, or have been, 33rd degree Freemasons alongside
77
the likes of other historical high ranking masons such as Sir

Christopher Wren and Isaac Newton. It is said that only two
presidents, Abraham Lincoln and John F. Kennedy, were not
Freemasons or affiliated to secret societies.
At the lower levels of Freemasonry and other secret societies,
the initiates are completely ignorant of what the real purpose of the
society is for. To give one example, in ‘La Drame Maconnique’ ex-
mason Paul Copin-Albancelli says ‘I did not suspect the nature of the
association in which I had become an active member’. It is only once
they progress to the highest degrees that the Luciferian doctrine is
revealed. By this time, like any cult they have already shown many
years as trusted recruits that are willing to progress further and reap
the material benefits on offer. This is explained by Milton William
Cooper:
Most members of the Freemasons are not aware that the Illuminati
practices what is known as ‘secrets within secrets,’ or organizations
within organizations. That is one purpose of initiation. Initiation
is a means of rewarding ambitious men who can be trusted. You
will notice that the higher the degree of initiation the fewer the
members who possess the degree. This is not because the other
members are not ambitious but because a process of very careful
selection is being conducted. A point is reached where no effort is
good enough without a pull up by the higher members. Most
members never proceed beyond this point and never learn the real,
secret purpose of the group. The frozen member from that point
on serves only as a part of the political power base as indeed he has
always done. You may have guessed by now that initiation is a way
to determine who can and cannot be trusted.
Only those at the top who have passed every test truly know what
the Masons are hiding, thus rendering it impossible for anyone
outside to know much at all about the group. The Freemasons,
78
like everyone else, are responsible for the cleanliness of their

home. The occupant of a secret house within a secret house within
a secret house cannot clean it if he cannot see the number of
rooms or what they contain. Their house is a stinking cesspool.
Look to the Masons for the guilty party if anything happens to me.
I believe that they have murdered in the past and that they will
murder in the future.
Unfortunately, the much-respected Bill Cooper seemed to have

paid with his life for speaking out against such secret societies and
exposing their hidden agenda.
Probably the most widespread secret society today and with the
most members is Freemasonry. In every major town and city in
Europe, the United States and around the world there is found a
Masonic Lodge. To give you an idea of the extent of this, according
to James Perloff in ‘Truth is a Lonely Warrior’, there are around
two million Freemasons, just in America. In describing the
founding of political Freemasonry in England dating back to 1717,
Juri Lina also reveals the extent of Masonic influence in the
country, explaining that the mother lodge is situated in Covent
Garden, London. In ‘Architects of Deception’ he describes:
The Freemason’s Hall on Great Queen Street in Covent Garden is

the central meeting place for 8,600 lodges in the UK. Inside there
are around twenty temples together with the Grand Temple, with
mosaic ceiling, stained glass windows and carved doors.
With secret handshakes, bizarre rituals, recognition phrases and

passwords, even the first degree Mason must swear an allegiance
that permanently ties them to the order and secures their secrecy.
As they rise up the ranks the nature of the rituals and sworn oaths
become more serious and darker in content. To give an insight into
79
the oath sworn at one such initiation, James Perloff cites a former
Mason in ‘Truth is a lonely Warrior’:
If I should in the very least violate my oath, may my head be cut

off, my heart, my teeth and my entrails be torn out and thrown in
the sea, may my body be burnt and the ashes cast to the winds so
that nothing may remain of me or of my thoughts among men or
among my brother masons.
At the root of Freemasonry is a historical link to the ancient

Mysteries of Babylon which encompass a Luciferian doctrine.
Initiates are constantly seeking enlightenment from the light-bearer
Lucifer. In his book, ‘Morals and Dogma’, Grand Master Albert
Pike makes the bold assertion that:
Masonry is identical to the ancient Mysteries….

Masons from the first initiation, which is the first degree, are urged
to mightily seek the Light. The average Mason is continually saying
that he is seeking the Light, and will spend his entire life moving
toward the Light.
If anyone doubts what seeking the light is all about, or for that
matter, that at the top of freemasonry is a direct link to occult
Luciferian beliefs, then Edith Starr Miller summed it up quite
nicely back in 1933 when she wrote:
Many authors have published books on Freemasonry, some

printing the rituals, some their personal observations on certain
facts, but few of these authors, having themselves passed into
occult masonry, the real masonry of the Cabalistic degrees which is
in touch with all secret societies, Masonic as well as non-masonic,
have been able to state that Luciferian Occultism controls
Freemasonry.
80
In his book, ‘New World Order: The Ancient Plan of Secret

Societies’, William Schnoebelen affirms the same understanding:
Though few Masons know it, the god of Masonry is Lucifer.
Modern political Freemasonry has evolved from the original

medieval guilds of craftsmen that built many famous palaces,
castles and churches. Whereas talented masons originally joined
their local guild for protection and training, nowadays membership
of a masonic lodge is seen more as an exclusive club, where
business contracts and commercial favours are exchanged between
the ‘brotherhood’. Since the mid-sixteenth century Masonic lodges
began to accept non-craftsmen, which is when the Luciferian elite
started to infiltrate the secret society with their own subordinates.
This is explained by Juri Lina in his comprehensive work
‘Architects of Deception’:
The infiltration of the lodges of the operative freemasons began

relatively early. In the beginning of the 1540s, English craft guilds
began, for economic reasons, to accept passive members that did
not have a builder’s background, such as bankers, merchants,
landowners, magicians and scholars. These people wished to
exploit some of the freemasons’ secrets. In this manner, an
excellent opportunity presented itself to certain dark political
forces that wished to utilise a well-functioning international
network. The first documented evidence of this unnatural
expansion of the lodges stems from 1598.
One such example, according to authors Christopher Knight

and Robert Lomas, is the influential philosopher and politician
Francis Bacon, who became an accepted member of Freemasonry.
He was also a member of the Rosicrucian secret society and
81
another called the ‘Order of the Helmet’. As the presumed real

author of William Shakespeare’s plays, in his book revered by
freemasons, ‘The New Atlantis’, Bacon describes a New World
power that is controlled by a privileged elite that acts as a hidden
government. Therefore even at this early stage it seems that the
Luciferians had started to manipulate the Masonic tradition to
reflect their own agenda. Juri Lina goes on to say that:
Political imposters from the hibernating ranks of the Knights’

Templar and Jewish occultists managed to infiltrate the
freemasons’ network to use it for their own shady ends. They
began an unprecedented reorganization. The original organization
of the Freemasons was completely destroyed and converted into an
effective conspiratorial movement in which the Knights Templar
used black magic to gain control of the world.
It’s not just Freemasonry that acts as a recruitment ground for

the hierarchical pyramid of power. Other secret societies such as
the Ordo Templis Orientis (OTO) are involved with promoting
sexual debauchery and therefore attracting people with some form
of sexual perversion. Founder and famous occultist, Alistair
Crowley, also a 33rd degree Mason, was known in Britain as ‘the
wickedest man alive’ and he often referred to himself as ‘the Great
Beast 666’. He was known for engaging in sadomasochistic sex
rituals during black magic ceremonies where it was used to interact
with the supernatural realm. Quoting from his own book, ‘Magick
in Theory and Practice’, he describes the use of human sacrifice
during his perverted rituals:
For the highest spiritual working one must accordingly choose that
victim which contains the greatest and purest force. A male child
of perfect innocence and high intelligence is the most satisfactory
82
and suitable victim. But the bloody sacrifice, though more

dangerous, is more efficacious; and for nearly all purposes human
sacrifice is best. The death of the victim should coincide with the
supreme invocation.
After reading such words it makes you wonder why he appeared

on the front of the Beatles’ album ‘Sergeant Pepper’, until you
discover that the Beatles and the whole music industry is controlled
by the same Luciferians. Another, perhaps more recognisable
member of OTO for the younger generation, is Peaches Geldof.
Images of her can be seen online displaying a tattoo on her back of
the secret society’s emblem, an inverted cross and a heart tattoo on
her right arm enclosing the initials OTO. The DailyMail, in an
article dated 8th April, 2014, stated:
Just three weeks ago Peaches, 25, tweeted a picture of bookshelves

groaning with works by Aleister Crowley, the British founder of
the Ordo Templi Orientis (OTO). She also posted a photograph of
Crowley's book, Magick - In Theory And Practice, praising him as a
'beautiful writer and thinker'.
Her interest in OTO ran alongside previous fascinations with the
Scientology cult, and Judaism, the religion of her husband,
Thomas Cohen.
Like her mother, Paula Yates, and stepfather, Michael

Hutchence, Peaches died in ‘mysterious circumstances’ and at a
very young age. Nobody will know for sure, but her death did
coincide with the trial of The Lost Prophets’ singer Ian Watkins,
who was jailed for the attempted rape of a baby. With inside
knowledge of a sex cult and, no doubt, to paedophiles that mixed
in the same circles as OTO members, Peaches tweeted the names
of the mothers that were offering their infants to the paedophile
83
singer. Anybody that mixes in such secret societies and exposes

them in public seems to risk the same fate. Other celebrities linked
to OTO include rapper Jay-Z and Led Zeppelin guitarist Jimmy
Page, who bought Alistair Crowley’s former home.
Another extremely influential secretive group is known as
Bohemian Grove. Although not a secret society as such, founded in
1872, it is a completely enclosed private property of 2,700 acres
located in Sonoma County, California. Each year, invited members
including Heads of State, Prime Ministers, royalty and owners of
international banking institutions and corporations, meet in a
secret camp situated inside the Californian Redwoods. Former
attendees include Presidents Nixon, Reagan and Bush, the head of
the private Federal Reserve, Alan Greenspan, Arnold
Schwarzeneggar, Dick Cheney and many more high-ranking
personalities. Although seemingly innocuous, there is very little, if
any, coverage in the mainstream media and few people know of
what goes on during these two-week, secretive get-togethers.
However, thanks to video evidence and leaks from people inside, it
is now known that the whole set-up is inspired by ancient pagan
customs.
During each gathering there is what is known as the ‘Cremation
of Care’ ceremony. This bizarre spectacle sees the world’s wealthiest
and most influential leaders dressed in ritual gowns, chanting
before a giant statue of an owl, known as the Pagan God ‘Moloch’.
If the reader doesn’t believe such weird and Satanic-looking
ceremonies take place each year, take a look online and witness for
yourself the altar in front of the owl which burns with what is
supposed to be a human sacrifice. A flyer obtained by Alex Jones
and Jon Ronson actually depicts a baby that was being sacrificed
during the Cremation of Care ceremony. Joël van der Reijden,
84
from the website ‘Exposure of Hidden Institutions’ describes

similar incredulity:
Who would ever have imagined that the president of the United
States, together with a large chunk of America’s elite, attends a
yearly gathering where an ancient Babylonian (mock) human
sacrifice is carried out in front of huge stone owl?
In the monthly newsletter, ‘Phoenix Letter’, (October 1996),

Editor Anthony C. Sutton writes:
For decades, there have been vague rumours of weird goings on in

Bohemian Grove in more remote parts of its 2200 acres. Reliable
reports claim Druidic like rituals - druids in red hooded robes
marching in procession and chanting to the Great Owl (Moloch) -
a funeral pyre with corpses.
Alexander Cockburn, in a somewhat satirical manner

summarises the Bohemian Grove in an appropriately titled article
‘Meet the Secret Rulers of the World – the Truth about the
Bohemian Grove’ (2001):
Next July 14, every self-respecting member of the Secret World

Government will be in a gloomy grove of redwoods alongside the
Russian river in northern California, preparing to Banish Care for
the 122nd time, prelude to three weeks drinking gin fizzes and
hashing out the future of the world.
It was at the Bohemian Grove that America’s nuclear weapons
program was first devised by physicists such as Grove members
Ernest O. Lawrence and Edward Teller - meeting with other
members who were then in government, all confident of the
security of the redwood clubhouse built by Bernard Maybeck in
1904.
85
European leaders travel discreetly to the Grove to address the

American elite. German chancellor Helmut Schmidt strolled its
paths with club member Henry Kissinger, as did French socialist
leader Michael Rocard. Where else could such men hope to chat
privately with the head of IBM, a couple of Rockefellers, bankers
galore, a Justice of the US Supreme Court and Charlton Heston?
Even the prickly Lee Kuan Yew hastened to visit the club, only to
have the mortification of being mistaken for a waiter.
Whatever the secret society, it seems that they are all organised
on a hierarchical level of groups within groups, thereby limiting the
knowledge of those lower down the hierarchy. Since the infiltration
of Freemasonry and most other secret societies, it would appear
that the uppermost level controlling who is to be promoted or
selected for posts within the New World Order organisation, are
the same Luciferians that answer to the Supreme Council of
Thirteen.
To back up this claim, in 1925 his Eminence Cardinal Caro y
Rodriguez, Archbishop of Santiago, Chile, published a book ‘The
Mystery of Freemasonry Unveiled’. It exposed how the Illuminati,
the Satanists, and the Luciferians had imposed a secret society
upon a secret society. He produces a great deal of documentary
evidence to prove that not even 32nd and 33rd degree Masons
know what goes on in the Lodges of the Grand Orient and Albert
Pike’s New and Reformed Palladian Rite and the affiliated Lodges
of Adoption in which female members of the conspiracy are
initiated.
The suggestion that there is an even higher level of control over
and above the 33rd degree of masonry is confirmed by Guiseppe
Mazzini. In a letter Mazzini wrote to his revolutionary associate, Dr.
Breidenstine, only a few years before he died, he said:
86
We form an association of brothers in all points of the globe. We

wish to break every yoke. Yet, there is one unseen that can be
hardly felt, yet it weighs on us. Whence comes it? Where is it? No
one knows… or at least no one tells. This association is secret even
to us the veterans of secret societies.
To conclude this chapter, the wise words of, now

deceased, Bill Cooper indicate how all secret societies are
effectively working for the same masters, towards the same
end goal:
Most modern secret societies and especially those that practice

degrees of initiation, and that is the key, are really one society with
one purpose. You may call them whatever you wish--the Order of
the Quest, the Jason Society, the Roshaniya, the Qabbalah, the
Knights Templar, the Knights of Malta, the Knights of Columbus,
the Jesuits, the Masons, the Ancient and Mystical Order of Rosae
Crucis, the Illuminati, the Nazi Party, the Communist Party, the
Executive Members of the Council on Foreign Relations, The
Group, the Brotherhood of the Dragon, the Rosicrucians, the
Royal Institute of International Affairs, the Trilateral Commission,
the Bilderberg Group, the Open Friendly Secret Society (the
Vatican), the Russell Trust, the Skull & Bones, the Scroll & Key,
the Order - they are all the same and all work toward the same
ultimate goal, a New World Order.
87
Chapter six
Financing the Plan
It’s one thing to have such an evil plot in the first place, then to
set up a hierarchical system of power that governs global
corporations and controls secret societies, but to control the
middle men and ultimately billions of people that make up what
Lippman describes as the ‘bewildered herd’, you have to have an
endless supply of money. Although the banking system is purposely
designed and presented to be extremely complicated and
surrounded by technical jargon, it is basically a very simple scam to
produce an almost indefinite supply of money, literally out of thin
air. The same Luciferian bankers that privately control all central
banks literally print money out of nothing then lend it to
governments, thus creating what is known as the national debt. As
these ever-increasing debts rise, so do the rewards received by the
bankers in the form of interest payments. Guess who pays the
interest on this debt? You, and I, the taxpayers! To put this into
perspective, at the time of writing each taxpayer in the UK would
88
have to pay £69,974 (source: nationaldebtclock.co.uk) in taxes just

to finance the national debt. None of this hard-earned money goes
into the NHS, none goes into the country’s infrastructure and not
a single penny towards education. Along with every other taxpayer,
in a lifetime they work to pay the Luciferian bankers nearly seventy
thousand pounds. Now you can see why the bankers are so rich!
In ‘Ubuntu’, Michael Tellinger explains how this simple scam
has effectively led to our enslavement:
At some mysterious moment in our lives, things change. We

realise that we need to earn this thing called money to be able to
survive and live on our own planet, where we were born. Like
many others before me I realised that we are born into pure
slavery. This is indeed the great trap that has been set up for us by
those who control the creation of money. We are trapped in a
silent, relentless war of economic slavery that has been so cleverly
woven around us that most of us are not even aware of it. This
onslaught is controlled by the global banking elite that have taken
the world hostage and made each and every one of us their slaves.
The bankers understood very clearly that money is the perfect tool
of control and enslavement. Money could be applied far more
effectively as a cunning tool to propagate slavery among humanity
without the masses ever realising it. They will be so blinded by
their perception of freedom and democracy that they will not
realise they are utterly enslaved by those who control the money.
In past centuries paper money didn’t exist, instead the accepted

token of exchange was precious metal which was minted into coins
by the Church and Crown. Due to there being a limited supply of
gold and silver the nation’s economy, and therefore daily life, had a
consistent regularity. Then, during the middle ages the Luciferian
bankers started to spread out around Europe and introduced the
89
system of usury. This is basically making money out of nothing;

usury is the lending of money in return for interest. Although
prohibited in medieval Christendom, the ancestors of the Supreme
Council of Thirteen became specialists in money-lending to
peasants and aristocracy alike, effectively bleeding them dry. At the
same time, these loan-sharks used their secure vaults to provide a
service of storing coins and jewellery, obviously for a fee. Due to
gold and silver coins being heavy to carry around and at the risk of
robbery, the money lenders issued credit notes for the coins or gold
that they stored. These ‘I owe you’ notes are effectively what we call
money today. They are a promise to repay the amount deposited.
When they realised that only a small percentage of owners would
ever come at once to retrieve their deposits, they started to use this
money to make loans to other people. Once again, with the system
of usury they started to make huge profits on the back of other
people’s savings. This is effectively the short history of how banking
began. However, today, this simple scam has taken on a colossal
scale, with the same Luciferian banking families founding banks all
over the world, storing people’s money for them then lending it
out to others at interest.
A brief summary of how banking works is explained in an
article originally printed in the Anvil, London, called ‘The Pen is
Mightier than the Pound’:
A new form of usury developed as the swindling money-lenders

realized the immoral benefits that could be obtained from such a
situation. It became apparent to these thieves that they could go
one step further than dishonestly using other people’s money for
financial advantage at no cost to themselves. They could invent
money from absolutely nothing. They could issue credit notes with
nothing to back them up and put them into circulation as interest-
90
bearing debts. No-one would be any the wiser. They calculated that
they could safely issue notes for up to ten times more than the gold
deposits they held, because the depositors would never ask for
their deposits back all at the same time.
The principle of modern banking was thus established: invent
money from nothing, put it into circulation as ‘running cash
notes’ that have to be paid back with real wealth that is produced
from our labour, sit back and become unbelievably wealthy and
powerful men: hidden rulers of nations.
It didn’t take long before this money-lending scam was officially

sanctioned and illustrates how incredible wealth can buy power.
The Luciferians helped finance William of Orange to overthrow
the legitimate King James II in England. In return, this small group
of Luciferian bankers was given the Royal Charter to allow them to
establish their own private Bank of England.
In ‘The Nameless War’, Captain Archibald Ramsay describes:
The real objective of the ‘Glorious Revolution’ was achieved a few

years later in 1694, when the Royal consent was given for the
setting up of the ‘Bank of England’ and the institution of the
National Debt. This charter handed over to an anonymous
committee, the Royal prerogative of minting money and enabled
the international money lenders to secure their loans on the taxes
of the country.
To put it in layman’s terms, when the government wants to

borrow, say, fifty billion pounds, the privately controlled Bank of
England simply enters the numbers on a computer screen and
creates this debt out of thin air. By law this debt is guaranteed by
the income generated from taxing the population. Although the
government will never actually pay off the debt, it didn’t cost the
91
bankers anything to produce the money in the first place, but from
then on they will be receiving interest payments on the money lent.
It would actually be impossible to pay back all the debt in the world
because the money simply does not exist. This is because money is
only produced as debt and no money is ever produced for the
usury (interest) that also has to be paid.
In ‘Dishonest Money’, Joseph Plummer explains the notion of
debt:
The dirty little secret of banking is that bankers don’t really want
customers who pay off their debts; they want customers to remain
heavily in debt. Governments are especially attractive in this
respect. Not only do governments never pay down what they owe
(guaranteeing indefinite profit on the original loan amount), they
also can’t seem to stop spending money they don’t have. That is to
say, they never stop adding to the debt they’ve already
accumulated. As the debt forever climbs, so too does the bank’s
profits.
Since the days of unofficial money lending, nowadays this

system of usury has been legitimized as the banking system. Known
as fractional reserve banking, the amount of money that can be lent
out can be ten times more than what the bank holds in reserves.
Therefore, if everyone decided to go to the bank to draw out their
money it would be physically impossible because the bank is only
required to keep ten-percent of the money it lends out. In times of
crisis, this is known as a run on the bank. The other more recent
change to banking is that whereas all money used to be backed by
the equivalent value in stocks of gold, this is now no longer
necessary; money can simply be created by typing the digits on a
computer screen. As with all money today, these are known as Fiat
currencies, backed by nothing.
92
Returning briefly to the first ever central bank, the Bank of

England, this was seemingly nationalized in 1946 by the Labour
government. However, although supposedly placed under public
control, in effect there were no changes made to the privately run
system of fractional reserve banking. This outward appearance of
nationalisation was therefore just for propaganda purposes at the
time of elections and the decision seems to have been reversed
soon after. To confirm this widely accepted viewpoint, in ‘A
History of Central Banking’, Stephen Mitford Goodson writes:
On 6th April, 1974 the Bank of England established the Bank of

England Nominees Ltd, company registration No. 1307478, a
wholly-owned subsidiary, with private shareholders holding its 100
£1 shares. There is a suspicion that this rearrangement of the
bank’s affairs represents a reverse takeover of it by private
shareholders.
Unfortunately, the secrecy of the real consortium of owners of the
Bank of England is protected by the Royal Charter, Section 27(a)
of the Companies Act 1976, and the Official Secrets Act 1989.
In the article ‘The Pen is Mightier than the Pound’, the same
view is expressed:
After a big enquiry, hushed up as much as possible, the Bank of

England was nationalised in 1946. In theory control of the Bank
of England should then have passed from a group of private
individuals to the British Government, but this is still not the case.
Nationalisation only added a thin veneer of respectability.
Since the founding of the Bank of England by private bankers,

this became the model in which all subsequent central banks were
replicated. In the United States, a similar format was used to
establish the Federal Reserve System in 1913. This is another
93
privately owned central bank, built on private land, which, despite

the deceiving title, has nothing to do with being nationally owned
by the government of America. According to Anthony Sutton in
‘Wall Street and FDR’ (1975):
The Federal Reserve System is a legal private monopoly of the

money supply operated for the benefit of the few under the guise
of protecting and promoting the public interest.
The original plot to establish the Federal Reserve System was

devised in a secret meeting held in 1910 by the Luciferian bankers,
on Jekyll Island in Georgia. In the ‘New York Times’ (3rd May,
1931), it described this meeting as ‘one-sixth of the total wealth of the
world was represented by members of the Jekyll Island Club’. In his
excellent book ‘The Creature From Jekyll Island’, G. Edward
Griffin says that this reference was just from the Morgan group and
when combined with the Rockefellers and (Rothschilds), European
financiers, the real wealth was more than a quarter of all the
world’s wealth.
According to the ‘Noontide Press’, in an article by H.S. Kenan
in 1968:
On November 22, 1910 the banking conspirators left New Jersey

railway station on route to Jekyll Island, Georgia. At the very
exclusive Jekyll Island Hunt Club owned by J.P. Morgan, the fate
of the American people and indeed the world would be
determined over the next ten days by this group of criminally
inclined financiers.
One of the Luciferian bankers present at this meeting on Jekyll

Island was Frank Vanderlip, former president of National City
94
Bank (now Citibank). In his memoirs twenty-five years later, he

wrote:
There was an occasion near the close of 1910 when I was as

secretive, indeed as furtive, as any conspirator…. I do not feel it is
any exaggeration to speak of our secret expedition to Jekyll Island
as the occasion of the actual conception of the Federal Reserve
System.
Discovery we know, simply must not happen. If it were to be
discovered that our particular group had got together and written a
banking bill, that bill would have no chance of passage by
Congress.
In order to get the bill passed into law, the banking cartel knew
too well that the American people would be suspicious of a private
group adopting the title of central bank. Therefore, the name
Federal Reserve System was devised. This is explained in ‘The
Creature from Jekyll Island’ as being:
For purposes of public relations and legislation, they would devise

a name that would avoid the word bank altogether and which
would conjure the image of the federal government itself.
According to Congressman Dr. Ron Paul in USA Today (25th

July, 2012), who states:
The United States Federal Reserve, instead of functioning as the

people’s banker of the bankers, has operated solely as a private
bank for the benefit of private bankers. It comes as no surprise
that in its 100 years of existence its accounts have never been
submitted to public audit.
95
This seems to be the same opinion expressed by Henry Ford in

a discussion he called ‘The Jewish Idea of a Central Bank of
America’:
What people of the United States do not understand and never

have understood is that while the Federal Reserve Act was
governmental, the whole Federal Reserve System is private. It is an
officially-created private banking system.
As always, the truth cannot hide forever. Looking back since the
passing into law of the Federal Reserve System in 1913, it is
interesting to summarise the achievements of a small elite group of
Luciferian bankers. First of all, at the time of writing, the National
Debt for which the American taxpayer must continually pay
interest stands at over $23,000,000,000,000! Created out of thin
air, it is no wonder that from the interest payments alone, the
Luciferians have an endless cash-cow to fund their historical plot
for world domination. In addition to this debt, in ‘A History of
Central Banking’ it says:
Since the inception of the Federal Reserve Bank in 1914, the US

dollar has lost 97% of its purchasing power and there have been
19 recessions, the Great Depression of the 1930s and the current
great recession which started in 2008.
Eustace Mullins puts it in simple, honest terms:
The Federal Reserve System is not Federal; it has no reserves; and

it is not a system at all, but rather, a criminal syndicate.
The last American President aware of the banking scam

produced by the privately owned Federal Reserve and willing to do
something about it, was John F. Kennedy. Under his presidency,
96
on 4th June, 1963, he signed Executive Order 11110, giving

authority to the American Government to start printing an
alternative to the money produced by the Federal Reserve System.
Instead of having the title ‘Federal Reserve Note’, which is seen on
all American dollar bills, they had printed across the top ‘United
States Note’. More than four billion dollars of these new notes
were produced and entered circulation. These dollars were issued
as an interest-free and debt-free currency backed by silver reserves
in the US Treasury. They bypassed the Luciferian system of usury
and would have effectively wiped out the American debt, if given
time to overtake the existing dollars. However, as everyone knows,
Kennedy’s life was cut short by powerful influences that simply
could not allow this to happen. His ritual killing on 22nd
November, 1963, was purposely planned. Not only was the precise
date and location (on the 33rd parallel) of occult numerological
significance, the carefully planned assassination was screened live
around the world for all to see. The video footage remains to this
day as a historical reminder to others that dare challenge the
Luciferian bankers and their control over money. Immediately after
his death, the United States Notes were taken out of circulation.
In addition to the Bank of England and the Federal Reserve
System being privately controlled by the same small group of
Luciferians at the top of the hierarchy of power, they also control
nearly every central bank in the world.
It is generally accepted that in the year 2000, there were only
nine central banks not under control of the Luciferian bankers.
These were: Afghanistan, Iraq, Libya, Sudan, Syria, Venezuela,
Cuba, North Korea, and Iran. By the year 2003, this number had
been reduced to seven after the illegal invasions of Afghanistan,
looking for a bogeyman in a cave; followed by Iraq, where the
97
abundance of oil assisted the attraction of invasion. Sudan then

became the newest independent country with its own central bank
and Gaddafi was silenced once and for all in Libya. His death
coincided with his open desire to introduce the Dinar, a pan-
African currency backed by gold. Out of the remaining five
countries, it doesn’t take a genius to realise the link between geo-
political tension in the world and those countries with banking
institutions that remain outside the control of the Luciferians.
With the help of Russia, Syria has so far managed to hold off the
onslaught. Venezuela is currently experiencing a colour revolution
being steered by the hidden hand of the Luciferians, while Cuba is
being quietly managed by what are known as economic hitmen.
That just leaves North Korea and Iran. It seems, therefore, no
surprise that the mainstream media is already conditioning the
masses for war with these nations, building them up to be
tyrannical regimes that threaten the West and therefore need
overthrowing.
Coincidentally, the biggest gas reserve in the world just happens
to be located in the Persian Gulf. Iran’s proposed pipeline to link
this gas to the European market, via Syria, is likely to be one of the
principle reasons for heightened tension with the Islamic state. As
usual, to get the masses prepared and on-board for the takeover of
another country’s resources, there is currently a constant onslaught
of mainstream media propaganda. However, linking back to the
issue of central banking, in an article titled ‘Rothschilds Want
Iran’s Banks’ in AFP, 2012, Pete Papaherakles asks the question:
Could gaining control of the Central Bank of the Islamic Republic

of Iran be one of the main reasons that Iran is being targeted by
Western and Israeli powers? As tensions are building up for an
98
unthinkable war with Iran, it is worth exploring Iran’s banking

system compared to its U.S., British and Israeli counterparts.
Objective researchers contend that Iran is not being demonized
because they are a nuclear threat, just as the Taliban, Iraq’s
Saddam Hussein and Libya’s Muammar Qadaffi were not a threat.
What then is the real reason? Is it the trillions to be made in oil
profits, or the trillions in war profits? Is it to bankrupt the U.S.
economy, or is it to start World War III? Is it to destroy Israel’s
enemies or to destroy the Iranian central bank so that no one is
left to defy Rothschild’s money racket?
It might be any one of those reasons or, worse—it might be all of
them.
It is hoped by now that the argument presented to the reader, as

to how the Luciferians have managed to fund their historical plot,
is very strong. Privately controlling nearly every central bank in the
world and therefore receiving usury interest payments from almost
every government on earth, provides an unfathomable amount of
money that continues to expand every day due to compounded
interest. This capital has enabled the purchase of land and
property, global corporations, the control of almost all mainstream
media outlets, and allowed them to lobby politicians and
presidents. In an ever-increasing materialistic world, it seems that
very few can resist the tentacles that offer financial reward, in
exchange for their souls.
However, Luciferian financial control, by a handful of families
that make up the Supreme Council of Thirteen, does not stop
there. In the words of Michael Tellinger, in ‘Ubuntu’, he explains
the next level of financial control:
These powerful elite banking families continue to run the world

filled with unconscious people, not only because they seem to own
99
and control everything and all the large corporations, but they also
own and control the three main banking institutions that feed the
banks with an infinite supply of money and bail them out when
they run into trouble. These are the World Bank, The
International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the Bank of International
Settlements in Basel, Switzerland.
Their power and control is immeasurable. They control our
governments, the rise and fall of stock markets, the World Trade
Organisation, and all the major industries that keep them in
control, like oil, energy, pharmaceuticals, and especially the media.
The unconscious slaves that are firmly plugged into the matrix
believe every word they are told by the talking heads on their
televisions, continuously promoting the agendas of these
organisations.
There is an abundance of good literature widely available for

anyone that wants to verify or delve deeper into the structure of
complete financial control. Due to it being beyond the scope of
this book, to finalise this chapter are the words of one of the
Luciferian henchmen himself, Henry Kissinger. In a speech made
in 1973, he famously said:
Who controls the food supply, controls the people;

Who controls the energy, can control whole continents;
Who controls the money, can control the world.
100
Chapter seven
The Bewildered Herd
The Luciferians at the upper levels of the pyramid of power

number a few thousand at most; that leaves over seven and a half
billion people in the rest of the world’s population. American
writer and political commentator Walter Lippmann reveals how
the rest of us are viewed, in a derogatory manner, as nothing more
than a ‘bewildered herd’. In the Protocols of The Elders of Zion,
we are referred to as the ‘goyim’, which translates literally as cattle.
Henry Kissinger referred to the elderly, in particular, as nothing
more than ‘useless eaters’. It seems that this terminology was also
favoured by one of the originators of the plan to cull a large
proportion of humanity, Thomas Robert Malthus. This is known
as the ‘Malthusian Theory of Population’, first published in 1798.
Dr. John Coleman links this theory back to the Luciferian
pyramid of power in ‘Conspirator’s Hierarchy’, in which he says:
The Committee of 300 program is largely based on the teachings

of Malthus, the son of an English country parson who was pushed
to prominence by the British East India Company. He maintained
that man’s progress is tied to the earth’s natural ability to support a
given number of people. Malthus observed that it is necessary to
101
limit populations with the boundaries of decreasing natural

resources. He said the elite would not allow themselves to be
threatened by a burgeoning population of ‘useless eaters’, hence
culling must be practised.
Insider to the historical plot H.G. Wells wrote in ‘The Open

Conspiracy’:
At least 4 billion ‘useless eaters’ shall be eliminated by the year

2050 by means of limited war, organized epidemics of fatal rapid-
acting diseases and starvation. Energy, food and water shall be kept
at subsistence levels for the non-elite, starting with the white
populations then spreading to the races.
The population of Canada, Western Europe and the U.S. will be
decimated more rapidly than on other continents until the world’s
population reaches a manageable level of 1 billion.
In ‘The Impact of Science on Society’ (1953), the renowned

promoter of eugenics Bertrand Russell offers similar suggestions for
dramatically reducing the world population:
I do not pretend that birth control is the only way in which

population can be kept from increasing… War… has hitherto been
disappointing in this respect, but perhaps bacteriological war may
prove more effective. If a Black Death could be spread throughout
the world once in every generation survivors could procreate freely
without making the world too full… The state of affairs might be
somewhat unpleasant, but what of that? Really high-minded people
are indifferent to happiness, especially other people’s… There are
three ways of securing a society that shall be stable as regards
population. The first is that of birth control, the second that of
infanticide or really destructive wars, and the third that of general
misery except for a powerful minority.
102
Thomas Ferguson, the Latin American Case Officer for the

American State Department Office of Population Affairs, seems to
have been reading from the same script when he said in June 2000:
There is a single theme behind all our work – we must reduce

population levels. Our failure to lower population by simple means
has created the basis for a national security crisis. Civil wars are
somewhat drawn-out ways to reduce population….
To really reduce population, quickly, you have to pull all of the
males into the fighting and you have to kill significant numbers of
fertile age females…. The quickest way to reduce population is
through famine, like in Africa or through disease like the Black
Death.
In the book ‘Population Bomb’ (1968), Stanford Professor Paul

Ehrlich, whose wife, coincidentally, was a member of the Club of
Rome, describes population growth as a cancer. He writes:
A cancer is an uncontrolled multiplication of cells; the population

explosion is an uncontrolled multiplication of people…. We must
shift our efforts from the treatment of the symptoms to the cutting
out of the cancer. The operation will demand many apparently
brutal and heartless decisions.
It may seem strange to hear a similar viewpoint from a famous

explorer, someone that you think would be trying to preserve
nature, including humanity. However, ocean adventurer and
UNESCO courier Jacques Cousteau seems to condone such ‘brutal
and heartless decisions’. He is documented as saying:
In order to stabilize world population, we must eliminate 350,000

people per day. It is a horrible thing to say, but it is just as bad not
to say it.
103
Catherine Austin Fitts, former Assistant Secretary of Housing

under George Bush Senior, explains, in a matter of fact way, why
depopulation has become a major goal of the Luciferians:
My simple calculations guessed that we were going to achieve

economic sustainability on Earth by depopulating down to a
population of approximately 500 million people…..
I was used to looking at numbers from a very high level. To me, we
had to have radical change in how we governed resources or
depopulate. It was a mathematical result.
When it was pointed out that the government budget for Social
Security and Medicare could not be maintained, she said:
That is, unless you change the actual assumptions in the budget –
like life expectancy. Lowering immune systems and increasing
toxicity levels, combined with poor food, water, and terrorizing
stress, will help do the trick.
By the 1970s, the Luciferians were already well aware of the

problems of controlling an increasing world population, so they
commissioned a report titled ‘Global 2000’, which sought ways in
which to nip the problem in the bud before it got too late. Similar
to views already expressed, the conclusion of this report was that
population should be reduced by means of war, famine, disease
and plagues. Fortunately, it seems that their estimated target of
reducing the world population to two-and-a-half billion people by
the year 2000 was not met. However, reducing the total population
of the United States to 100 million by the year 2050 may well still
be part of their agenda.
In ‘Behold a Pale Horse’, author William Cooper, former U.S.
Naval Intelligence Officer, explains how Round Table member the
104
Club of Rome was also tasked in determining the limits to

population growth. It was decided that an immediate attack on the
problem would require two points of intervention. The first was to
lower the birth rate and the second was to increase the death rate.
As a result, birth-control measures became widely available
alongside sterilisation, abortion and hysterectomy procedures.
Homosexuality was also encouraged as most gay couples do not
have children. However, the expected results were not forthcoming
due to improvements in agricultural methods, increased
industrialization and better standards of living.
The United Nations’ ‘Initiative for ECO-92 Earth Charter’
(1991), addresses the concern that previous methods to reduce the
total world population, to within the desired limits, had failed:
The time is pressing. The Club of Rome was founded in 1968,

Limits to Growth was written in 1971, Global 2000 was written in
1979, but insufficient progress has been made in population
reduction.
The present vast overpopulation, now far beyond the world
carrying capacity, cannot be answered by future reductions in the
birth rate due to contraception, sterilization and abortion, but
must be met in the present by the reduction of numbers presently
existing. This must be done by whatever means necessary.
Therefore, the only alternative was to increase the death rate.

Ideally, something that could be blamed on Mother Nature was
needed, something as devastating as the bubonic plague. Cooper
goes on to say:
Several Top Secret recommendations were made by Dr Aurelio

Peccei of the Club of Rome. He advocated that a plague be
introduced that would have the same effect as the famous Black
105
Death of history. The chief recommendation was to develop a

microbe which would attack the autoimmune system and thus
render the development of a vaccine impossible. The orders were
given to develop the microbe and develop a prophylactic and a
cure. The microbe would be used against the general population
and would be introduced by vaccine. The prophylactic was to be
used by the ruling elite. The cure will be administered to the
survivors when it is decided that enough people have died.
The macabre nature of such a suggestion, coming from who can

only be described as psychopaths, may seem difficult for normal
people to comprehend. However, there is evidence that funding
was provided by the U.S. Congress (H.B. 15090, 1969) to produce
a synthetic biological agent, something that does not occur in
nature and therefore for which no immunity could be acquired.
The most important aspect was that it should be ‘refractory to the
immunological and therapeutic processes upon which we depend to
maintain our relative freedom from infectious disease’.
Not long afterwards, in 1978, the U.S. was infected with a
tainted hepatitis-B vaccine. Vaccine trials conducted by the Centers
for Disease Control were undertaken in the exact same cities,
including San Francisco, Los Angeles and New York, where the
AIDS virus just happened to plague the gay community. Different
vaccines were given to females from those received by males. There
are many experts that believe AIDS is a manmade biological agent,
administered by vaccination. In an article by Leonard G. Horowitz
D.M.D., M.A., M.P.H., he expresses one such professional voice of
concern:
This article regards a matter of global urgency transcending better

known AIDS threats.
106
It describes a universal challenge posed by ever increasing numbers

of plagues predicted to depopulate at least half of the world’s
current human inhabitants within two generations. This
documented science virtually proves, through the process of
elimination and a review of the most updated evidence, the origin
of HIV/AIDS as an iatrogenic (i.e., man-made) outcome of specific
vaccination experiments.
Considered reflection on this AIDS science, along with the socio-
political correlates and antecedents of this current catastrophe,
reveals the likelihood that myriad other immune dysfunctions,
autoimmune diseases, and cancers, including leukemias,
lymphomas, sarcomas, and other ailments linked to viral
infections, have resulted from previously engineered microbes that
have by accident or intent found their way from cancer virus
laboratories into humanity’s bloodstream by way of the most
trusted public health preventative - vaccinations.
According to scientific records, African chimpanzees were used in
the manufacture of the HB vaccines during the early 1970s.
Additional documents prove that human HB viruses cultured in
vivo in chimpanzees were returned to humans whose infected
blood serum was then pooled to develop four different strains of
experimental HB vaccine pilot tested between 1970 and 1975 in
New York City and central Africa.
Whether due to hepatitis-B vaccinations, or perhaps the use of

AZT to treat aids, it seems that in the medical profession there is a
rumbling of voices that think AIDS itself may actually be the
symptoms produced by the medication. Dr Peter Duesberg
describes AZT as:
The most toxic drug that has ever been licensed for long term
consumption in the free world…. AZT is a prescription drug and
according to the manufacturer itself it causes symptoms that are
107
indistinguishable from AIDS. So I would say it is not arrogant for

me to say AZT is AIDS by prescription.
Another distinguished medical practitioner that has contributed

to the debate is Dr. Robert B. Strecker, M.D., Ph.D., a trained
pathologist who practices internal medicine and gastroenterology.
During research, he discovered that the AIDS virus and pandemic
was actually predicted by top virologists long before it was known
publicly. It also seems that top scientists writing in the Bulletin for
the World Health Organization were requesting that an AIDS-like
virus be created so as to study the effect on humans.
During a similar period, between the years 1966-1980, a massive
smallpox eradication campaign was carried out in Africa by the
World Health Organization (WHO). Around 100 million doses of
the smallpox vaccine were administered throughout the African
continent. It has since come to light that the vaccine itself may
have actually been the cause of smallpox, and more worryingly, for
those with an impaired immune system, the cause of what we now
know as AIDS. The health risk associated with the smallpox
vaccine was revealed in a FDA press release:
Serious health problems, including those that are life-threatening,

can also occur in…people who…have problems with their heart or
immune system if they become infected with the [smallpox]
vaccine virus, either by being vaccinated or by being in close
contact with a person who was vaccinated.
An article in the London Times (11th May, 1987), titled ‘WHO

Admits That Smallpox Vaccine Created AIDS/HIV’ also alludes to
the link between the smallpox vaccine and the start of the AIDS
epidemic:
108
The incidence of AIDS infections in Africa coincides exactly with

the locations of the W.H.O. smallpox vaccination program in the
mid-1970's. Some 14,000 Haitians then on UN secondment to
Central Africa were also vaccinated in this campaign. Personnel
actually conducting the vaccinations may have been completely
unaware that the vaccine was anything other than what they were
told.
An adviser to WHO who disclosed the problem, told The Times:
‘I thought it was just a coincidence until we studied the latest
findings about the reactions which can be caused by ‘Vaccinia’.
Now I believe the smallpox vaccine theory is the explanation to the
explosion of Aids.’ ‘In obliterating one disease, another was
transformed.’
Other doctors who accept the connection between the anti-
smallpox campaign and the Aids epidemic now see answers to
questions which had baffled them. How, for instance, the Aids
organism, previously regarded by scientists as ‘weak, slow and
vulnerable,’ began to behave like a type capable of creating a
plague.
Robert Gallo, M.D., the co-discoverer of HIV, told The Times:
The link between the WHO program and the epidemic is an

interesting and important hypothesis.
I cannot say that it actually happened, but I have been saying for
some years that the use of live vaccines such as that used for
smallpox can activate a dormant infection such as HIV.
In September 1987, William Campbell Douglass, M.D., while

speaking at a conference sponsored by the National health
Foundation, blamed the WHO. for murdering Africa with the
AIDS virus. He accused the organization of encouraging virologists
and molecular biologists to work with deadly animal viruses in an
109
attempt to make an immunosuppressive hybrid virus that would be

deadly to humans. In his book ‘Aids: The End of Civilization’
(1989), he repeats the notion that the WHO. laced the African
vaccines and blames what he calls:
The virologists of the world, the sorcerers who brought us this

ghastly plague and have formed a united front in denying that the
virus was laboratory-made from known, lethal animal viruses.
Another recent epidemiological threat came in the form of

swine flu. Governments around the world were rushing to produce
preventative vaccines, spending millions in the process. It is
suspected that the swine flu strain was actually man-made, but then
again, how do you know that the resultant vaccine is not actually
more dangerous than the disease itself? Author Jim Marrs gives his
view in his thought-provoking book ‘Population Control’:
Despite fears that population growth are overblown, the globalists

seeking population reduction have continued their systematic
elimination of huge numbers of people. This population reduction
has taken many forms. Following the 2009 outbreak of swine flu
(H1N1 influenza virus), it was found that the strain contained a
combination of genes from swine, bird, and human influenza
viruses. Because this virus could not be contracted by eating pork
products, researchers suspected swine flu was manufactured by
humans. They believed the outbreak was one of several avenues
being used to reduce the human population by the global elite,
who have long supported eugenics, the social philosophy of
improving genetic traits by eliminating less desirable people.
At this point, it does make you wonder whether AIDS, SARS,

Swine Flu, Zika virus, Ebola and other recent deadly outbreaks are
just the testing grounds to tweak a manmade pathogen, designed to
110
fulfil the requirements laid out in the Global 2000 report.

However, judging from the information presented, who can be sure
that the cause of death will not be from the disease, but as a result
of having a purposely tainted vaccine injected into your
bloodstream. It is interesting to note that already in the late 1800s,
the Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion, No.10, part 19,
mentions the idea of injecting diseases into people:
But you yourselves perfectly well know that to produce the

possibility of the expression of such wishes by all the nations it is
indispensable to trouble in all countries the people’s relations with
their governments so as to utterly exhaust humanity with
dissension, hatred, struggle, envy and even by use of torture, by
starvation, by the inoculation of diseases, by want, so that the
goyim see no other issue than to take refuge in our complete
sovereignty in money and in all else. But if we give the nations of
the world a breathing space the moment we long for is hardly
likely ever to arrive.
Either way, it seems that a widespread pandemic seems to be the

Luciferians’ preferred method of culling the majority of humanity.
With that in mind, let’s hope that the Queen’s husband, Prince
Philip – Duke of Edinburgh, doesn’t die too soon because he is
famous for saying in ‘Insiders Report’, American Policy Center,
(1995):
If I were reincarnated I would wish to be returned to earth as a

killer virus to lower human population levels.
A similar viewpoint was expressed by controversial ecologist Dr.

Eric Pianka in 2006. From watching his presentation at the 109th
meeting of the Texas Academy of Science, scientist and author
Forrest Mims said:
111
I watched in amazement as a few hundred members of the Texas

Academy of Science rose to their feet and gave a standing ovation
to a speech that enthusiastically advocated the elimination of
ninety-percent of Earth's population by airborne Ebola.
With all the talk of man-made microbes and plagues, purposely

designed with the intent of wiping out billions of human lives, it
must be remembered that the Luciferians are following their own
religious agenda. If you don’t want to view the Bible as predicting
such events 2,000 years ago, then another way of looking at it is
that the Luciferians are using the Book of Revelations, in
particular, as their blueprint for what they intend to unleash upon
us in the near future, namely deadly plagues of some form or
another.
Having already seen what the Luciferians are capable of, another
worrying possibility is that the present cancer epidemic is also part
of the depopulation plan. Even though billions have been spent on
cancer research, the statistics of the likelihood of getting some form
of cancer keep getting worse. What a scary thought to think that
with compulsory vaccination of children almost becoming the
norm, that a trigger for cancer could already be inserted into their
bloodstream even before their immune system has developed. In
the United States, the number of vaccines government health
officials direct paediatricians to give to children has almost
quadrupled in the last sixty years. In 2018, the U.S. Centers for
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recommends a schedule of
fifty doses of fourteen vaccines before a child has reached the age
of six years old. Coinciding with this increase is a simultaneous
increase in chronic neurological and autoimmune disorders in
children, including pediatric cancer.
112
The article by Rishma Parpia titled ‘Is There a Link Between

Vaccines and the Rise in Pediatric Cancer?’ states:
Most vaccine package inserts include a statement along the lines

of, ‘This vaccine has not been evaluated for its carcinogenic or
mutagenic potentials or impairment of fertility,’ which suggests
that the potential link between cancer and vaccines has not been
thoroughly studied. In fact, some vaccine ingredients, such as
formaldehyde are known carcinogens.
One might assume that, since formaldehyde is routinely used in
many vaccines given to babies, even tiny and vulnerable premature
infants, studies would have looked at whether it is safe to inject
this poison directly into their immature systems. No such studies
appear to have been done.
Residual levels of free formaldehyde, used as a stabilizer or an
inactivating ingredient, are found in vaccines against anthrax,
diphtheria, hepatitis A, influenza, Japanese encephalitis, and
tetanus
The American Cancer Society, the FDA, the National Cancer
Institute (NCI), and others have classified formaldehyde as a
known or probable cancer-causing agent, or carcinogen, and
OSHA adds that it is not only a ‘complete carcinogen’ but also ‘a
sensitizing agent that can cause an immune system response upon
initial exposure’.
In a chronological research into major epidemics, Robert

Howard highlights on the website wakeupamerica that in 1975:
The virus section of Fort Detrick's Center for Biological Warfare

Research is renamed the Fredrick Cancer Research Facilities and
placed under the supervision of the National Cancer Institute
(NCI).
113
It is here that a special virus cancer program is initiated by the U.S.

Navy, purportedly to develop cancer-causing viruses. It is also here
that retrovirologists isolate a virus to which no immunity exists. It
is later named HTLV (Human T-cell Leukemia Virus).
It is likely that every person reading this book knows a friend or

family member that has either died or is currently battling cancer.
In the 1970s, statistics showed that there was a one-in-sixteen
likelihood of developing cancer. After hundreds of millions raised
by the bewildered herd running marathons, climbing mountain
peaks, participating in charity bike rides or organising fund-raising
events; what has been the progress in curing cancer? Literally none!
Now the statistics in the West stand at a one-in-two chance of
developing some form of cancer. The simple truth is the global
pharmaceutical giants that form part of the Committee of 300 do
not want an easy cure for cancer to become available for the
masses. There is much more money to be made from treating sick
people and ultimately, the Luciferians want people to die as part of
their centuries-old plan for a New World Order. It is interesting to
ask the question: why is it that the Rothschilds, the Rockefellers,
the Royal family and other elite families live well into their
nineties, many over a hundred years old, and almost never
succumb to cancer? In addition to far better nutrition, I suspect
that they know something that you and I were not informed about.
Whether by means of epidemics, tainted vaccinations, or the
use of carcinogens it seems clear that the Luciferians desire a
massive reduction in the total world population, albeit rather
quickly. To some extent, this is perfectly understandable so as to
ensure that the earth can provide sufficiently for those that inhabit
it. The problem with this ideology comes when it is realised that, in
their eyes, humanity is viewed simply as a bewildered herd of cattle,
114
and therefore ready to be culled. They, the controllers of the

bewildered herd, also get the privilege of deciding who lives and
who dies.
For those that still doubt whether the Luciferians really intend
to cull a large part of the population, the following statement is
from the United Nations ‘Assessment on Sustainable Human
Population’ U.S. Senate (9th September, 1994):
A reasonable estimate for an industrialized world society at the

present North American material standard of living would be one
billion people. This must be implemented within thirty to fifty
years. Two-thirds of the population must be cut.
Commander William Guy Carr seems to have aptly chosen the

title of his book ‘Pawns in the Game’, which is literally what
humanity has become. It is a game between the tiny Luciferian elite
that has all the money and power, and the rest of humanity; a game
of right against wrong, of good versus evil. While most people
remain unaware that a plot even exists, or the fact that it includes
culling the majority of the world’s population, the odds are stacked
in favour of the Luciferian cartel. However, if a critical mass of
people awakes to the truth, it would end tomorrow and the world
would be a different place.
Most human beings have an innate character that shows
empathy towards others and could therefore never imagine that
such an evil plot to control everything and everyone is even
imaginable, let alone a plan to murder the vast majority of ‘useless
eaters’. However, looking at the Luciferians, with their inbred
bloodlines from intermarrying with cousins and other family
members, it is apparent that inherited psychopathic traits seem to
have dominated their creed. Their children are submitted to
115
abusive rituals at an early age and sent off to public schools for
education. Initiated into secret societies and following the
destructive path laid before them, they lack what we take for
granted, empathy and love. They are, in the true definition of the
word, psychopaths.
As food for thought, to complete this chapter I will leave it to
the voice of two very influential people regarding, what is
effectively, the culling of man. Firstly, Paul Watson, President of
the Sea Shepherd Conservation Club, in his article ‘The Beginning
of the End of Life as we Know it on Planet Earth’ states that:
No human community should be larger than 20,000 people…..

We need to radically and intelligently reduce human population to
fewer than one billion.
Secondly, is that familiar name of Zbigniew Brezezinski, CFR

and Trilateral Commission member, and constant advisor to the
Luciferian elite. In an address to the Royal Institute of
International Affairs (17th November, 2008), he said:
In earlier times it was easier to control a million people, literally,

than physically to kill a million people. Today it is infinitely easier
to kill a million people than to control a million people.
The link between population reduction and the current

environmental push will be covered later when the issue of Agenda
2030 is discussed. However, while discussing the pertinent matter
of whether the current world population is likely to live to old age,
it is time to have a quick look at the strange phenomenon known
as ‘The Georgia Guidestones’.
116
Chapter eight
The Georgia Guidestones
On a tall hilltop in Elbert County, Georgia is a monument

consisting of six enormous granite stones weighing a total of over
100 tonnes (107,840kg), sometimes referred to as the American
Stonehenge. Many people don’t even know such a monument
exists. The huge blocks of pyramid-blue granite are obviously
intended to stand the test of time and form a vertical x-shape that
has astral alignment. Wikipedia describes them as ‘a compass,
calendar and clock, and should be capable of withstanding catastrophic
events’. Commissioned in 1979 at a huge expense, the monument
seems to offer a New Age alternative to the Biblical Ten
Commandments. A list of ten guiding principles for humanity,
under the title new ‘Age of Reason’ is engraved on the stones in
eight different languages: English, Spanish, Swahili, Hindi,
Hebrew, Arabic, Chinese, and Russian. The quote at the
beginning of this chapter is first on the list of ten messages. After
reading the previous chapter, the link to maintaining the total
human population at no more than 500 million people is obvious.
Once again, the remaining seven billion people, most probably
including you and I, don’t seem to have made the list. However, so
as not to feel left out, it seems the people that commissioned the
117
Georgia Guidestones at least give a message to the rest of

humanity. Number ten on the list of engraved commands says: ‘Be
not a cancer on the earth – Leave room for nature – Leave room for
nature’. Once again, a subtle message to the rest of humanity, which
as previously demonstrated are seen as useless eaters or cattle, and
now nothing more than a deadly cancer.
The principle messages encompassed in the ten inscriptions
cover four main categories:
1. Governance and the establishment of a world government.

2. Control of population and birth control.
3. The environment and man’s relation to it.
4. Spirituality.
In addition to the list of ten instructions, at the top of the

stones is a shorter message engraved in four ancient scripts:
Babylonian, Classical Greek, Sanskrit and Egyptian hieroglyphs.
One of the strangest aspects of the monument is that the origin
and wealthy financiers of such a project have always been shrouded
in mystery. However, the use of these ancient languages is another
clue that reveals the same Luciferians to be the secret donors which
commissioned the Georgia Guidestones monument. The secret
societies that form the recruitment ground for the Luciferian,
hierarchical pyramid of power, including the Freemasons and
Rosicrucians, all incorporate occult rituals, symbols and ideologies
that date back to the ancient mysteries of Babylon. They also seem
to have an obsession with the Pyramids and Egyptian religious
beliefs. This is more than apparent by looking at the pyramid on
the back of the American Dollar bill or the widespread use of the
all-seeing eye of Horus in the music and film industry, magazine
118
front covers and in an overwhelming amount of celebrity photo

shoots.
The importance of numerology and gematria amongst secret
societies will be discussed later in the book. However, for now it is
worth noting that the monument’s erection on March 22nd, 1980
does have a relevance to a particular secret society. March, being
the third month is numerologically the equivalent to the number 3.
Therefore, March 22nd, if written as numbers, is 322. This is not
an accident, in the same way that any major event in recent history
which occurred, or was enacted on a specific date that had a
numerological significance, was not an accident. Referring back to
Chapter six of this book, it was mentioned that former U.S.
Presidents George Bush Senior and Junior, as well as the likes of
Presidential candidate John Kerry, were all members of the secret
society known as Skull and Bones 322. The fact that the Georgia
Guidestones are located in America would seem to suggest that this
secret society, along with other Luciferian-controlled groups, are
more than likely the hidden sponsors of the monument.
Although the secret group that commissioned the monument
try to remain anonymous, a pamphlet produced by the granite
company that constructed the Georgia Guidestones reveals the
same Luciferian hand behind them. In an article from
vigilantcitizen.com titled ‘Sinister Sites: The Georgia Guidestones’,
it explains how the revelations from this pamphlet link directly to
the occult belief systems of the Luciferian secret societies:
So who was this ‘small group of Americans who seek the Age of Reason’?
Although their identity is secret, they have left some telling clues to
the initiates, unmistakably pointing towards the occult nature of
their group. For starters, the text above bears the unmistakable
mark of western occultism. We can find references to ‘As Above,
119
So Below’ (The celestial alignments of the stones symbolize the need for
humanity to be square with External principles which are manifest in our
own nature, and in the universe around us) and to duality (We are the
major agency through which good and evil qualities of the spirit become
actors in our world. Without us, there is very little of love, mercy, or
compassion. Yet we can also be agents of hate, and cruelty and cold
indifference). I believe this text alone provides enough proof to
conclude that the authors are either, freemasons, rosicrucians or
another hermetic secret society. There are however even more
obvious clues pointing to the esoteric leanings of the authors,
starting with R.C. Christian, the mysterious man who ordered the
monument.
The subtle use of this particular name is explained in an article

on Rense.com:
All that is known for certain is that in June 1979, a well-dressed,

articulate stranger visited the office of the Elberton Granite
Finishing Company and announced that he wanted to build an
edifice to transmit a message to mankind. He identified himself as
R. C. Christian, but it soon became apparent that was not his real
name. He said that he represented a group of men who wanted to
offer direction to humanity, but to date, almost two decades later,
no one knows who R. C. Christian really was, or the names of
those he represented.
The name R.C. Christian is actually a pseudonym. This is

explicitly revealed on the Guidestones themselves, where the words
are engraved ‘Author: R.C. Christian (A Pseudonyn)’. Note that there
is a purposely incorrect spelling of the word pseudonym, which
probably has a hidden meaning for initiates in the know, perhaps
through a numerological content of the letters. It has been
suggested that the intitials R.C. correlate to the Rose and Cross,
120
symbols associated with the Rosicrucian secret society. There is also

the obvious link between using the name Christian and the
similarity to the Biblical Ten Commandments in the monument
itself. This reveals the typical Luciferian methodology, which
opposes and actively inverts anything to do with Christianity, as
has previously been quoted by Grand Master Mason, Albert Pike.
However, researchers have also discovered a book, written under
the same pen name of R.C. Christian, in the local library in
Elberton. In it, the author gives recognition to Thomas Paine, the
writer of ‘The New Age of Reason’. Paine’s occult philosophy
promotes the destruction of Judeo-Christian beliefs which ties in
nicely with the ideology behind the Georgia Guidestones.
Another obvious link between the monument and the
Luciferian doctrine is the obsession with the cycles of the sun,
moon and stars. It has been well-documented that the ancient
pyramids of Egypt were built to reflect astrological configurations,
as well as having chambers that revealed certain stars at specific
times of the year. Similarly, Stonehenge is also positioned with
extreme precision to line up with the solar equinoxes. Quoting
from the ‘Sinister Sites: The Georgia Guidestones’ article:
The four major stones are arranged in a giant ‘paddlewheel’

configuration which is oriented to the limits of the migration of
the sun during the course of the year and also shows the extreme
positions of the rising and setting of the sun in its 18.6-year cycle.
The centre stone has two special features: first, the North Star is
always visible through a special hole drilled from the South to the
Northside of the centre stone; second, another slot aligns with the
positions of the rising sun at the time of the summer and winter
solstices and at the equinox.
121
Monuments that are aligned with celestial bodies are often the
work of secret societies, such as the Freemasons. Drawing their
teachings from the Mystery schools of Ancient Egypt, Greece or
the Druidic Celts, they are known for embedding into monuments
some of their ‘sacred knowledge’.
Occultists often worship the alignment and movement of

heavenly bodies as part of their religious ceremonies. Author Jim
Marrs confirms this link in ‘Population Control’, which says:
Such celestial alignments are found in the works of secret societies

from the freemasons to the druids and the mystery schools of
ancient Greece and Egypt. The monument is therefore proof of an
existing link between secret societies, the world elite and the push
for a New World Order.
A similar conclusion is presented in an article titled ‘The

Georgia Guidestones – Illuminati Ten Commandments’ from
RadioLiberty.com:
Certainly the group that commissioned the Georgia Guidestones is

one of many similar groups working together toward a New World
Order, a new world economic system, and a new world spirituality.
Behind those groups, however, are dark spiritual forces. Without
understanding the nature of those dark forces it is impossible to
understand the unfolding of world events.
Due to a contract of anonymity signed by the granite company

that produced the Georgia Guidestones, the real sponsors that
commissioned the monument will probably never be revealed. The
purpose of this chapter is primarily to bring such a bizarre
monument to the attention of the reader and to illustrate clear
similarities to the same Luciferian plot for a New World Order,
122
which plans a massive reduction in the total population. Irrelevant

of which secret society commissioned the monument, there seems
to be overwhelming evidence that links its content and
construction to the same hidden hand. The incorporation of solar-
lunar cycles and astrological precision in the layout, combined with
the engraved New Age messages, point ultimately to the top of the
pyramid of power, the Luciferians.
It seems that there are others that have come to the same
conclusion. On Wikipedia, activist Mark Dice demanded that the
guidestones be smashed into a million pieces and then the rubble
used for a construction project. He claims that the guidestones are
of a deep Satanic origin and that R. C. Christian belongs to a
Luciferian secret society related to the New World Order. A similar
viewpoint was expressed during the unveiling of the monument, in
which a local minister proclaimed that he believed the monument
was for sun worshipers, for cult worship and for devil worship.
It’s time to leave this mysterious granite monument behind and
move on to investigate other elements of the historical plot to
control the world and everyone left in it. Whether a worldwide
pandemic happens in the near future is somewhat outside of the
relevance and perhaps control of people going about their daily
lives. However, starting with the food we eat, the next chapter aims
to highlight how globalisation has been steered to incorporate the
basic necessities of life into the same historical plot.
123
Chapter nine
Food for Thought
‘You are what you eat’, as the saying goes. There is something
that rings so true about such a simple phrase. Most people would
generally agree that if a person consumes mainly wholesome,
healthy food, including lots of fruit and vegetables, their positive
physical and mental well-being seems to reflect this. Over 2,000
years ago, Hippocrates, known as the father of medicine, knew this
very well. He is famous for saying, ‘let food by thy medicine’, implying
that if a person eats well they should be naturally healthy. If this
basic knowledge is so well established and known, by arguably
everyone, why is it that so many people are obese, addicted to junk
food, drinking aspartame-laden diet drinks and generally loading
their bodies full of non-nutritious junk on a daily basis?
Obviously, excluding the very wealthy, most people live within
financial constraints which have an impact on the quality of food
that they eat. There is also the fact that in Western society there is
an abundance of choice regarding available food, so people are free
to eat nothing but processed food if they so wish. Combined with
this, the globalist food companies spend fortunes on advertising
and marketing their products to entice customers to buy them.
124
Addictive additives, such as monosodium glutamate (MSG) make

junk food almost irresistible and the cheaper alternative to sugar,
high-fructose corn syrup, sweetens the blandest of products, even
though it is known to contribute to the obesity epidemic and a
massive increase in Type-2 diabetes. Then there is the diet fad
where sugar is replaced by one of the worst food additives known
to man, aspartame, which actually makes people fatter and has a
disruptive effect on metabolism. Even the educated and cautious
eater is still exposed to the widespread introduction of genetically-
modified foods (GMO) due to cross-pollination of crops and
purposely misleading labelling. On top of all of these elements,
which effectively determine what we consume, all supermarket fruit
and vegetables are dosed with pesticides and nitrites, and most
meat products contain growth hormones and antibiotics.
Most of the above facts are quite well known, and in general
most people would think that whether a person eats well, or not, is
mainly down to personal choice and maybe education. After all, it
could be argued that even for poorer people, fresh fruit and
vegetables actually cost less than the equivalent in processed ready-
meals or takeaways. However, this chapter will highlight the
problems that consumers face, even if they actively try to eat well.
What most people probably don’t realise is that the world food
industry is actually controlled by just a handful of global
corporations. Although a supermarket may stock thousands of
products which display all sorts of brand names, the vast majority
of them are produced by just ten mega-companies. These global
food giants effectively have a monopoly over what everyone
consumes on a daily basis. This is somewhat disconcerting when
you consider that they have only gained this monopoly status by
being affiliated with the ‘Committee of 300’ Luciferian hierarchy.
125
What they are adding to our food is arguably a key part of the
historical plot already discussed. It is no accident that supermarket
food is laden with chemicals, full of unnatural E-numbers, heavy
on salt and sugar, laced with MSG and hidden aspartame, or more
recently, consisting of GMO crops. Until you understand that
there is a historical plot to control the whole of humanity and that
this agenda includes making most of us sick and eventually leading
to early death, then it is difficult to comprehend that we are
effectively being poisoned by the food we eat. Just considering the
cancer epidemic, the level of food intolerances and allergies, and
obesity along with diabetes, all of these require expensive
pharmaceutical medicines which treat the symptoms but never the
source of the problem. So long as people are unhealthy and sick,
humanity is effectively a cash-cow for the international
pharmaceutical companies that contribute to the Committee of
300 organisation structure. The problem is that the numbers of
sick people are rapidly increasing and the onset of illness is
consistently striking younger individuals. All of this is no accident.
Even according to a mainstream media source, the Huffington
Post, the controlling influence of a small number of corporations is
admitted in an article titled ‘These 10 Companies Control the
World’s Food’, (17th August, 2014):
The agriculture and food production industry employed more

than one billion people as of last year, or a third of the global
workforce. While the industry is substantial, a relatively small
number of companies wield an enormous amount of influence.
Nestle is the largest of these ten companies. Converted into
dollars, Nestle had more than $100 billion in sales and more than
$11 billion in profits in 2013. The Switzerland food giant alone
employed roughly 333,000 people.
126
Many of these companies and their brands are extremely well

known. One reason is that they often spend huge sums on
advertising. Nine of these ten companies were among the 100
largest media spenders in the world in 2012. Coca-Cola (NYSE:
KO), the world’s sixth largest advertiser, spent more than $3
billion in 2012 on advertising. Unilever’s media expenditure, at
$7.4 billion, was the second-highest worldwide.
On the website foodandwaterwatch.org it describes what it

refers to as food monopolies:
Choice at the supermarket is merely an illusion. Behind the

thousands of seemingly unique brands available, only a few
multinational corporations control the majority of the food we eat,
which is harmful for eaters, farming communities, the
environment, and ultimately, our democracy.
Just two firms control more than sixty-percent of cracker sales.
Four firms control almost eighty-percent of cereal sales.
This lack of competition allows companies to enhance profits by
driving down the earnings of farmers and workers in the food
system. They control the market price that farmers get for their
crops, and dictate the terms of payment to poultry and livestock
farmers. Thanks to this unchecked power, multinational
corporations like Cargill, Smithfield, Nestlé and PepsiCo
essentially shape the food system to maximize their profits alone —
at the expense of eaters, farmers and the environment.
This control over the majority of the food that we eat is

confirmed in an article titled ‘Grocery Goliaths – How Food
Monopolies Impact Consumers’ (2013):
Many firms sell multiple brands of the same product, which leads
consumers to believe that they are choosing among competitors
when they are actually just choosing among products made by the
127
same firm that may have been made at the same factory. This is
true across the board, including organic and healthful brands
typically seen as independent, but which are being bought up by
large food companies unbeknownst to consumers.
Supermarkets pack their shelves with a cornucopia of grocery
products and brands, but consumers have very few choices that
matter when it comes to which company made the food or
whether it is a smart choice in terms of price or quality. A handful
of food companies make almost all the products in the
supermarket. These manufacturers heavily market the highly
processed sugar- and salt-laden convenience foods in the middle of
the store as opposed to more nutritious options, because the less-
healthy items are bigger money-makers.
Understanding that there are just a handful of key market

players that effectively control the food chain is one thing, but the
power and influence that comes with this monopoly is something
else. Once you understand that global members of the ‘Committee
of 300’ are working towards the same agenda, then the lobbying of
food administration boards to obtain approval for additives such as
aspartame, MSG, high-fructose corn syrup or even GMO crops
becomes effectively a combined effort from the whole industry. It is
no wonder that such toxic ingredients get permitted to enter our
digestive systems because nobody seems able to stand up to such
combined international wealth and power. Meanwhile the elite
Luciferians in the know, eat truly organic produce, privately
sourced meat and fish from wholesome producers, and no doubt
consume almost none of the toxins that most people are exposed
to from every meal. This alone gives a good indication as to why
they consistently live to a much riper age than most, and seldom
seem to succumb to the sicknesses that the rest of us fall prey to.
128
Starting with one of these food additives, it is interesting to look

further at the classic sugar replacement. Marketed as being fat-free
and therefore ideal for weight loss, aspartame is added to food
under the name of Nutra-sweet, Saccharin, Sucralose, artificial
sweetener, or in products classified as zero, diet or sugar-free.
Technically aspartame consists of aspartic acid and phenylalanine.
When the body processes these amino acids, part of it is broken
down into methanol. In high doses methanol can be toxic,
although more concerning is when combined with free methanol
which is found in some foods or when aspartame is heated. Free
methanol, if consumed regularly, breaks down into formaldehyde,
a known carcinogen and neurotoxin, also found in vaccines.
Aspartame was actually discovered by accident in 1965 by a
chemist named James D. Schlatter and is approximately 200 times
sweeter than sugar, so only a very small amount is needed to give
food and beverages a sweet flavour. Although aspartame looks and
tastes very much like sugar, it is chemically very different. When it
is digested by the body it breaks down into its separate components
and enters the bloodstream. There is growing concern that there
are significant side effects from regularly consuming aspartame-
laced products. According to an article from naturalnewsblogs.com
titled ‘The Truth about Aspartame’, (1st August, 2014):
One of aspartame’s amino acid by-products is called aspartic acid.

It is a neurotransmitter, which some speculate might be why
aspartame has been linked to neurological problems like
headaches, dizziness and even the potential to develop brain
tumours. Several studies have made the links between aspartame
and these conditions.
129
One of the concerning aspects for the potential consumer of

such products is the purposely misleading labelling that determines
what is actually in a marketed food item. This is highlighted by Dr.
Betty Martini in the article, ‘Aspartame Conspiracy: Toxic,
Addictive & Illegal’ (2010):
The problem is the manufacturers know aspartame is addictive.

Like in the case of Mars I called them and asked if aspartame were
in their products and they told me ‘yes, in Mars Bars’. I said, ‘But
it’s not labelled,’ and they said, it’s under natural flavours.....The
free methyl alcohol is classified as a narcotic. It causes chronic
methanol poisoning. This affects the dopamine system of the brain
and causes the addiction....One informant said a Pepsi employee
told him that the National Soft Drink Association had done a 10
year study showing Alzheimer's, birth defects and blindness. He
said he was demoted because he told about it but that all people
should be warned.
So aspartame is a drug and not an additive; it's an addictive, excite-
neurotoxic, carcinogenic, genetically engineered drug and adjuvant
that damages the mitochondria or powerhouse of the cell and
interacts with drugs and vaccines.
The most common excuse for knowingly consuming diet, zero

or sugar-free products that contain aspartame is because the
consumer has been duped by misleading marketing. They believe
that such sugar-free options are less fattening. This is one good
example of how they have been blatantly lied to. The author of
‘Health Myths Exposed’, Shane Ellison, explains:
Activating thermogenesis is the most effective way to lose fat,

regardless of the cause. Doing so, allows a person to burn fat
without exercise. Activating thermogenesis can be done by
consuming certain foods or nutritional supplements.
130
The most important way to activate thermogenesis is by abstaining

from sugar (sucrose and fructose), artificial flavours (aspartame and
sucralose) and high glycemic index (GI) foods. To further simplify,
a person could simply stop drinking soda, this includes diet soda.
All of the aforementioned factors block your body's ability to burn
fat. As a result, your body only burns carbohydrates while storing
fat. I call it a biochemical nightmare. Over time, the nightmare is
irreversible and results in what is known as insulin resistance.
Expert on the subject Dr. Russell Blaylock sums up the use of

aspartame in simple terms that anyone can understand. As with all
foods, it is then up to the individual to decide whether to actively
consumes such toxins or, at least be aware of the many hidden ways
in which they are added to products under less known titles:
Aspartame is not a necessary nutrient, and neither is MSG. The

weight of the evidence is overwhelming. If you want to avoid
obesity, metabolic syndrome, neurodegenerative diseases and
cancer, and if you don't want to make your cancer more aggressive,
then you need to stay away from these products. The damage
affects pregnant women, unborn babies and newborns. It can
produce changes in the brain that are irreversible, depending on
when it is stopped. What we've found is that it reprograms the
wiring of the brain, particularly the hypothalamus, so it doesn't
function normally. These children are abnormal for the rest of
their lives in terms of their physiological function.
In a recent article of the ‘Canadian Medical Association

Journal’, (July 2017), the results were combined from several
studies totalling over 400,000 people, during a ten year period. The
conclusion was that ‘the consumption of artificial sweeteners was
associated with a higher incidence of Type-2 diabetes, metabolic syndrome,
and cardiovascular events, even after controlling for confounding variables’.
131
To summarise the effects of aspartame, in ‘Architects of

Deception’, Juri Lina investigates its widespread use while
researching the freemasons and Luciferian hierarchy:
Aspartame is one of the most dangerous substances used to

sweeten the foodstuffs we use every day. It is treated as a chemical
toxin in the technical literature and can cause anxiety, depression,
confusion, vertigo, disturbed sleep, chronic fatigue, hypertension,
weight gain, convulsions and other symptoms. Aspartame may also
cause brain tumours, epilepsy, Parkinson’s disease and Alzheimers.
In addition to aspartame, monosodium glutamate (MSG) is

another toxic food additive hidden in a lot of processed foods. It is
commonly used to enhance the flavour of cheap, packaged foods
and due to it being highly addictive entices the consumer to keep
coming back for more. Technically it is made up of glutamic acid
and sodium. According to Carol Hoernlein, ‘MSG stimulates the
pancreas to produce insulin, which increases hunger. Studies in humans
have shown insulin levels triple within fifteen minutes of ingestion. As the
blood sugar drops because of the insulin flood, you are hungry an hour
later’. MSG itself would not taste of much on its own, but the
chemical reaction that occurs when combined with food tricks the
taste buds into thinking the food tastes better.
To give just one example of how this taste enhancement works,
what better than to look at the ‘finger-licking good’ Kentucky Fried
Chicken eaten in takeaways all over the world. In an aptly titled
article by David Gutierrez, ‘KFC’s Secret Ingredient is a Brain-
Frying Neurotoxin’, (1st September, 2016), it states:
Like many KFC products, ‘original recipe’ chicken is packed with

flavouring chemicals, including the brain-frying neurotoxin
monosodium glutamate (MSG).
132
According to the KFC website, the original recipe chicken is

actually made by first marinating the meat-on-the-bone in a mix of
salt, sodium phosphate and MSG.
MSG is a synthetic chemical designed to trigger the glutamate taste
receptors on the tongue, which give food a richer, more savoury
taste.
Neurosurgeon and expert Dr. Russell Blaylock, explains the

potential risk of regularly consuming MSG. In his book,
‘Excitotoxins: the Taste that Kills’, it states:
MSG is an excito-toxin, meaning that it overexcites our brain cells

to the point of death, causing brain damage and leading to
neurodegenerative diseases like MS, Parkinson’s and Alzheimer’s
disease. MSG also triggers problematic conditions like asthma,
depression, obesity, diabetes, and heart irregularities. In reference
to heart conditions, many glutamate receptors are found in the
heart muscle as well as the heart’s electrical conduction system.
This means that when you consume MSG you are overexciting the
heart muscle and electrical system, which can be very damaging to
the heart, and may even trigger sudden death.
Dr. Mercola, in the article ‘MSG: Is this Silent Killer Lurking in

Your Kitchen Cabinets’, also warns of the dangers of MSG:
A widespread and silent killer that's worse for your health than
alcohol, nicotine and many drugs is likely lurking in your kitchen
cabinets right now.
MSG is one of the worst food additives on the market and is used
in canned soups, crackers, meats, salad dressings, frozen dinners
and much more. It's found in your local supermarket and
restaurants, in your child's school cafeteria and, amazingly, even in
baby food and infant formula.
133
Food manufacturers are not stupid, and they've caught on to the

fact that people like you want to avoid eating this nasty food
additive. As a result, do you think they responded by removing
MSG from their products? Well, a few may have, but most of them
just tried to ‘clean’ their labels. In other words, they tried to hide
the fact that MSG is an ingredient. How do they do this? By using
names that you would never associate with MSG.
Yet again, it seems that a small group of globalist companies,

that effectively control the food industry, deceitfully try to conceal
the toxins that lace our food. As a general rule, if something is
processed, it contains MSG in some form or another. Labelling
products as containing yeast extract, glutamate, textured protein,
gelatin, hydrolyzed protein, calcium caseinate, or maltodextrin are
also alternative ways of hiding the content of MSG. According to
author Bill Gottlieb, there are also many other food ingredients
that don’t sound in any way suspicious but also contain MSG. He
says these include:
Malt extract or flavouring, barley malt, flavourings, natural

flavourings, natural chicken/beef/pork flavourings, food
seasonings, bouillon, broth and stock.
Therefore, it seems that the few globalist suppliers of most of

what we eat, have cleverly masked the presence of toxic substances
like MSG, so that even the most discerning of customers would
find it difficult to determine if it is hiding somewhere in the long
list of ingredients and additives.
However, potentially much more serious and life-threatening
than aspartame or MSG, are foods that have been genetically
modified. Known as GMOs, or sometimes nick-named Franken-
Foods, after the Frankenstein monster, genetic manipulation has
134
enabled selected genes to be taken from one organism and forced

into another. The bizarre side of this is that genes can be taken
from a completely different plant, animal, insect, bacteria or virus
then spliced into the genetic make-up of a plant to bring about a
desired resistance or advantage over the original seed. In reality, the
insertion of foreign genes into a host DNA is a much more risky
and dramatic operation. In ‘Seeds of Deception’, Jeffrey M. Smith
describes this process as follows:
One common method used to insert genes is to blast them with a

22-caliber gene gun. Scientists first coat thousands of tiny shards of
gold or tungsten with the foreign gene. Then they point it at a dish
containing thousands of unsuspecting cells. Then they fire, hoping
at least that some of the foreign genes will end up in the right
place in at least some of the DNA. This, by the way, is what the
biotech industry refers to as their highly precise method of gene
transfer.
The impact of a gene-coated shard flying at hundreds of miles an
hour into the DNA might, as you probably have guessed, result in
some structural ‘consequences’. The native genes can be damaged
in ways that the engineer may not be able to identify.
According to Michael Antoniou, senior lecturer in molecular

pathology in one of London’s leading teaching hospitals:
This procedure results in disruption of the genetic blueprint of the

organism with totally unpredictable consequences.
In the BBCs ‘Tomorrow’s World Magazine’, (October 1998),

author Danny Penman agrees that:
Genetic engineering is generally a hit and miss affair. The genes

may be inserted the wrong way round or multiple copies may be
135
scattered throughout a plant’s genome. They may be inserted

inside other genes – destroying their activity or massively
increasing it. More worryingly, a plant’s genetic make-up may
become unstable – again with unpredictable results. Rogue toxins
may be produced or existing ones amplified massively. Such
problems may only arise hundreds of generations after the crops
are originally modified.
So, while playing God with the genetic make-up of a natural

plant that works in harmony with the rest of nature, including
those that end up eating it, the same tiny elite group that effectively
controls the world’s food supply is now messing with nature for
their own nefarious means. Obviously, increased profits are always
high up on the agenda but like the underlying theme of this book,
once again it is about complete and utter control of everything,
even the food that we eat.
In his book, ‘Illuminati Agenda 21’, Dean Henderson lists the
principle suppliers of GMO foods and their associated herbicides
and pesticides:
The big six Franken-Food purveyors are BASF, Bayer, DuPont,

Dow Chemical Company, Syngenta and Monsanto….The same
chemical companies that brought the world delights such as Agent
Orange and DDT.
The most famous of these companies is Monsanto, which also

produces the most widely used glyphosate weed-killer known as
Round-Up. As for their GMO seeds, so as to completely corner the
market they came up with the idea of ‘suicide seeds’, also known as
‘terminator seeds’. Due to genetic manipulation, these seeds make
the next generation of crops sterile, therefore forcing farmers to
buy new seeds from them for each crop that they sow. The
136
implications of these GMO seeds is explained by Karen Wright

and John Clark in an article for ‘Discover Magazine’:
The scope of the problem is unimaginably vast: More than 1

billion people rely on saved seed in developing countries each year.
Two-thirds of the population of sub-Saharan Africa subsist on
small, low-production farms. Critics contend that once terminator
technology takes hold, it will become tied to every other
improvement in plant development, so farmers who are unwilling
or unable to pay for new seed will be stuck with outdated, inferior
varieties.
One of the most outspoken campaigners to raise awareness of

the risks accompanied by GMO and terminator seeds is Dr.
Vandana Shiva. Particularly concerned by the suicide epidemic of
cotton farmers in India that cannot afford to keep buying
Monsanto’s genetically modified Bt-Cotton, she is one voice
sounding the alarm. In her article, ‘The Seeds of Suicide: How
Monsanto Destroys Farming’, she writes:
In recent developments, Monsanto and Bayer have merged into a

powerful cartel which controls not only what we eat but also
politicians, scientists and journalists.
Monsanto’s concentrated control over the seed sector in India as
well as across the world is very worrying. This is what connects
farmers’ suicides in India to Monsanto vs Percy Schmeiser in
Canada, to Monsanto vs Bowman in the US, and to farmers in
Brazil suing Monsanto for $2.2 billion for unfair collection of
royalty.
Patents on seed are illegitimate because putting a toxic gene into a
plant cell is not ‘creating’ or ‘inventing’ a plant. These are seeds of
deception — the deception that Monsanto is the creator of seeds
and life; the deception that while Monsanto sues farmers and traps
137
them in debt, it pretends to be working for farmers’ welfare, and

the deception that GMOs feed the world. GMOs are failing to
control pests and weeds, and have instead led to the emergence of
super-pests and super-weeds.
Monsanto’s seed monopolies, the destruction of alternatives, the
collection of super-profits in the form of royalties, and the
increasing vulnerability of monocultures has created a context for
debt, suicides and agrarian distress which is driving the farmers’
suicide epidemic in India.
In India it is not just the farmers that are dying due to

committing suicide, thousands of sheep, buffalo, and goats
continue to die after grazing on Monsanto’s Bt-cotton plants.
Leading on from this, it is interesting to note some of the harmful
effects that are already appearing since the roll-out of GMOs
around the world. Increasing food allergies, the build-up of toxins
in the body, newly emerging diseases, nutritional problems and
digestive disorders are just a few symptoms linked to the
consumption of GMO. Other studies have found the association of
GM foods and increases in incidences of autism and Alzheimer’s
disease. According to BBC news, (27th April, 2002):
Safety tests on genetically modified maize currently growing in

Britain were flawed, it has emerged. The crop, T-25 GM maize, was
tested in laboratory experiments on chickens. During the tests,
twice as many chickens died compared with those fed on
conventional maize. This research was apparently overlooked when
the crop was given marketing approval in 1996.
One of the largest studies of its kind was conducted in 2012 by

Caen University in France. Basing their study on the same
protocols used by Monsanto when trying to ‘prove’ that their
138
GMO seeds were safe, the Caen study increased the research
period from ninety days to two years, and increased the amount of
animals tested. The results were seriously alarming. In the study
rats developed 400 times the number of large tumours and died
nearly three times more often, and faster than the control group.
In total, between fifty to eighty-percent of females developed
tumours and showed increases in affected pituitary glands, as well
as necrosis of the liver. Even low dose exposure caused a disruption
in oestrogen and androgen receptors in cells disrupting the sexual
endocrine system of live animals.
Other similar studies testing the effects of feeding hamsters
GMO soy, revealed that they lost the ability to reproduce by the
third generation. While talking about the Luciferian goal of
massive population reduction, it is worth reading that last line
again, replacing the word hamster with human. Only the
Luciferians know if this is the real reason for expanding GMO in
the human food supply.
So, how big is the problem? According to statista.com,
‘Genetically Modified Crops – Statistics & Facts’:
During the last decade, the acreage of GM crop production has

more than doubled globally. In 2015, nearly 180 million hectares
were planted with genetically-engineered crops worldwide.
Today, soybeans remain the GM crop accounting for the largest
proportion of GM crop acreage worldwide.
However, as regards polluting the food chain, it is not just the

GMO crops themselves that are causing problems. In addition,
more than eighty-percent of all genetically modified crops grown
worldwide have been engineered for herbicide tolerance. As a
result, the use of toxic herbicides, such as those containing
139
glyphosate (which the WHO has classed as ‘probably carcinogenic

to humans’) has increased fifteen-fold since GMOs were first
introduced. The increase in super-weeds associated with GMO has
required more toxic poisons such as 2,4-D, which is one of the
major ingredients of Agent Orange.
Even mainstream media sources have not completely shied away
from such shocking revelations. In an article in the Guardian
newspaper, titled ‘Weed-killer Products More Toxic than their
Active Ingredient, Tests Show’, (8th May, 2018) implies that the
products used to kill newly-occurring weeds are themselves
becoming more toxic to humans:
After more than forty years of widespread use, new scientific tests
show formulated weed-killers have higher rates of toxicity to
human cells.
Formulated weed-killers, like Monsanto’s widely-used Roundup,
leave residues in food and water, as well as public spaces such as
golf courses, parks and children’s playgrounds.
It is not clear how much Monsanto itself knows about the toxicity
of the full formulations it sells. But internal company emails
dating back sixteen years, which emerged in a court case last year,
offer a glimpse into the company’s view. In one 2003 internal
company email, a Monsanto scientist stated: ‘You cannot say that
Roundup is not a carcinogen … we have not done the necessary
testing on the formulation to make that statement. The testing on
the formulations are not anywhere near the level of the active
ingredient.’ Another internal email, written in 2010, said: ‘With
regards to the carcinogenicity of our formulations we don’t have
such testing on them directly.’ And an internal Monsanto email
from 2002 stated: ‘Glyphosate is OK but the formulated product
… does the damage’.
140
Although it is beyond the scope of this book to delve deeper

into the high-risk game that genetically modified crops have and
will undoubtedly become, if the reader takes away nothing else
than being aware of the potential effects on human health, maybe
it has helped to encourage greater awareness and further research.
Referring back to the phrase ‘you are what you eat’, it has
hopefully been shown that sometimes we may be consuming a lot
more unnatural substances, chemicals, toxic weed-killers and
genetically modified organisms than we have been informed about.
It is no surprise that sicknesses such as cancer are forever on the
increase, despite the billions spent on research. When viewed in
perspective, it is hard to separate such a deadly onslaught on every
aspect of the world food supply and the bigger picture of a planned
New World Order ruled over by a tyrannical Luciferian elite. Once
again, as part of this centuries-old plan, the current world
population is to be reduced by over ninety-percent. The food we eat
obviously forms part of that plan, but what about the water we
drink?
141
Chapter ten
Water – The Source of Life
The world’s water supply is becoming more and more polluted,

due to an increase in industrialised farming, contamination from
raw sewage and expansive use of pesticides and fertilisers. There are
studies that show in the South Asian water basin, which supplies
water to more than 750 million people, nearly sixty percent of the
groundwater contains unsafe levels of arsenic. The United Nations
Environment Program found that 320 million people are at
increased risk of cholera and typhoid infection due to polluted
rivers and lakes. Then there are new pathogens such as cyclo-viruses
starting to emerge, which are linked to neurological problems in
children. Out of the tens of thousands of chemicals used in
Western society, only a small few are tested-for in drinking water.
In addition, it has also been well documented that pharmaceutical
drugs, painkillers, oral contraceptives, hormones, anti-depressants
and anti-biotics are all ending up in the human water supply. If
these toxins are not present, then there is still a good chance that
your drinking water contains high levels of lead or other heavy
metals. Finally, the last and biggest threat to human health found
in drinking water is a highly toxic industrial residue that is actively
added on the totally false premise that it reduces dental decay.
142
This book is primarily focused on a historical plot to control the

whole of humanity and the world’s resources. In addition to
controlling the food supply, complete domination of access to
clean water is one of the most strategic elements that a ruling
power can have. This is quite evident in many civil conflicts,
including the limited access to water enforced in Palestine or
fighting in Darfur, Yemen and elsewhere. After all, if a community
or population do not have access to water, they can be coerced,
cannot grow crops or feed livestock and will end up having to fight
to protect this most important survival element or have to migrate.
An article by Jeremiah Castelo, titled ‘Causes of Water Conflict:
Past Wars and Future Predictions’, explains the dynamic of water
conflict:
The term 'water conflict' is used to describe tensions or disputes

between states, countries, or people groups surrounding the
utilization, consumption, or control of water resources.
Because of the decreasing amount of potable water, it is not
uncommon for nations or people groups to have conflict over a
shared body of water.
Because of its fundamental necessity, water scarcity has been both
a source of regional dispute and a tool of military conflict
throughout history. It has been the cause of tribal conflict and
border tension, and has been used for ethnic warfare, terrorism,
and political actions.
From personal experience during travel to Bolivia researching

for a television production, foreign corporations that had
privatised the water supply wanted to start charging locals increased
rates for accessing the same source of life that generations had
received from Mother Nature. It wasn’t until miners started to use
dynamite to fend off the police at their demonstrations that the
143
international corporations backed down. This mirrors a previous

water conflict in Bolivia known as the ‘Cochabamba Water War’ of
1998 – 2000 involving the globalist construction company Bechtel.
Due to being either excluded from the grid or facing water rate
increases of up to three-hundred-percent, the civilian population
started to protest. In all such conflicts, when delving deeper it is
not hard to see the influential hidden hand of the Luciferian elite.
Even Wikipedia reveals that Bolivia’s water privatisation was
coerced by economic hitmen acting on behalf of the Luciferian-
controlled World Bank:
In 1985, with hyperinflation at an annual rate of 25,000 percent,

few foreign investors would do business in the country. The
Bolivian government turned to the World Bank as a last resort
against economic meltdown. For the next twenty years, successive
governments followed the World Bank's provisions in order to
qualify for continued loans from the organization. In order to
move towards independent development, Bolivia privatised its
railways, telephone system, national airlines, and hydrocarbon
industry.
In relative terms, Bolivia’s water crisis pales into insignificance

compared to one of the most serious and under-reported conflicts
affecting water access at the current time – the crisis in Yemen.
Due to the instrumental destruction of water and power
infrastructure, twenty million people are said to be deprived of
access to clean water. However, it is not just regional conflicts in
which access to water can be used as a strategic tool by the
perpetrators of unrest. Just as apparent in the state of California,
the expansive forest fires in recent years have reportedly been
instigated by the powerful utility company PG&E. The notion is
that the man-made fires have been regularly started to burn down
144
huge areas, causing locals to migrate away and to enable water

rights to be taken over by a small monopoly of corporations.
Although at this time it cannot be verified, it is worth being aware
of an article from concen.org which publishes the speech made by
well-known truth activist Deborah Tavares. An extract from this
speech states:
PG&E (utility company in California owned by Rothschild Inc.)

used directed energy weapons to start the fires in California in the
middle of the night with no storms forecast, blue lights were seen
in the sky and the power went off before the fires started.
Outside the effects of conflicts or fires, some polluting elements

in our water supply are inevitable, hence why most tap water is
filtered by the authorities to bring the general level of
contamination within certain health limits. On the European
continent, almost everyone drinks bottled water due to a lack of
trust in the hygiene of tap water. Irrespective of the mountains of
plastic that this produces, the locals probably have a point. On the
flipside, however, they may not have considered the impact of
polyfluoroalkyl chemicals (PFAs) found in food packaging and
plastic bottles. PFAs, even at very low levels, have been linked to
health problems including impaired immune function, thyroid
disease, testicular and kidney cancer, ulcerative colitis and high
cholesterol. As for plastic particles found in tap water, this is also a
global problem that most people are unaware of. In an article from
the Guardian, titled ‘Plastic fibres found in tap water around the
world, study reveals’ (September 2017), it highlights that:
Tests show billions of people globally are drinking water

contaminated by plastic particles, with eighty-three-percent of
samples found to be polluted.
145
Microplastic contamination has been found in tap water in

countries around the world, leading to calls from scientists for
urgent research on the implications for health.
Almost 300million tonnes of plastic is produced each year and,
with just twenty-percent recycled or incinerated, much of it ends
up littering the air, land and sea.
Microbeads are tiny plastic beads found in cosmetics, face

scrubs and body washes; after being flushed down the drain these
non-biodegradable plastics end up polluting waterways and wildlife.
Due to being small enough to pass through water filtration systems,
inevitably they end up being ingested by humans via their drinking
water. It seems that the majority of us are unknowingly consuming
these micro plastics, either from the polluted seafood that we eat or
from what we presume is clean drinking water.
Furthermore, how about the thought of drinking water that
contains a whole range of pharmaceutical drugs? This is not make-
believe but a very evident problem. In a World Health
Organisation information sheet, titled ‘Pharmaceuticals in
Drinking Water’, it rather explicitly reveals that:
Pharmaceuticals can be introduced into water sources through

sewage, which carries the excreta of individuals and patients who
have used these chemicals, from uncontrolled drug disposal (e.g.
discarding drugs into toilets) and from agricultural runoff
comprising livestock manure. They have become chemicals of
emerging concern to the public because of their potential to reach
drinking water.
The ubiquitous use of pharmaceuticals (both prescribed and over
the counter) has resulted in a relatively continuous discharge of
pharmaceuticals and their metabolites into wastewater.
146
Implementing additional specialized and costly drinking water

treatment, specifically with the intention of reducing trace
concentrations of pharmaceuticals, is not considered necessary at
this time, as the human health benefit would be limited. However,
knowledge gaps exist which includes the assessment of risks to
human health associated with long-term exposure to low
concentrations of pharmaceuticals and the possible combined
effects of mixtures of pharmaceuticals.
According to an article by Kathleen Doheny (WebMd archives)

titled ‘Drugs in our drinking water’:
Tiny amounts of pharmaceuticals -- including antibiotics,

hormones, mood stabilizers, and other drugs -- are in our drinking
water supplies.
Ever since the late 1990s, the science community has recognized
that pharmaceuticals, especially oral contraceptives, are found in
sewage water and are potentially contaminating drinking water.
We know that kids, including babies and toddlers, as well as
foetuses, are more susceptible to environmental exposures because
their bodies are still developing and their exposure on a pound-per-
pound basis is higher. And they lack the detoxification system
adults have. So it is not unreasonable to expect they would be at
higher risk.
It could be argued that alongside pesticides, fertilizers, micro-

plastics and other environmental pollutants found in our water
supply, the presence of pharmaceutical drugs is probably just down
to overall increases in world pollution. However, understanding
that the Luciferian elite want to dramatically reduce the world
population, combined with the fact that fertility rates continue to
plummet, it wouldn’t be at all surprising to discover that some
form of contraceptive is actively being leaked into the water system
147
for human consumption. Whether purposely administered into the

water supply, or not, there is substantial evidence that fertility of
wildlife and humans is being affected. This is highlighted in a
report titled ‘Birth Control in Drinking Water: A Fertility
Catastrophe in the Making?’ (30th June, 2019) by author Bradford
Hanson:
A recent report from the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) found

that birth-control hormones excreted by women, flushed into
waterways and eventually into drinking water can impact fish
fertility up to three generations after exposure….
If similar trends were observed in subsequent generations, a severe
decline in overall population numbers might be expected by the
fourth generation….
This raises questions about their effects on humans, who are
consuming the drugs without even knowing it in each glass of
water they drink.
About fifty million women worldwide are taking contraceptive
pills…. Up to sixty-eight percent of the contraceptive drugs being
consumed are not absorbed, but excreted into sewage systems.
With unexplained soaring incidences of testicular cancer,
infertility, childhood ‘gender dysphoria’ in increasingly young
children, who are confused about their sexual identity, and
plummeting sperm counts, some scientists are asking if the fish in
the study are like miners’ canaries: They are warning of a problem
that has not yet been fully realized.
Moving on to a toxic chemical that has been tested and proven

to be extremely dangerous to human health, it is astonishing that
as humanity we still condone fluoride to be actively added into our
drinking water. Technically known as sodium fluoride, it is a by-
product of the fertilizer, steel, aluminium and nuclear industries
148
and is used in rat poison, fungicide and wood preservative.

Referring back to the quote at the beginning of this chapter, Dr.
Dean Burk was the head chemist at the National Cancer Institute
in America. He asserts that the fluoride used in the water supply is
highly carcinogenic and that there is no good reason that we
should be administering it to the population, no matter what the
dose.
Naturally-occurring fluoride is a mineral called calcium fluoride,
which can be found in very small amounts in certain rocks and
soils. However, the man-made toxic variety that is added to
drinking water, mouthwashes and toothpaste is a hazardous waste
product known as sodium fluoride. Quoting from Dr. Mercola’s
article titled ‘You're Drinking a Toxic Industrial Waste Product’,
describing the sodium fluoride that is added to the water supply:
It's a toxic industrial waste product, which is also contaminated

with lead, arsenic, radio-nucleotides, aluminium and other
industrial contaminants, and even worse if your municipality is
foolish enough to purchase it from China.
There is not a single process in your body that requires fluoride,
but swallowing this toxin has been found to damage your soft
tissues (brain, kidneys, and endocrine system), as well as teeth
(dental fluorosis) and bones (skeletal fluorosis). There are more
than 100 published studies illustrating fluoride's harm to your
brain, plus twenty-five published studies directly linking fluoride
exposure to reduced IQ in children.
Fluoridating water is reckless, as you cannot control the dose
ingested, or who receives it, and there's no medical supervision.
Water fluoridation clearly violates your right to informed consent
as far as medical decisions go.
149
The excuse for adding fluoride into the drinking water since the
late 1940s was and still is, based on the lie that it can reduce dental
decay. There is absolutely no evidence whatsoever that this is true.
To the contrary, many comparative studies have shown that areas
subjected to water fluoridation actually have no reductions in
overall tooth decay but do reveal dramatic increases in the dental
damage known as fluorosis.
Irrespective of whether drinking fluoridated water has any
benefit to dental health, the consumption of fluoride is known to
have other detrimental effects on human health. It is known that
over time fluoride accumulates in many parts of the body, such as
areas of the brain that control and alter behaviour, including the
pineal gland, hippocampus and other limbic areas. Author Juri
Lina confirms this in ‘Architects of Deception’:
Fluoride impairs our ability to see connections and lowers the level
of intelligence, damages brain cells, promotes accumulation of
radioactive substances in the body and causes bone cancer.
Fluoride is a powerful enzyme toxin. Enzymes are the body’s
lubricants, facilitating all chemical reactions. Without enzymes the
entire metabolism comes to a halt. It is a highly carcinogenic
substance and there is no research available to support the theory
that it prevents cavities.
Regarding the effects of fluoride on the brain, a similar

conclusion is reached by Jim Marrs in the book ‘Population
Control – How Corporate Owners are Killing Us’:
Science has clearly demonstrated that fluoride is a toxic chemical

that can accumulate in the body and brain, causing harm to
enzymes and producing serious health problems, including
150
neurological and endocrine dysfunction. Children are particularly

at risk for adverse effects of overexposure to fluoride.
One of the notable cerebral effects of fluoride has been the

calcification of the pineal gland. Although only discovered in 1958,
this tiny gland located just above the pituitary gland is often
referred to as the third eye due to its link to thoughts of a spiritual
nature. Incidentally, this third eye symbol is the same one that
adorns magazine covers featuring famous personalities, corporate
logos and evidently, is enclosed within a pyramid on the back of
the one-dollar bill. It has become synonymous with Luciferian or
satanic affiliations. In ‘Illuminati Agenda 21’, Dean Henderson
explains the importance of the pineal gland and in doing so,
perhaps explains the nefarious reason for trying to block its’
function through fluoride calcification:
The pineal gland produces certain hormones including melatonin,

which drives the human circadian rhythm. Melatonin’s biggest role
is in regulating the sleep-wake patterns that keep our brains and
bodies healthy and energized. Melatonin is also believed to
regulate female fertility cycles, and protect our hearts from
cardiovascular disease and our bodies from cancer.
From a spiritual perspective, damage to the pineal gland…
ultimately brings about impaired perceptions of reality, which
leads to confusion, depression, anxiety and a whole host of other
mental and neurological disorders.
One of the increasingly common illnesses that have an effect on

memory in particular, is linked to the accumulation of aluminium
in the brain. Perhaps it is no surprise that some scientists suggest
that there is a link to consumption of a by-product of the
151
aluminium industry, namely fluoride. This is noted in the

‘National Academy of Science Report’ (2006):
Fluorides have the ability to interfere with the functions of the

brain and the body by both direct and indirect means. Fluorides
also increase the production of free radicals in the brain through
several different biological pathways. These changes have a bearing
on the possibility that fluorides act to increase the risk of
developing Alzheimer’s disease.
After reading this chapter, it is hoped that the reader will start
to understand that the addition of fluoride to our drinking water is
a pointless exercise, if viewed from the false argument of providing
improved dental health. However, when considering the historical
Luciferian plot to make us sick, with lower IQ levels and with
generally impaired perception of what is really going on in the
world around us, it makes complete sense. This is without even
going in to the argument about using fluoride in toothpaste. Why
is it that there are much better alternatives to fluoride for dental
care, such as the naturally occurring aloe vera and yet every
supermarket chain only stocks toothpastes containing the toxic
ingredient fluoride? When you consider the influence of the
pharmaceutical giants in funding dental training programs and
literature, it is no surprise that dentists too have been duped by the
same deception. Astonishingly, even my own dentist advised me
not to rinse my mouth out at night time after brushing my teeth.
His argument was that the 1350 ppm fluoride in toothpaste would
continue to fight decay through the night. What he failed to
mention and was probably totally ignorant of, was that a certain
amount of fluoride would inevitably be swallowed as contaminated
saliva. The health warning on the back of toothpaste products
152
evens states that if swallowed, immediate medical attention should

be sought.
It could be argued that water contaminants are just an
inevitability of modern society and that there is no nefarious plan
to pollute the water that we drink or products that we use.
Excluding the addition of fluoride, this may well be true. However,
that doesn’t excuse the globalist corporations for the massive
amounts of toxic waste that they produce, all of which affects the
natural environment in one way or another and certainly has severe
implications for the quality of water that we drink.
Having previously discussed who controls the banks and
inevitably the supply of money, I will leave it to renowned author
Jim Marrs to provide the link to also controlling the world’s water
supply:
Megabanks such as Goldman Sachs, JP Morgan Chase, Citigroup,

UBS, Deutsche Bank, Credit Suisse, Macquarie Bank, Barclays
Bank, the Blackstone Group, Allianz and HSHC Bank are
reportedly consolidating control over water resources, even
transcending national boundaries to partner with each other to
buy up not only water rights and water treatment technologies, but
also to privatise water utilities and infrastructure. At the same
time, governments are being pressured to pass laws limiting
citizen’s rights to water and self-sufficiency.
Ecological engineer Jo-Shing Yang, author of ‘Solving Global

Water Crises: New Paradigms in Waste Water and Water
Treatment’, agrees that a strategical move to buy up water resources
is taking place:
Wall Street and global investment firms, banks, and other elite
private-equity firms are moving rapidly into the water sector to buy
153
up not only public water rights and water treatment technologies,

but also to privatise public water utilities and infrastructure.
To conclude this chapter, maybe it’s best to leave it to the words

of one of the Luciferian’s own middle-men; Andrew Liveris, Chief
Executive of the Dow Chemical Company. He sums it up quite
succinctly:
Water is the oil of the twenty-first century.
154
Chapter eleven
In Sickness and in Health
Having looked at how a handful of powerful companies

effectively control what we eat and that the same Luciferian
tentacles of power are taking increasing control over the water that
we drink, what happens when we become sick from the chemicals,
toxins and carcinogens that we are led to consume?
It wasn’t so long ago that within most families there was a
known remedy for most illnesses, whether it was gargling vinegar
for a sore throat or eating raw garlic to fend off a cold. For more
complex sicknesses, there was knowledge of a whole range of
natural ingredients that were known to strengthen the immune
system and vitalise the respective part of the body that was under
attack. For example, the Amazonian plant graviola was known to
help in the treatment of malignancies and turmeric, with its anti-
inflammatory properties, was a natural ingredient used in the fight
against cancer. Furthermore, native Indians, natural healers,
herbalists and holistic doctors could provide traditional knowledge
to cure most ailments. It was generally understood that in nature
there could be found a cure for just about every disease.
However, in no more than a few decades this common
knowledge seems to have disappeared and at the first sign of
sickness people rush off to the doctor to find a pill or potion that
155
we are conditioned to believe offers a magical cure. Medical doctors

have been trained in institutions funded by the globalist
pharmaceutical companies and are, sad to say, effectively just acting
as their salesmen. They are taught very little about nutrition and
the importance of treating the source of the illness, instead they are
trained in how to prescribe an expensive pharmaceutical patch to
treat only the symptoms. Unlike previous generations that tried to
stay healthy, eat as well as they could afford and effectively avoid
the things that they knew would make them sick, society now wants
a quick-fix for any illness in the form of a pharmaceutical drug.
This also coincides with a general breakdown in the way that
individuals rely on their own senses and insight. It seems that due
to constantly being bombarded by advertising and mainstream
media, news and television, people are now relying on a digital
screen to provide the answers to their problems or illnesses rather
than instinctively knowing what should be done to prevent them in
the first place.
From personal experience, at a young age I experienced repeated
throat infections caused by chronic tonsillitis. Each time I went to
visit my G.P., irrespective of the fact that he barely spoke English, it
was as if anti-biotics were already being prescribed even before
walking through the surgery door. The result was three years
plucking food out of tonsils that looked like the cratered surface of
the moon. This endured until a visit to Accident and Emergency at
the local hospital. The shocked reaction from the doctor on duty
was that my tonsils should have been taken out years ago!
In a similar way to the food and water supply network, just a
handful of globalist pharmaceutical companies control the drugs
that most people regularly consume or are led to become addicted
to. As a business model, it is far better to get a consumer requiring
156
a regular dose of medicine for life rather than seeking to cure the
source of the problem. Hence, doctors are rewarded for prescribing
the long-term use of statins to reduce cholesterol and blood
pressure or anti-depressants for almost anyone that thinks there is a
problem with what modern life has become. Active children that
have probably consumed too many artificial chemicals are pumped
full of drugs for ADHD, those that can’t sleep are recommended
sleeping tablets and the latest craze seems to be all sorts of mind-
numbing pills to treat new categories of mental illness. Even those
that have succumbed to the advertising onslaught of promoting
tasty snacks and drinks laden with refined sugars and fats, end up
obese or, before long, on permanent medication for diabetes. It
seems that Aldous Huxley was right when in his essay, ‘Drugs That
Shape Men’s Minds’, (1958) he states:
Millions of patients who had no real need of the tranquilizers have

been given the pills by their doctors and have learned to resort to
them in every predicament, however triflingly uncomfortable. This
is very bad medicine and, from the pill taker’s point of view,
dubious morality and poor sense.
Referring back to the quote at the beginning of this chapter, Dr.

Jack Wolfson explains why the globalist pharmaceutical industry
wants us in a state of ill health. In his article, ‘How Governments,
Food Companies, Big Pharma, Media and Healthcare Operators
Keep Us Fat and Sick’, it summarises quite simply that:
Big Pharma is not in business to cure your ailments or prevent

disease.
There is no money to be made in cures or prevention. Big Pharma
needs you to be sick so they can keep selling you stuff at high
profit margins.
157
Big Pharma meds only treat symptoms. They don’t cure things.
That’s why people are constantly on prescription medications.
Doctors, insurance companies, medical equipment vendors,
hospital and clinic operators – all of them need you to be sick to
make money. Healthy people don’t fill up hospital beds. They
don’t use MRI machines. They don’t buy extravagant insurance
plans with premiums and little benefit.
The evidence overwhelmingly points to the fact that government,
food companies, media, Big Pharma and other healthcare
organizations need you to be sick and addicted to survive and
thrive.
Jonathan Cho provides the same argument in an article titled,

‘Proof Big Pharma Wants You to Be Sick’ (7th October, 2013):
Pharmaceutical companies by and large are in the business of

sickness. Objectively, corporations, especially publicly traded
corporations, exist to make a profit. They most commonly do this
by making a product to sell to consumers, who corporations hope
to turn into repeat customers, on monthly or yearly basis, to
maintain and increase revenue streams.
Taking one of the most rampant of sicknesses that seems to be

increasingly plaguing society, the occurrence and treatment of
cancer is a very good example of how the Luciferian globalists
operate. In nothing other than a psychopathic manner, this tiny
ruling elite and their international pharmaceutical drug dealers
conduct business with complete disregard for human life or the
suffering caused.
First of all, we are constantly reminded by the mainstream
media that cancer is a genetic illness. Of course, this is what the
Luciferians want you to believe. If that’s the case then you can
continue eating as much processed crap as you like, chain-smoke,
158
drink too much and indulge on takeaways, while stocking your

kitchen cupboards full of carcinogenic cleaning products. If it’s just
our genetic fate then there’s nothing we can do about it, so the
message is keep on consuming our toxic products.
If cancer was simply a genetic disease then why did it barely exist
fifty years ago and why is it consistently becoming more prevalent?
To put it into perspective, in the 1940s just one out of every
sixteen people was stricken with cancer; by the 1970s that ratio fell
to one in ten. Today, one in two males is likely to develop some
form of cancer and for women that ratio is one in three. The
general consensus among most honest professionals is that cancer
is predominantly man-made.
The continuous increase in the likelihood of developing some
form of cancer seems to run in parallel with consuming food and
water that has become more processed and polluted. Combined
with this, the amount of chemicals that we are exposed to in our
daily lives has dramatically increased. Just have a look at the
amount of different cleaning products there are in an average
supermarket these days or the abundance of chemical-laden body
lotions, shampoos and sprays that are designed to be administered
directly onto the skin or into the pores. Just one example is the
recent discovery that sunscreen becomes a carcinogenic compound
when mixed with certain other chemicals commonly found in
swimming pools. It is not hard to imagine what effect chemicals in
cleaning products are having on the skin or when their aromas or
sprays are breathed into the lungs.
Everyone knows somebody that has fallen victim to cancer. To
give a personal example, somebody who was recently diagnosed
with lung cancer went to see an oncologist to discuss the options.
Being a non-smoker all her life, the first thing the cancer doctor
159
asked was whether she had been working regularly with chemicals
or cleaning products. Like most people, the cancer sufferer did not
see any relevance in this question whatsoever but when she replied
that she was a cleaner at the hospital for many years the doctor did
not seem at all surprised at the suspected cause of the cancer.
Some of these common assertions are explained on
thetruthaboutcancer.com, which states:
The vast majority of cancer causes are man-made, something that

the medical, agricultural, and tech industries don’t want you to
know.
Experts estimate that over fifty-percent of cancer cases are
preventable with simple lifestyle changes. This means that the right
knowledge about the root causes of cancer could save millions of
lives each year!
Roughly eighty-percent of your immune system is located in the
upper gastrointestinal tract. But processed foods, pesticides, skin
care products and even cell phone radiation can destroy gut health
and lead to immune disorders and cancer.
Irrespective of what the cause of a particular cancer may be, the

universal treatment from the medical establishment is targeted at
the symptoms and not the cause. A 2010 documentary titled ‘Cut,
Poison, Burn’ by filmmaker Wayne Chesler highlights the systemic
corruption behind the use of surgery, chemotherapy and radiation
as conventional treatments for cancer. The problem with this
approach is that the cause of the cancer is never being addressed
and therefore even if treatment is administered, the fuel stoking
the fire, so to speak, is still there. As a result, very few cancers are
actually cured. In reality, it is just the symptoms that are
temporarily suppressed by the use of expensive pharmacological
treatment methods. One such statistical example is offered by
160
Charles B. Simone, M.MS, M.D, the founder of the ‘Simone

Protective Cancer Center’:
From 1920 to the present time, we have made little progress in the
treatment of adult cancers. So, a person who gets prostate cancer
or breast cancer today will live as long as a person who got it in
1920.
The rather unpalatable truth about this is that all the effort and
donations raised in a wide range of noble charity events in recent
years have, unfortunately, been a waste of time as far as the
reduction of cancer goes. That does not mean that cancer research
societies have not done extremely well out of the regular
contributions but the simple fact remains that a cure for cancer will
never be allowed to become widely available; cancer is just too big a
business for the globalist pharmaceutical companies. In fact, there
is an abundance of examples that show how natural cancer
remedies have been actively suppressed, the doctors imprisoned or
advocates ‘silenced’.
One such example is the banning of Laetrile B-17 in the 1970s.
A natural ingredient found in apricot kernels and the seeds of
many fruits, Laetrile has been proven to reduce the growth of
cancer cells and inhibit metastases. Dr. Kanematsu Sugiura from
the Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer Center discovered the
positive effects of Laetrile in preventing the spread of tumours.
However, when the board members heard of this potential natural
and uncostly cure for cancer, research was stopped and Dr. Sugiura
ended up being fired. In his book, ‘Doctored Results – The
Suppression of Laetrile at Sloan-Kettering Institute for Cancer
Research’, Ralph W. Moss explains:
161
The individuals on Sloan Kettering’s Board of Directors were a

who’s who of investors in petrochemical and other polluting
industries. In other words, the hospital was being run by people
who made their wealth by investing in the worst cancer-causing
things on the planet.
With this background in mind, it should come as no surprise to
learn that Sugiura’s findings did not please his employer. They
were slow to pick up on the importance of Sugiura’s work, but
when they did, all hell broke loose in the board room. If a cure for
cancer were to be found in an extract from the lowly apricot seed,
it would be a terrible economic blow to the cancer-drug industry.
Another natural cure for cancer is the recent discovery of

GcMAF (glycoprotein macrophage activating factor), a protein
found in the immune system of healthy people. Dr. Timothy Smith
describes in ‘The GcMAF Book’ that when a person is afflicted by a
virus or an illness like cancer, the GcMAF kick-starts the body’s
immune system by activating macrophages. These warrior cells are
sent off to destroy the duplicating cancer cells. The naturally
occurring GcMAF is manufactured in the bodies of healthy people
by way of a precursor Gc protein that uses vitamin D and sunlight.
In people whose immune system has been suppressed, the protein
Nagalese (alpha-N-acetylgalactosaminidase) is manufactured and
released by the cancer cells, effectively sabotaging the precursor,
preventing the Gc protein from doing its job; as a result, the cancer
cells begin to multiply unheeded. Dr. Smith goes on to say:
With Nagalese testing we now possess the technology to identify

cancer when it is just a handful of cells and then easily reverse it
with a few GcMAF injections. For me, the Holy Grail of cancer
eradication is finding it early and nipping it in the bud.
162
Another scientist that discovered the important healing effects

of GcMAF is Dr. Nobuto Yamamoto, former Research Professor of
Biochemistry Immunology at Temple University Medical School.
He demonstrated how GcMAF provides the natural support to the
body’s immune system so as to destroy cancer cells:
GcMAF administration bypasses the Nagalese blockage and re-

activates the macrophages, which then proceed to kill the cancer
cells and HIV viruses.
It is hoped that any reader with particular interest in a more

humane treatment for cancer may want to research these
alternatives, and others, further. However, like the banning of the
natural cancer remedy Laetrile B-17, the company making GcMAF
in Europe, Immuno Biotech Ltd, was forced to shut down by the
Medicines and Health Regulatory Association (MHRA) in 2015.
This direct intervention by a regulatory agency to prevent a natural
cure for cancer is explained on the website mhracorrupt.st:
GcMAF is the body’s way of curing cancer, a human protein all of

us make, and a human right; it has no side effects. It is the best
treatment known for tumour cancers, which is ninety-percent of
them, and fifty other diseases. People with disease can’t make it,
and need external GcMAF to cure their diseases.
300 scientists have written over 150 scientific research papers on
GcMAF, and Immuno Biotech Ltd had supplied 11,000 people,
with fabulous results before the MHRA closed them down.
It was discovered in 1990, and the MHRA has conspired to
conceal it from the public since then. As the regulatory agency the
MHRA’s remit is to support new treatments; they should have
helped Immuno Biotech Ltd (IBL) to get the product into the
NHS as soon as possible. But they abused their position, to protect
163
the profits of the big pharmaceutical companies that they illegally

represent. They have big pharma on their board.
One of the biochemists and GcMAF healthcare scientists,

Lynda Thyer, who had successfully been using this treatment to
cure hundreds of cancer patients, was arrested and, at the time of
writing, awaits trial in a French jail. It seems that the only chance
for her and all of those that suffer with some form of cancer, is for
the general public to awaken to what is really going on in the
world. It doesn’t take a genius to realise that prevention through
organic nutrition and treatment using natural methods must be a
better alternative than the toxic chemicals being forced upon us by
the Luciferian-controlled pharmaceutical industry.
In addition to making huge amounts of money off the sickness
of others, worsening rates of cancer coincide perfectly with the
Luciferian agenda of massive population reduction. Relating this
point to the abundance of cancer research institutions that never
actually come up with a cure, Dr. Linus Pauling, Nobel Laureate,
honestly stated in 1986:
Everyone should know that most cancer research is largely a fraud.
Under the title ‘Why Medicine Won’t Allow Cancer to Be

Cured’, Dr. Mercola agrees with the assertion that cancer research
has not led to a reduction in the amount of cancer deaths and
perhaps more worryingly, the treatment itself can actually be a
cause of cancer:
In spite of the enormous amounts of money funnelled into cancer

research today, two out of three cancer patients will be dead within
five years after receiving all or part of the standard cancer
treatment trinity — surgery, radiotherapy and chemotherapy. This
164
is not too surprising when you consider that two of the three are
carcinogenic themselves!
Just looking at the most common form of treatment for cancer,

namely chemotherapy, the truth behind such an expensive and
toxic method is generally kept quiet by the medical profession.
There is an abundance of literature, studies and testimonials that
reveal the true poisonous effects of chemotherapy. This is
explained in one such article by Ty Bollinger, ‘The Truth about
Chemotherapy – Toxic Poison or Cancer Cure?’ (5th May, 2015):
The truth is that chemo is toxic, carcinogenic (causes cancer),

destroys erythrocytes (red blood cells), devastates the immune
system, and destroys vital organs.
The serious toxic effects of chemotherapy have long been ignored
by virtually everyone in medicine and the federal government.
Truth be told, if a person has one type of cancer and allowed
oneself to be injected with chemotherapy, this person will later
often develop a different type of cancer as a result. The oncologist
would likely claim to have cured their initial cancer even though a
second or third cancer developed which was directly caused by the
chemo used to treat the original cancer.
Although chemotherapy may reduce the size of one particular

cancer, statistics do seem to show that it actually leads to other
cancers elsewhere in the body. Whether the chemotherapy is
simply causing the original cancer to migrate to another part of the
sufferer or that the chemotherapy itself is the cause of new cancer
growths is a long-standing discussion amongst experts in the field.
Either way, taking the advice of Dr. Alan C. Nixon, former
president of the American Chemical Society, who cites:
165
As a chemist trained to interpret data, it is incomprehensible to

me that physicians can ignore the clear evidence that
chemotherapy does much, much more harm than good.
One thing that is clearly visible from someone being treated by

chemotherapy is that it has serious side effects. First and foremost,
it makes all your hair fall out. That in itself reveals the toxic effect
it is having on the human body. Other debilitating side effects
include stomach and muscle pain, mouth ulcers, headaches, nausea
and vomiting, nervous system disruption and loss of appetite.
According to an article titled ‘Chemo drugs are dangerous to
families and healthcare workers as well as patients’ (9th June, 2019),
Tracey Watson adds:
The long-term side effects, which are even more serious, can
include heart, liver, lung, kidney or reproductive system damage, as
well as ‘chemo brain’ – permanent memory, concentration and
thinking problems. Experts also warn that chemotherapy greatly
increases the risk of secondary cancers later in life.
The same article summarises a study published in the ‘Journal

of Oncology Pharmacy Practice’ in 2012. This concluded that it is
not only the patient at risk from such a potent method of
treatment:
Family members who live with someone undergoing chemotherapy

are exposed to the same toxic chemicals as the patient via their
urinary and other excretions. Healthcare workers also risk
exposure in the same way, as well as through direct contact with
the medication itself.
Although there are a wide range of man-made diseases that keep

us continually sick, cancer being one of them, another particularly
166
worrying development is the dramatic increase in the existence of

autism in young children. There is an abundance of scientific
evidence available that shows the direct link between the onset of
autism in perfectly normal infants and receiving childhood
vaccinations. In particular, it has been shown that the mumps,
measles and rubella (MMR) vaccine is directly associated with this
growing epidemic. In ‘Illuminati Agenda 21’, Dean Henderson
writes:
The most disturbing and devastating medical apocalypse of our

time has got to be the huge spike in autism, likely caused by an
increase in required childhood vaccinations. By the time a child is
six years old they will have received forty-nine doses of fourteen
different vaccinations…. Every vaccine is tainted with toxic
adjuvants such as mercury, lead, iron, nickel, aluminium, arsenic
and chromium.
In 1978, only one in 15,000 children was diagnosed with autism
and even as recently as 2002, only one in 10,000 children was
diagnosed with it. That number exploded to one out of eighty in
2014. The most recent statistics conclude that one out of every
forty-five children have some form of what is now called Autism
Spectrum Disorder.
If the exploding trend in autistic children continues along this
gradient, one in three children will be autistic by 2050. That
means one-third of the entire population will be mentally and/or
physically disabled and will need full time care.
A fascinating insight into the link between the MMR

vaccination and the immediate onset of autism is undeniably
proven in ‘Vaxxed – from cover up to catastrophe’. In this
documentary, Dr. William Thompson, a senior scientist at the U.S.
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), confesses that
167
the CDC omitted crucial data in their final report which revealed
the causal relationship between the MMR vaccine and autism.
Directed by British gastroenterologist, Dr. Andrew Wakefield, he
first reported that the MMR vaccine may cause autism in 1998. A
preview from the Vaxxed website states:
Interviews with pharmaceutical insiders, doctors, politicians, and

parents of vaccine-injured children reveal an alarming deception
that has contributed to the skyrocketing increase of autism and
potentially the most catastrophic epidemic of our lifetime.
In his ongoing effort to advocate for children’s health, Wakefield
directs this documentary examining evidence behind an appalling
cover-up committed by the government agency charged with
protecting the health of American citizens.
Since the release of this documentary the mainstream media has

gone into overdrive trying to discredit its findings. However,
thousands of families with autistic children that agree with the
cause being directly linked to the MMR vaccine have gone viral
with their campaign ‘Hear This Well’. For anybody interested in
researching the link between autism and vaccinations, hearing the
truth from thousands of parents is quite emotive testimony.
In an article from naturalnews.com titled ‘Vaccines Cause
Autism – the Supporting Evidence’ (6th October, 2009), it explains:
Rates of autism have skyrocketed 1000% since 1990, yet defenders

of vaccines and the pharmaceutical industry keep scratching their
heads in confusion.
Some of the quotes mentioned by specialists listed in the article

are as follows:
168
There is also a strong connection between all forms of vaccinations

and autism. A U.S. study found that children who received
vaccines containing a preservative called thimerosal, which is
almost fifty-percent mercury, were more than twice as likely to
develop autism than children who did not.
It seems that a number of chemical factors play a role in triggering
the onset of autism. In the case of MMR-triggered autism, the virus
in this vaccine could be the final straw, triggering autism in a child
who has already been damaged by previous exposure to chemicals
from vaccines and the environment.
Dr. Paula Baillie-Hamilton (Toxic Overload: A Doctor's Plan for
Combating the Illnesses Caused by Chemicals in Our Foods, Our
Homes, and Our Medicine Cabinets).
Autism is a catastrophic epidemic with an increase of 1,500% in

the UK in the last decade.
In California one in 150 children is autistic - a fifty-four-percent
increase since just 2001-2!
Significantly, the first cases of autism were described in the US
shortly after the vaccines for whooping cough were introduced in
the 1940s.
Helke Ferrie (Dispatches from the War Zone of Environmental
Health).
It seems that as public awareness of the potential damage caused

by certain vaccinations grows, so does the insistence from
governments that the same vaccinations should become
compulsory. The same way that governments are steered from
higher up the pyramid of power, so too, the controlled mainstream
media joins in with a typical propaganda campaign. The hundreds
of thousands of parents living with autistic children are not
represented, cautious parents that take the educated opinion to
169
refuse vaccinations such as the combined MMR jab are ridiculed as

being uncaring and doctors raising the alarm are labelled as quacks
or removed from their posts. Meanwhile the statistics keep rising
for young children being diagnosed as having autism: brain damage
for life!
This observation is confirmed in an article by Arjun Walia,
author for activistpost.com, titled ‘22 Medical Studies That Show
Vaccines Can Cause Autism’. It reveals the results from various
studies and links the main pharmaceutical culprits with other
globalist companies higher up the pyramid of power and their
mainstream media allies:
Concerns regarding vaccinations continue to increase

exponentially in light of all of the information and documentation
that has surfaced over the past few years. As a result, corporate
media has responded to alternative media, stating that the increase
of persons who are choosing to opt out of vaccines and the
recommended vaccine schedule is a result of ‘fear mongering.’
For example, if we take a look at GlaxoSmithKline and Pfizer, they
are owned by the same financial institutions and groups that own
Time Warner (CNN, HBO etc.) and General Electric (NBC,
Comcast, Universal Pictures etc.). This is seen throughout all of
the major vaccine manufacturers and all of the six corporations
that control our mainstream media. Keep in mind that these are
the major funders of all ‘medical research’ that’s used to
administer drugs and vaccinations.
It seems that with the increasing demand for the compulsory

vaccination of all children, so as to be entitled to go to school,
autism is not only here to stay but looks set to increase accordingly.
While the younger generation is being poisoned directly into their
170
bloodstreams before their immune systems have had a chance to

develop; how about the rest of us?
As autism affects the brains of vulnerable infants, it seems that
antidepressants are also having an adverse effect on the brains of
teenagers and adults. It is generally accepted that depression is
caused by a lack of serotonin in the brain. Rather than addressing
lifestyle or nutritional root causes of the illness, once again, the
pharmaceutical industry has its foot soldiers in the form of family
doctors that are more than ready to prescribe a continuous supply
of anti-depressants. Technically, anti-depressants such as Prozac,
(known as Serotonin Re-uptake Inhibitors – SSRIs) are supposed to
prevent the brain from re-absorbing serotonin and therefore
improve the mood of the patient. However, after taking such brain-
altering drugs for a period of time, not only do they become
addictive but there are obvious side-effects. This is summarised by
Dr. Edward Group in an article titled ‘The Vicious Truth About
Antidepressants and Violent Behaviour’:
The brain is a complex organ, controlling our actions, cells, and

emotions. When we mess with the brain, either inadvertently or
with pharmaceutical medications, we can only expect a negative
consequence in the process.
The mind is prone to neuroses, particularly during stressful or
traumatic times. Using psychiatric drugs to ‘treat’ depression is
more often than not a band-aid approach and only addresses the
biological symptoms of depression rather than the root cause.
Improper nutrition is virtually ignored by today’s psychiatrists, but
it just so happens that all neurotransmitters responsible for mood
stabilization require nutrients for proper functioning. Tryptophan,
for instance, requires zinc, copper, B vitamins, iron, and
magnesium in order to perform efficiently.
171
In addition to the alarming scale of the problem, in ‘The

Depressing Truth About Antidepressants’, author Harry Shapiro
also addresses the direct link between the numbers of people taking
anti-depressants and the relative increase in mental health disability
payments:
There is a close correlation between increasing levels of anti-

depressant prescribing and claims for mental health disability
payments. For example, sixty-one million prescriptions for
antidepressants were issued in England alone in 2015 – four times
as many as in 1995 – while there were over 1.1 million disability
claims for mental health disorders in the UK in 2014, over double
the number twenty years ago.
Peter R. Breggin, M.D., in his article ‘Antidepressants: Far More

Harm than Good’, goes on to explain:
Anti-depressants are neurotoxic, that is, they harm the brain and
disrupt its functions. As a result, they cause innumerable kinds of
abnormal thinking and behaviours, including mania, suicide and
violence. In the process, they cause detectable damage to the brain
of the child or adult, and also to the foetus of pregnant mothers
who take the drug.
The anti-depressant drugs have no specific impact on depression
and instead are used off label to treat everything imaginable from
physical pain to anxiety and ADHD. People often experience
euphoria after starting an antidepressant, but it is short-lived,
leaving the individual to try one and then another anti-depressant
in the hope of re-experiencing this artificial, chemically induced
‘happiness.’ This initial ‘feeling great’ is in reality a danger sign,
often signalling the start of an anti-depressant-induced manic
episode that can ruin lives.
172
Overall, anti-depressants do far more harm than good in children

and adults, and therefore should not be prescribed. Even if more
effective treatments or approaches did not exist, anti-depressants,
by doing more harm than good, are too dangerous for clinical use.
Finally, before concluding this chapter, a short mention must be

made about the recent widespread trend of prescribing statins.
Purported to have the highest peak sales in the pharmaceutical
market, it is no surprise that at the slightest reading of higher than
normal blood pressure or cholesterol levels, doctors and medical
professionals have been encouraged by the drug companies to put
their patients on a life-long prescription of statins. These drugs are
formulated to alter liver function, reducing the efficiency of a
specific liver enzyme that produces cholesterol. However, in the
process of suppressing the natural function of such enzymes, other
problems are created in the body. One such side effect is the
relative increase in Type-2 diabetes. In a study conducted by
University College London (UCL) and the University of Glasgow,
130,000 participants were monitored over a four year period.
Patients receiving statins experienced an increase in body weight
and were twelve percent more likely to develop Type-2 diabetes
than those on the placebo.
Despite results from similar studies, it is surprising to note that
the ‘UK National Institute for Health and Care Excellence’
recommends that doctors prescribe statins for those who are
deemed at a ten-percent higher risk for developing cardiovascular
disease within the next decade. Unfortunately, this gives doctors a
free licence to prescribe this highly lucrative drug to almost anyone,
hence why more and more people are ending up on statins for life
rather than making simple life-style changes that would bring about
the same result, albeit naturally.
173
Whether talking about the over-use of anti-biotics, toxic

chemotherapy treatment, vaccine-induced autism, mind-bending
anti-depressants or over-prescribed statins, the decline in personal
health and avoidance of natural remedies is accelerating at an
alarming rate. It is only when this health crisis is viewed from the
perspective of a well-defined, historical plan to make us sick and
ultimately to dramatically reduce the total world population, that it
all makes complete sense. The Luciferians are not only becoming
filthy rich on the back of the hard labour of taxpayers but reaping
the profits from making them sick by the toxic products they use
and consume. None of this is by accident and unfortunately,
statistics reveal that things are getting worse. Later on in this book
will be presented a list of things each individual can do to improve
their lives and to start fighting back against these psychopathic
elites. In the meantime, it’s time to move away from the negative
physical effects caused by contaminated food, water and
pharmaceutical drugs and look into how the Luciferians also
manipulate how we think.
174
Chapter twelve
Education or Programming?
After spending almost every day in an institutionalised

education system from the age of five until adulthood, it is no
surprise that these early learning years have a profound influence
on the way people think and act. Many readers may well look back
at their own schooling and wonder what they really learnt that is of
any significance to surviving, let alone thriving in the modern
world. The pointless stress of examinations seems to be targeted at
ever younger children and then there is the intrusive extra
curriculum of getting back to the family home only to have even
more homework to do. Isolated from the real world for most of the
day, children are indoctrinated with whatever the national
curriculum contains or chooses to emit. School children are
cajoled into classrooms to listen for instruction from an
authoritative figure then, when the bell rings, sent off to further
memorise another predetermined topic. All the while, they rarely
have time to think for themselves, use their cognitive ability or
have time to develop their own independent skills that would
properly equip them for life in the real world. More importantly,
175
during this whole process of following orders and being taught

primarily how to respect authority, a child’s most important
educators are kept as far away as possible, namely their own family
members.
One of the most experienced and outspoken critics of the
educational system is award winning teacher John Taylor Gatto. He
was named New York City Teacher of the Year in 1989, 1990 and
1991 as well as New York State Teacher of the Year in 1991. After
spending nearly thirty years in the classroom, he realised that the
whole schooling system is actually designed to dumb down
children, to make them emotionally and intellectually dependent
and limit their self-confidence. Rather than trying to summarise his
knowledgeable words, here is an extract from one of his speeches:
I've noticed a fascinating phenomenon in my twenty-five years of

teaching - that schools and schooling are increasingly irrelevant to
the great enterprises of the planet. No one believes anymore that
scientists are trained in science classes or politicians in civics
classes or poets in English classes. The truth is that schools don't
really teach anything except how to obey orders. This is a great
mystery to me because thousands of humane, caring people work
in schools as teachers and aides and administrators but the abstract
logic of the institution overwhelms their individual contributions.
Although teachers do care and do work very hard, the institution
is psychopathic - it has no conscience.
Schools are intended to produce through the application of
formulae, formulaic human beings whose behaviour can be
predicted and controlled. To a very great extent, schools succeed in
doing this. But our society is disintegrating, and in such a society,
the only successful people are self-reliant, confident, and
individualistic - because the community life which protects the
dependent and the weak is dead. The products of schooling are, as
176
I've said, irrelevant. Well-schooled people are irrelevant. They can

sell film and razor blades, push paper and talk on the telephones,
or sit mindlessly before a flickering computer terminal but as
human beings they are useless. Useless to others and useless to
themselves.
It is absurd and anti-life to be part of a system that compels you to
sit in confinement with people of exactly the same age and social
class. That system effectively cuts you off from the immense
diversity of life and the synergy of variety, indeed it cuts you off
from your own part and future, scaling you to a continuous
present much the same way television does.
Gatto then goes on to explain the difference between how

children of the masses are taught compared to the contrasting
system used to educate the offspring of the ruling classes:
At the core of the elite system of education is the belief that self-
knowledge is the only basis of true knowledge. Everywhere in this
system, at every age, you will find arrangements to place the child
alone in an unguided setting with a problem to solve. Sometimes
the problem is fraught with great risks, such as the problem of
galloping a horse or making it jump, but that, of course, is a
problem successfully solved by thousands of elite children before
the age of ten. Can you imagine anyone who had mastered such a
challenge ever lacking confidence in his ability to do anything?
Sometimes the problem is the problem of mastering solitude, as
Thoreau did at Walden Pond, or Einstein did in the Swiss customs
house.
In 1986, a revealing document was discovered in a copier

purchased from Boeing. Under the heading ‘Top Secret’, it was
titled ‘Silent Weapons for Quiet Wars’. The contents date back to
military planning during the cold war, and call for the controlling
177
of the masses through manipulation of industry, peoples’ pastimes,

political leanings and education. In summary, it proposes a quiet
revolution by pitting brother against brother and diverting the
public’s attention from what is really going on in the world. A very
interesting excerpt from page seven offers some explanation as to
why the school education offered to the masses is purposely
designed to be far inferior to that taught in private institutions:
The quality of education given to the lower class must be of the

poorest sort, so that the moat of ignorance isolating the inferior
class from the superior class is and remains incomprehensible to
the inferior class. With such an initial handicap, even bright lower
class individuals have little if any hope of extricating themselves
from their assigned lot in life. This form of slavery is essential to
maintain some measure of social order, peace, and tranquillity for
the ruling upper class.
Another influential figure who helped to transform education

into the inferior system that we have today was John Dewey, an
anti-Stalin Marxist. In an article by Thomas R. Hart titled ‘Public
Education Brainwashing’ (29th December, 2004), it explains:
Dewey, who is commonly known as the ‘Father of Modern

Education’ was the originator of using public education for social
change, the idea that started the systematic brainwashing of
America's children. Many believe that the modern educational
philosophy and practice of the National Education Association is
to brainwash students in order to achieve social change.
By 2020 we will have arrived at the 100th anniversary of using
public education for social change, concurrent with the 'Sixth
Generation of Educational Brainwashing.'
178
It seems that there is a consensus of opinion that what we refer

to as school education is seemingly irrelevant to modern life. Not
only is it inferior to the teaching offered to children of the upper
classes but it is apparently used as a means of brainwashing the
lower-class future members of society, to accept a life of servitude.
This view is reinforced in an article titled ‘Public Schools Dumb
Down Society’ (2015), by Walter Glenn Moore:
The regimented routine of compulsory education through a

politically manipulated system is more designed to keep society
dumbed down, incapable of either creative or logical thinking, nor
productive living, nor any real awareness of the realities of life.
The purpose of education (based upon my observation and the
observation of many others) is to enslave society, to create robotic
clones that are merely ‘cogs in the wheel’ and that only know how
to do their little job that they have been given to do, to prevent
people from having self-determination.
The purpose of education in the public sector should be to spread
enlightenment to all, so that they could have a better life and share
that knowledge with others so that we can all work together to
have a better society. But the evidence appears to show that public
education is doing just the opposite, and it appears that this is not
by accident, but by design!
Since passing through the school education system myself as

well as further education to University level, the unavoidable truth
is that to pass exams the student relies almost solely on the ability
to memorise and regurgitate information. This, to a certain extent,
defines who obtains certificates and diplomas, compared to those
that are deemed less educated or not as intelligent. It says nothing
about personal competence or practical intelligence but is used as
the benchmark for how the individual progresses into the working
179
environment and the quality of job that they can achieve.

Highlighting this point is an interesting internet article from
thebiggestpicture.net/education:
Even if we assume for a moment that the idea of childhood

‘compulsory education’ under an ‘education system’ in a
government-run ‘educational’ institution is benevolent and
valid/useful/positive, the premise of such existing systems — that
of memorizing ‘facts’ to score high grades — is technologically
obsolete.
Author Abraham Hicks agrees with this assertion in ‘The New

Educational System’ (2014), in which he questions why it is
necessary to spend many years effectively memorising facts which
are now available to almost everyone at the flick of a finger across
their smart phone:
The existence of Internet search engines constitutes pervasive

proof that the educational system model of public schools is
technologically obsolete, and because it still exists it must therefore
mean that its effective purpose is not to educate the children of the
Earth, but to mould their belief systems to conform to
enslavement to the control system.
So, if the current school education system is not intended to

produce bright, independent human beings that can challenge to
become the CEOs of big corporations, run for president or invent
something worthwhile for humanity, what is it really there to
achieve? Looking from the perspective of this book and the
historical plot to control the masses, the school system appears to
have become a well-orchestrated method of implementing an early
means of control that most children will adopt for the rest of their
180
lives. This is explained in ‘Fringe Knowledge for Beginners’ by

Montalk (2008):
Although schools teach students the important skills of maths,

reading, and writing, they serve more to churn out effective
workers who are dependent on the Control System than
independent thinkers who can find their own way in life. School
does this through several manipulative tactics.
The first method is spending more class time and energy on
behavioural conditioning than teaching. Behavioural conditioning
means using rules, rewards, and punishments to intentionally
mould someone’s thoughts, feelings, and behaviours. Too many
school rules are unnecessary and intended more to make students
feel powerless and angry than improve the learning environment.
The second method is hammering into the minds of students a
single path through life, one that involves pleasing authority in
order to gain the grades and recommendations one needs to get
into a good college, to get the diploma one needs to get a good job
at a big company, to get the respect one needs to feel good and
secure an early retirement.
The third method involves structuring textbooks and classes to be
as fragmented as possible so that everything is learned in unrelated
chunks. This way students memorize the facts in each chunk of a
subject and can solve the homework problems, but in their minds
these never melt together into a big picture that gives them truly
intuitive understanding of the subject necessary to use the ideas
and original ways. Students therefore become skilled in doing
things only in the way they are taught, losing the ability to come up
with better ways, and that is how they become like programmable
robots that do their jobs without asking questions.
The fourth method includes twisting facts in textbooks to create a
false picture of the world. History and science books are the worst
because they are oversimplified for the average mind and written
181
by committees with political agendas, so the actual picture given to

students is rarely accurate because it is intended to steer them
toward holding only those opinions supported by the Control
System.
It is this moulding of the young child's belief system — especially
with the idea that truth comes from ‘authority’, i.e. that oneself
does not have the ability to determine truth for oneself — that
enables the control system to perpetuate and grow.
Noam Chomsky seems to agree with the idea of schools actually

acting as controlling mechanisms for future citizens. In
‘Understanding Power’ it states:
Given the external power structure of the society in which they

function, the institutional role of the schools for the most part is
just to train people for obedience and conformity, and to make
them controllable and indoctrinated.
Although tending to steer away from David Icke, due to leading

his followers down a New Age rabbit-hole, as regards the education
system he does seem to come to the same logical conclusion. In an
article titled ‘Education – Paying to be Programmed’ (24th January,
2013), it summarises the schooling system in a more concise
manner than he is usually renowned for:
The process of mainstream ‘education’ swamps the left side of the

brain with the system’s version of reality by communicating
‘logical’ and ‘rational’ information based on ‘observable evidence’.
Students are then told to retain this information, and revise it
thoroughly, before taking something called an ‘exam’ in which
they must repeat to the system what the system has told them to
believe. If they do this really well they pass their exams and
‘progress’.
182
A study by Kyung Hee Kim, professor of education for the College

of William and Mary in Virginia, focused on the creativity of
school age children between kindergarten and twelfth grade using
the measurement known as the Torrance tests of creative thinking.
He found a ‘massive’ decline of creativity the longer the students
progressed through the school system as ‘children have become less
emotionally expressive, less energetic, less talkative and verbally
expressive, less humorous, less imaginative, less unconventional,
less lively and passionate, less perceptive, less apt to connect
seemingly irrelevant things, less synthesizing, and less likely to see
things from a different angle.’
One of the most important hurdles for the Luciferian

proponents of a New World Order is to break apart the
foundation, strength and direction provided by the family unit.
This has become abundantly clear in recent years where television
programmes such as Black Beauty and the Waltons have been
superseded by the likes of Family Man and The Simpsons. The
multi-pronged attack on this fundamental institution can also be
seen on a daily basis in public schools. This is apparent in its
promotion of feminism, encouraging homosexuality and
questioning one’s gender, negating the need for marriage, while
ultimately, keeping children away from their parents during their
formative years. During such influential years, known as the critical
period, a vital part of the historical plot is for the state-run
programming system to indoctrinate children into accepting life as
a future slave of society. By separating children from their family, it
is the controlled state system that moulds the mind of the child,
preparing them to be the subservient adults that make up the
bewildered herd. John Taylor Gatto knew this very well, explaining
in his speech:
183
Family is the main engine of education. If we use schooling to

break children away from parents - and make no mistake, that has
been the central function of schools since John Cotton announced
it as the purpose of the Bay Colony schools in 1650 and Horace
Mann announced it as the purpose of Massachusetts schools in
1850 - we're going to continue to have the horror show we have
right now.
This philosophy of removing parents from guiding the

education and development of their children is nothing new. The
Luciferian plan for a New World Order follows the
Communist/Socialist blueprint adhered to by the likes of Lenin
during the soviet era. In fact, Lenin is renowned for saying ‘destroy
the family and you destroy society’. This is highlighted in an article
titled ‘The Planned Destruction of the Family’ from
gillistriplett.com, which says:
The things we are facing today: the high divorce rate, the rash
number of unwed single mothers, the hordes of illegitimate
children, homosexuality and lesbianism, sexual perversion and the
alarming high number of abortions is not some new phenomenon.
It is an ingenious plot that has been in force for decades…
designed to annihilate the family structure.
Lenin merely repeated what Socrates had said and what Friedrich
Engels and Karl Marx put into words. Lenin set out to do just that,
hoping that a new society -- with the State as the ultimate father --
could be constructed.
Not only do young children have to face a rapidly changing

society with diminishing moral values, at school they are now
purposely confronted with the perverse nature of gender neutrality
and the promotion of anything other than natural heterosexuality.
Whether being forced to share gender neutral toilets or being
184
indoctrinated by visiting groups of transsexuals dressed up as

demonic drag queens, it is no wonder why they will end up on
some form of pharmaceutical drug later in life. It is a complete
breakdown of the family upbringing that used to provide the
ethical backbone to society. At the same time young girls are taught
how to be strong and independent, while boys are feminised and
put down for displaying natural strength of character. All of this
early learning feeds in to the plan of reducing the numbers of
marriages, therefore reducing the number of children born and
negatively affecting their quality of upbringing in a stable family
home.
Referring back to chapter one of this book, it should now be
apparent why no reader would have learnt about Khazaria in their
school history lessons. One of the most influential regions of power
in modern history and more importantly the historical origin of
most, if not all of the Luciferian bloodlines that form the top of the
pyramid of power. This is one very simple example of how the
national curriculum has and continues to be manipulated to
forward the agenda of programming the masses in preparation for
a life of servitude at the hands of an ever-increasingly powerful
elite. A famous citation from William Churchill is that ‘history is
written by the victors’. Even before Churchill’s rise to fame, in 1926
Major General Cherep-Spiridovich highlighted the fact that what
we are taught about history has been falsified. In his book, ‘The
Secret World Government’, it says:
Men of genius, such as Voltaire, Napoleon, Lamartine, Henry

Ford, have warned us that history is ‘untrue,’ still it seems that,
with the exception perhaps of Washington Irving and the
President Emeritus of Leland University, Dr. Starr Jordan, nobody
has demanded that ‘History be rewritten and revised’, thus to
185
expose the organisers of all wars. On the contrary, when Mr Henry

Ford placed incontrovertible facts, bearing on the causes of the
world’s unrest, before the public, newspapers generally trampled
upon his words and endeavoured to discredit him.
In this case, it seems that the Luciferian Khazars have purposely

written out of the history books their true origin, because that fact
alone would totally expose their current agenda. It would neutralise
their strategic use of the term anti-Semitism, question the Balfour
Declaration that brought about the destruction of Palestine and
reveal all the other historical omissions and falsities that we have
been force-fed by the education system.
Another important aspect of school education is that the
Luciferian plot for a New World Order also requires the
destruction of all monotheistic religion. Therefore, any reference to
a single God creator is increasingly being removed from the
education presented in schools and replaced with a gradual
introduction to the New Age philosophy. This has been brought
about by a hidden agenda known as Global Education, and is
explained in an article by Steve Deckard, ED.D., titled ‘The New
Age and Global Education’ (1st October, 1992):
Proponents of Global Education often disguise it by using a variety

of other names: multicultural education, international curriculum
development, international studies, cultural awareness, futurism,
Project 2000, Welcome to Planet Earth, and World Core
Curriculum.
By undermining cultural, religious, national, and economic
distinction, the stage is being set for the alternative of a synthetic,
unified system. For example, Global Education proponents are
calling for a world religion under the authority of a one-world
government. This new world religion is envisioned as a synthesis of
186
Christian ethics and Eastern Mysticism, in which the task of re-

ordering our traditional values and institutions is given over to our
public schools.
Two scientists who are calling for such a paradigm shift are marine
biologist James Lovelock and microbiologist Lynn Margulis. Both
strongly advocate the so-called Gaia Hypothesis (Gaia was the
Greek goddess of the earth—‘Mother Earth,’ so to speak). This
mystical Gaia Hypothesis assumes that the earth is actually a living
entity and humanity is a vital part of its life system.
This will be discussed further in later chapters that investigate

further the New Age, one-world religion and the environmental
bandwagon currently being fronted by the child pawn Greta
Thunberg. It’s time to summarise this chapter with one very simple
quote from what some may argue to be one of the brightest minds
of modern times, others a well-marketed fraud, Albert Einstein:
Education is what remains after one has forgotten what one has
learned in school.
187
Chapter thirteen
Mainstream Media Propaganda
After reading the previous chapter, it is hard to argue against

the fact that the education system provided for the children of the
bewildered herd, amounts to what is effectively years of social
conditioning, preparing them for a life of servitude in a lowly job.
A few manage to break that conditioning later in life but for the
rest, there is a continued assault on their minds of which they are
probably not even aware. A person’s whole view of the world or
knowledge of what is happening is continuously being moulded
and directed to follow a pre-planned agenda. This is portrayed
collectively and in a unified way by what is known as the
mainstream media. Even centuries ago, when the mainstream
media principally consisted of the daily newspaper, this fact was
known by those in power. To give one example, Thomas Jefferson
said in 1807:
Nothing can be believed which is seen in a newspaper. Truth itself

becomes suspicious by being put into that polluted vehicle. The
real extent of this state of misinformation is known only to those
who are in situations to confront facts within their knowledge with
the lies of the day. I really look with commiseration over the great
188
body of my fellow citizens, who, when reading newspapers, live

and die in the belief that they have known something of what has
been passing in the world. The man who never looks into a
newspaper is better informed than he who reads them; inasmuch
as he knows nothing is nearer to truth than he whose mind is
filled with falsehoods and errors.
In 1946, former British Foreign Minister Ernest Bevin

confirmed this insider knowledge of what newspapers are really for,
when at the London Conference of Foreign Ministers in 1946 he
said:
A newspaper has three things to do. One is to amuse, another to

entertain, and the rest is to mislead.
Although formerly relying on newspapers and magazines to

manipulate the masses, this has now been surpassed by access to
the internet. However, still the most important of all means of
social conditioning and brain-washing by the mainstream media, is
television. This is expressed in great detail in the fantastic book by
Daniel Estulin, ‘Tavistock Institute – Social Engineering the
Masses’. Taking extracts from this book, it says:
The slyest form of control is making people think they are free
while having someone manipulate their every move….. The biggest
hypnotist in the world is an oblong box in the corner of the room
that tells people what to believe. Television, with its reach into
everyone’s home, creates the basis for mass brainwashing of
citizens….. You may not realise it, yet, but your mind is being
shaped and moulded every time you turn the one-eyed baby sitter
on.
When you watch TV, the right hemisphere is twice as active as the
left, which in itself is a neurological anomaly. The crossover from
189
left to right releases a surge of the body’s natural opiates….. Your

television works as a high-tech drug delivery system, and we all feel
its effects.
For the brainwashers in charge of this societal transformation, they
have pulled off the ultimate trick. They were able to persuade
people that what they can see with their eyes is what there is to see.
Subsequently, people will laugh in your face when you try to
explain to them the bigger picture and the unseen reality behind
the curtain.
Television provided an ideal means to create a homogenous
culture, a mass culture, through which popular opinion could be
shaped and controlled, so that everyone in the country would
think the same.
Linked to how a society is manipulated into the same group

thought, Edward Bernays the nephew of psychologist Sigmund
Freud is famous for saying:
The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organised

habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in
democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism
of society constitute an invisible government which is the true
ruling power. We are governed, our minds are moulded, our tastes
formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard
of.
This same principle, involving the use of television as the

propaganda tool, is re-iterated by CFR member and co-founder of
the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski. In his book, ‘Out
of Control – Global Turmoil on the Eve of the 21st Century’
(1993), it says:
190
Television gives a young viewer a first glimpse of the outside world.

It first defines – and does so compellingly by combining the visual
and audio impact – the meaning of the good life. It sets the
standard of what is to be considered achievement, fulfilment, good
taste, and proper conduct. It conditions desires, defines aspirations
and expectations, and draws the line between acceptable and
unacceptable behaviour. With audiences around the world
increasingly glued to television sets, there is nothing comparable,
either in the era of enforced religious orthodoxy or even at the
high point of totalitarian indoctrination, to the social and
philosophical conditioning that television exercises on its viewers.
In a rare analysis of the effects caused by watching television, the

book ‘Four Arguments for the Elimination of Television’ provides
an interesting insight. Author Jerry Mander explains:
While you are watching television, in addition to the non-

movement of the eyeball, there is a parallel freezing of the focusing
mechanism. The eye remains at a fixed distance from the object
observed for a longer period of time than in any other human
experience! ….The result is to flatten all information into one
dimension and to put the viewer in a condition akin to
unconscious staring …. Sound is reduced to extremely narrow
ranges of television audio, while smell, taste and touch are
eliminated altogether.
Mander then goes on to explain how the experience of watching

television has the profound effect of separating people from their
environment, thus opening them up to suggestion. This is how
television has become the principle tool, for what is effectively
brainwashing of the masses, without them even realising it.
191
If you control environment carefully enough, and confine human

experience totally enough, you can shatter all human grounding.
This leaves the subject in such a disconnected state. You can easily
predict and control how he or she will respond to the addition of
only one of two stimuli. These are, in effect, mass sense-
deprivation experiments. They leave people floating without
connections, their minds separated from their bodies, open to any
kind of arbitrary logic.
Television isolates people from the environment, from each other,
and from their own senses…. Television does what the
schizophrenic fantasy says it does. It places in our minds images of
realities which are outside our experience.
Irrespective of whether people get most of their information

and news from television, newspapers or online versions of both,
the most important aspect to understand is that the content
presented by the mainstream media has been determined by the
same controlling hand of the Luciferian elite middle-men. In the
same manner that just a handful of global corporations control the
food, water and pharmaceutical industries, the same applies to the
mainstream media. Once again, these mega-companies form the
same network linked to the Committee of 300 and recruit their
Chief Editors and CEOs from within the ranks of the various
secret societies. Highlighting this point is a well-documented
speech made by David Rockefeller in June 1991 at the secretive
meeting of the Bilderberg group in Baden, Germany. He
revealingly said:
We are grateful to the Washington Post, the New York Times,

Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have
attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion
for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to
192
develop our plan for the world if we had been subjected to the
lights of publicity during these years. But the world is more
sophisticated and prepared to march toward a world government.
The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world
bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination
practised in past centuries.
Even well before this revelation, Theodor Herzl, co-founder of

Zionism, confirmed this control over the mainstream media in a
speech at the World Zionist Congress in Basel, Switzerland (1897):
With a few exceptions that do not figure at all, the entire press of
the world is in our hands.
Before identifying the small number of companies that control

almost all of the mainstream media, it is interesting to relate this
back to the historical plot to control the world. One of the original
blueprints for this plot, as previously mentioned, is found in the
‘Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion’. The first appearance in
print of these well-detailed instructions was in 1864. Proving their
authenticity, the contents have almost unanimously come to pass
and provide the current state the world finds itself in. Taking an
example from Protocols 7:5, it says:
We must compel the government of the goyim to take action in

the direction favoured by our widely conceived plan, already
approaching the desired consummation, by what we shall
represent as public opinion, secretly promoted by us through the
means of that so-called Great Power – the press, which, with a few
exceptions that may be disregarded, is already entirely in our
hands.
Not a single government will reach the public without our control.
Even now this is already being attained inasmuch as all news items
193
are received by a few agencies. These agencies will then be already

entirely ours and will give publicity only to what we dictate to
them.
Fast-forward back to the present and the tight control that just a
handful of globalist corporations have over almost everything we
read or view in the mainstream media is undeniable. In an article
titled ‘The World's Ten Largest Media Conglomerates’ (2nd July,
2013), author Joseph Milord writes:
With media oversight being taken for granted in recent years,

media concentration has been a trend that's been rolling along
with few signs of stopping. As a result, many of your favourite
media entities have been consolidated and all work under the same
umbrella corporation. If you think, for example, one channel
offers better content than the other, you might be surprised to
learn that you've stuck with the same company and are just now
loyal to another one of its assets.
When relating this narrow sphere of control of the media in

America, it is well documented that just six corporations control
well over ninety-percent of all mainstream media outlets. This is
explained in an article from webfx.com titled, ‘The Six Companies
That Own (Almost) All Media’:
In modern America, it feels like you have an unlimited variety of

entertainment and media options right at your fingertips…. But
while it may seem like you have limitless options, most of the
media you consume is owned by one of six companies…. (National
Amusements, Disney, Time Warner, Comcast, News Corp and
Sony).
Media in this context does not refer just to news outlets — it refers
to any medium that controls the distribution of information. So
194
here, ‘media’ includes twenty-four-hour news stations, newspapers,

publishing houses, internet utilities, and even video game
developers.
For perspective, if these six companies were a country, they would
be the twenty-sixth wealthiest country in the world by GDP
between Poland ($467 billion) and Nigeria ($415 billion).
As regards the mainstream media in the UK, a publication from

the Media Reform Coalition titled ‘Who Owns the UK Media’
reveals that:
Six companies account for over eighty-percent of local newspaper

titles, more than four times the combined number of titles
published by the remaining fifty-six publishers – and eighty-five-
percent of revenue.
Two conglomerates, Bauer and Global Radio, have nearly forty-
percent of all commercial local analogue radio licences while only
fourteen-percent of stations are independently owned. These same
two companies control two-thirds of all commercial digital
stations.
Increasingly, traditional media industries are being supplanted by
large, usually US-based, digital intermediaries – companies such as
Google, Facebook, Apple and Amazon. Though not traditionally
content creators (although increasing moves are being made in
that direction) these companies have leveraged their access to
personal data or control over digital platforms to become
dominant in key areas (Google in search, Facebook in social
media, etc).
We believe that concentration within news and information

markets in particular has reached endemic levels in the UK and
that we urgently need effective remedies. This kind of
concentration creates conditions in which wealthy individuals and
195
organisations can amass huge political and economic power and

distort the media landscape to suit their interests and personal
views.
A simple example of how the mainstream media operates with

collusion directed from above is more than apparent by looking at
what is known as the ‘news’. When turning on the television to
view the evening news from a preferred channel, it is almost
unanimously the same five stories that are presented by every other
channel. That, in itself, should ring alarm bells. However, most
people ignore the impossibility that those five stories have
individually been found, by all networks, to be the most important
issues of the day. Seldom does anyone question that out of
thousands of potential national and international events, there is
never a wider selection of stories offering more interest or
expanding the information available to the viewer. This is where
the Tavistock Institute plays an overseeing role to control the
propaganda that all mainstream media outlets propagates on a daily
basis. Referring to this controlled agenda, also evident in the
principle American networks, Eustace Mullins writes the following
in ‘Who Owns the TV Networks?’:
Although the three networks are supposedly in bloodthirsty

competition with each other, viewing of the daily evening news
programs reveals that each of the competing networks shows
exactly the same items of news each evening, usually in the same
order. Almost all of the ‘news’ stories are propaganda items
intended to further current World Order goals. The only
variations permitted in the iron control over network TV news is
the final item, which is a ‘human interest’ story. It usually praises a
child who has collected considerable sums of money for UNICEF,
or some other World Order operation.
196
Because of continuous Tavistock Institute - British Army Institute

of Psychological Warfare control over the major television
networks in the United States, ABC, CBS, and NBC present many
programs heavily slanted in favour of psychiatry. They also
emphasize the current ‘liberal’ preoccupation with racial
integration, …. sports programs, and jiggle shows.
One quite astonishing example that has recently been used to

demonstrate such blatant manipulation of the media is a collage of
newsreaders from dozens of channels owned by the Sinclair
Broadcast Group. A video available online shows each newsreader
reading from exactly the same script, right down to the precise
words used by all of the other newsreaders. This episode is
explained in an article by Annabelle Bamforth titled ‘Mainstream
Media Propaganda – Extremely Dangerous to Our Democracy’:
Last week, millions of viewers across the country were subjected

not only to a statement concerning ‘fake news’ eerily repeated
verbatim by dozens of local television stations across the country,
but also to reports uncovering the fact that those stations had been
instructed to recite this statement…. The statement reported by
CNN was crafted by Sinclair Broadcast Group, the biggest owner
of television stations in the United States.
Not only does this reveal how the mainstream media acts as a
unified means of propaganda but the content of the statement in
question has the audacity to try to conceal this fact. Across all the
networks the talking heads recited: ‘Unfortunately, some members of
the media use their platforms to push their own personal bias and agenda
to control ‘exactly what people think’… This is extremely dangerous to our
democracy.’ It’s as if the media controllers have such contempt for
the bewildered herd that they think they will believe anything that
197
appears on their TV screen. Unfortunately, maybe they are right. It

does beg the question why people still fall for such propaganda and
also why they still watch television.
Referring back to the point raised by Eustace Mullins, behind
the curtain of all mainstream media the content presented to the
public is controlled higher up by the little-known Tavistock
Institute. Originally the headquarters of the British Army’s
Psychological Warfare Bureau during the Second World War, it
has now grown into the world’s centre for brainwashing and social
engineering activities. According to Daniel Estulin:
In order quickly to learn as much as possible, they assigned

psychiatrists, scientists and medical professionals to the task of
finding out how the mind, and specifically memory, works. In
doing so, they came across occult practices, demonstrations of
psychic abilities, and the mind control techniques of yogis,
shamans and witch doctors…. In this, Tavistock, the world’s
premier brainwashing institute, was unwittingly following in the
steps of magicians, sorcerers, gurus and cultists the world over.
After the war, with new psychological insight acquired from

how the Nazis used mind controlling techniques, thousands of
German scientists and psychiatrists were secretly brought to the
West under what is known as ‘Operation Paperclip’. Continuing
their research into manipulating the minds of the masses, Daniel
Estulin continues:
The brainwashers at such places as Tavistock Institute were already

secretly working behind the scenes on a new and far more
powerful brainwashing tool – television, to help them organise
their fascist ‘superstate’ without the now socially unacceptable Nazi
superstructure.
198
How many people actually understand this? How many people

realise that the majority’s perception of reality, especially in
political arenas, is not their own? It is shrewdly manipulated and
imposed upon them by the Men behind the Curtain. Many
certainly do not and brainwashing has a lot to do with it.
All television has a dissociative effect on mental capabilities,
making people less able to think rationally…. Tavistock recognised
that habituated television watching destroys the ability of a person
for critical cognitive activity. In other words, it makes you stupid.
Not only is it the psychological arm of the British Military that

dictates the mainstream media, the security services also play a vital
role. It is a well-known fact that many newsreaders or presenters
have been formerly trained by the CIA in America or by the secret
services in the UK. Not only are some newsreaders actively
members of the security services but many of the stories,
documentaries and films receive direct input from the intelligence
agencies. This is revealed in an article titled ‘Declassified CIA
Documents Show Agency’s Control over Mainstream Media &
Academia’ by Arjun Walia (11th May, 2017):
A declassified document from the CIA archives in the form of a

letter from a CIA task force addressed to the Director of the
Central Intelligence Agency details the close relationship that
exists between the CIA and mainstream media and academia.
The document states that the CIA task force ‘now has
relationships with reporters from every major wire service,
newspaper, news weekly, and television network in the nation,’ ….
Furthermore, it explains how the agency has ‘persuaded reporters
to postpone, change, hold, or even scrap stories that could have
adversely affected national security interests or jeopardized sources
and methods.’
199
A good example of such intrusion by the CIA is known as

‘Operation Mockingbird’, which was set up by Frank Wisner in
1948 to directly influence the mainstream media in America. In
‘Mockingbird: The Subversion of the Free Press by the CIA’ by
Alex Constantine, he says that ‘some 3,000 salaried and contract CIA
employees were actually engaged in propaganda efforts’. Furthermore, in
an investigation in 1975 (Select Committee to Study
Governmental Operations with Respect to Intelligence Activities),
it was reported by Congress that:
The CIA currently maintains a network of several hundred foreign

individuals around the world who provide intelligence for the CIA
and at times attempt to influence opinion through the use of
covert propaganda. These individuals provide the CIA with direct
access to a large number of newspapers and periodicals, scores of
press services and news agencies, radio and television stations,
commercial book publishers, and other foreign media outlets.
Similar stories of secret service influence over the mainstream

media, more recently come from Germany. Former journalist Dr.
Udo Ulfkotte revealed that he was trained by the BND, the
German intelligence service and often collaborated with the CIA,
MI6, and Mossad. As a journalist he became a war correspondent
in Afghanistan, Libya, Iraq, Iran and elsewhere in the Middle East.
In an interview with the American Free Press, under the title
‘Reporter Admits Most Media Work for CIA, MI6, Mossad’ (26th
October, 2014), Ulfkotte said:
I’ve been a journalist for about twenty-five years, and I’ve been
educated to lie, to betray—and not to tell the truth to the public. . .
The German and American media [is trying] to bring war to the
people in Europe, to bring war to Russia. This is a point of no
200
return, and I am going to stand up and say it is not right what I

have done in the past, to manipulate people, to make propaganda
against Russia, and it is not right what my colleagues do, and have
done in the past, because they are bribed to betray the people not
only in Germany, but all over Europe. . . . I am very fearful of a
new war in Europe, and I don’t [want to see] this situation again.
There are always people who push for war, and this is not only
politicians, it is journalists too. We have betrayed our readers. I’m
fed up with this propaganda.
Taking all these factors into consideration, it is not surprising to

reveal that mainstream media is, first and foremost, a channel for
social conditioning the masses by way of nothing other than
propaganda. Former CIA Director William Casey summed up this
point quite accurately when in 1981 he said:
We’ll know when our disinformation program is complete when

everything the American public believes is false.
People are waking up in their masses to the false propaganda

spewed out on a twenty-four hour basis by the mainstream media.
This has brought about a more questioning section of society,
those that do not immediately believe everything they hear, just
because it was presented on a TV screen. This growing number of
truth-seekers use their intuition and desire to know the truth, by
researching for alternative sources of information from a wider
background. However, the Luciferians pre-empted this, knowing it
would happen back in the 1800s when the Protocols were written.
To counter this search for the truth, not only do they control the
mainstream media but they also use their fortunes to purchase and
promote a controlled opposition within the alternative media
industry. Protocols 12: 11-12 states:
201
There would even be false opposition press that present what looks
like the very antipodes to us. Our real opponents at heart will
accept this simulated opposition as their own and will show us
their cards. All our newspapers will be of all possible complexions
– aristocratic, republican, revolutionary, even anarchical …. These
fools who think they are repeating the opinion of a newspaper of
their own camp will be repeating our opinion.
Known as shills, such people clandestinely pretend to represent

the alternative media but in reality are just gate-keepers guarding
the true agenda on behalf of their Luciferian masters. Wikipedia
describes:
A shill, also called a plant or a stooge, is a person who publicly

helps or gives credibility to a person or organization without
disclosing that they have a close relationship with the person or
organization. Shills can carry out their operations in the areas of
media, journalism, marketing, politics, confidence games, or other
business areas. A shill may also act to discredit opponents or critics
of the person or organization in which they have a vested interest
through character assassination or other means.
This is one of the pitfalls that many truth-seekers fall down

while venturing into the world of alternative media, only to come
across one of the most well-financed or vocal presenters of what on
the surface seems to counter the mainstream propaganda. A classic
example is that of Alex Jones from Infowars. A loud-mouth ranting
stooge for the Luciferians, he is easily given away because he never
questions the real perpetrators of the 11th September false flag
attack in 2001, and never associates Israel or the Zionists with
anything negative.
202
After years researching to find the truth, a person’s level of

discernment improves and the shills are usually identifiable by
their actions, or maybe lack of them. However, there are also
outspoken critics of the New World Order who entice people in by
revealing a large proportion of the truth, only to use this as bait to
lure them into some form of New Age belief system. David Icke is a
well-known example. Originally calling out the hidden hand to be
from an alien reptilian source, he then moved on to the Jesuits and
is currently attacking the Sabbatean Frankists. Always with some
truth embedded in his message, it is not surprising that he has
never arrived at the true conclusion, that it is the Luciferians which
hold the strings of power. This is because, whether unwittingly or
not, David Icke promotes a Luciferian New Age agenda. The
second half of his website and all his waffling books lead to a New
Age philosophy, usually dressed up as some form of cosmic one-
ness, or in simple terms, the same Masonic, Cabbalistic belief
system and ideology.
This is explained in an article by Stephen Creaney titled, ‘The
Fake Truth Movement (Shills) Exposed’:
All these people provide twenty-five-percent truths and seventy-five-

percent distorted information and lies and then once gained your
trust, take you off in the wrong direction with nonsense such as
shape-shifting reptilians, crop circles, big foot, UFOs, lock-ness
monster, etc. These are fabricated nonsense which should be
avoided.
Julian Assange is a CIA/NSA operative they have used since day
one under their Mk-ultra and Project Mockingbird to control the
masses with ‘controlled opposition’ just like Alex Jones, David
Icke, Mark Dice, Jessie Ventura, Joe Rogan and the rest of the co-
203
intel pro crews. Wikileaks is a CIA operation using NSA operatives

like Edward Snowden and military assets.
To finalise this chapter, the following is an extract from a

genuine truth-seeking website that specialises in the subliminal
influences hidden within the mass media that we are exposed to
every day. The following quote is from vigilantcitizen.com titled
‘How Mass Media Shapes and Moulds Society’ (28th April, 2010):
A single piece of media often does not have a lasting effect on the
human psyche. Mass media, however, by its omnipresent nature,
creates a living environment we evolve in on a daily basis. It
defines the norm and excludes the undesirable. The same way
carriage horses wear blinders so they can only see what is right in
front of them, the masses can only see where they are supposed to
go.
Lippmann, Bernays, and Lasswell have all declared that the public
is not fit to decide their own fate, which is the inherent goal of
democracy. Instead, they called for a cryptocracy, a hidden
government, a ruling class in charge of the ‘bewildered herd.’ As
their ideas continue to be applied to society, it is increasingly
apparent that an ignorant population is not an obstacle that the
rulers must deal with; it is something that is desirable and, indeed,
necessary, to ensure total leadership. An ignorant population does
not know its rights, does not seek a greater understanding of issues
and does not question authorities. It simply follows trends.
Popular culture caters to and nurtures ignorance by continually
serving up brain-numbing entertainment and spotlighting
degenerate celebrities to be idolized.
How sad it is to say that these words ring so true for most
people in society today. So long as people walk around glued to
204
their smart phones or sit hypnotised in front of a television screen,

while absorbing the disinformation presented by the mainstream
media then the social engineering and brain-washing can only get
worse. But then again, that is exactly what the Luciferian elite
planned centuries ago and are now undertaking with very little
resistance. To close this chapter, this subtle takeover of our minds
is summarised by insider, Henry Kissinger:
It is not a matter of what is true that counts, but a matter of what

is perceived to be true.
205
Chapter fourteen
The Film Industry
It has been demonstrated how the media that we are exposed to

in the modern, inter-connected world is controlled and
manipulated, to continually feed us a twenty-four hour supply of
what is effectively, propaganda. Although the television screen
plays an important role in the dissemination of the same message
directly into the homes of the viewer, the influence from an ever-
increasing reliance on screen-time does not stop there. In addition
to receiving our knowledge of what is going on in the world from
the so-called ‘news’, the continual social engineering and influence
on the human psyche is also the secret role of the film industry.
Most people will probably not even be aware of the esoteric or
hidden meanings behind the scripts, symbols or subliminal content
within most Hollywood movies and films in general. The story
lines are purposely selected to prepare the masses for the future
direction of the world, in which the Luciferians have planned.
Whether to prepare them for a technocratic modern world,
introducing the idea of massive world-wide disaster or to assist in
the break-up of the family unit, sexualising children and
206
normalising unethical behaviour, films are not just simply to

entertain. Referring back to the opening quote from the ‘Matrix’ in
the introduction to this book, author Isaac Weishaupt describes
the influence of the movie in his revealing book ‘The Dark Path’:
The Matrix shows the dangers of the advent of artificial

intelligence on a terrifying scale; yet companies like Facebook and
Google are actively pursuing it because consumers are seeking
these increases in computational speed…. It shows us the digital
world of deception (the Matrix) of which most of us will subscribe
to one day. The slippery slope of technology promises to achieve
pervasive high technology through proven laws such as Moore’s
Law which proves that computing speed is increasing at an
exponential rate of which our minds aren’t capable of foreseeing….
It’s as if they are showing us the dangers inherent in our ways in
order to absolve themselves of wrong doing, which is one of the
theories for predictive programming’s purpose….
It is a way of warning us of the future such that it will be our own
fault for going along with the destruction of the old way of living
in a sort of ‘Faustian bargain’ contract.
The technique known as predictive programming is a means of

subliminally conditioning the mind of the viewer and is purposely
embedded within movies to prepare them for the historical plan
for a New World Order. Taking just one example, in the Matrix
there is a quick shot of Neo’s passport. Astonishingly, and beyond
any logical coincidence, his passport just happens to expire on
September 11th 2001! Weishaupt goes on to explain:
The predictive programming’s purpose is to condition society for

the upcoming changes that they seek to bring about. They believe
they are doing us a favour while also fulfilling their role as guiding
forces in the evolution of consciousness.
207
The Illuminati want certain thoughts, themes and beliefs to be

instilled into our minds and subconscious in order to one day
achieve the goals they seek. They want to create a culture that
adheres to the ways of the occult, effectively making it no longer
‘hidden’!
Another way to look at this is to think of it in the same way as

someone giving a presentation. It is common practice for the
speaker to first inform the audience of what is going to be talked
about, or to happen later on. Then, the listeners are given the
message via the presentation and finally receive what they are told
they would. In the same manner, movies present knowledge or
expectance of a future world environment which mimics the
depraved Luciferian ideology. As exposure to such movies increases
over time, so does the conditioning of the individual,
subconsciously preparing them for the acceptance of being ruled
over by a tyrannical elite, as determined in the historical plot for a
New World Order.
Not only is predictive programming used in films to nurture the
mind of the audience, it is often secretly input in movie scenes or
music videos so as to reveal future planned events. This somewhat
bizarre idea reverts back to the occult belief that by exposing a
planned future attack or incident in advance, the likelihood of
success is increased and the perpetrators are absolved of any guilt.
A listing from rationalwiki.org, titled ‘Predictive Programming’
states that:
When conspirators plan a false flag operation, they hide references

to it in the popular media before the atrocity takes place; when the
event occurs, the public has softened up, and therefore passively
accepts it rather than offering resistance or opposition.
208
To understand this concept it is easier to give some examples.

Taking the movie ‘Batman: Dark Knight Rises’, not only is the
modern Batman progressively becoming a much more sinister, evil
looking character, this film in particular happened to be shown
during the mass shooting that took place in the cinema in Aurora,
Colorado. Just before the release of this movie, the music video
‘My Homies’ by Lil Wayne and Big Sean somewhat predicted the
shooting scene by showing concealed images of Batman and the
Joker, as well as displaying a cinema full of skeletons. Coincidence
or not, in this video were twelve skeletons sat in cinema seats, the
same number of people killed in the Aurora movie theatre. To add
to this, in the Batman movie itself the word ‘Aurora’ can be seen
on a building in one of the scenes. Interestingly, the word aurora
represents dawn, or the morning star, which is an analogy of
Lucifer or Venus, two components of the pagan-occult agenda. If
the reader dismisses this as just coincidence, then also in the
Batman movie is a scene where a man points to a map of Gotham
City. As an extremely bizarre occurrence and completely irrelevant
to the Batman movie, the name ‘Sandy Hook’ is indicated as the
only other place name on the map; the exact same little town
where another mass shooting took place a few months later.
Adjacent to the name Sandy Hook it is also written ‘Strike Zone 1,
GDP Response Time, Rally Points and Checkpoint:
Bridge/Tunnels’ as if providing information for those in the know.
Furthermore, just one year before the Sandy Hook shooting spree,
supposedly by a lone, psychotic gunman, the release of the film
‘Dream House’, revealed signs of predictive programming. In one
scene a business card is seen with the details of a psychiatrist from
the tiny town of Sandy Hook, hence providing the link between
209
this previously unknown town and the mental illness of the

shooter.
Although the notion of false flag ‘terrorist’ attacks will be
discussed in a later chapter, so as to understand why a film would
reveal future planned events it may be useful to summarise the
term quickly. A false flag is a naval term originally used when
undertaking a military operation that pretends to have been carried
out by another group or party, thus rendering the others looking
guilty and therefore providing a reason for retaliation. This is
exactly what happens, arguably, with all so-called ‘terrorist’ attacks.
A mercenary group consisting of members of the security services
or those trained by Mossad, the CIA and MI6, carry out acts of
terror so as to pass the blame on to various bogeyman Islamic
networks. The controlled media then repeats this narrative twenty-
four-seven to condition the minds of the public into accepting a
retaliatory attack on any Muslim or Islamic country they so wish to
advance their agenda. By proving fore-knowledge of such an event
in a film, this already subliminally prepares the masses to accept
what is going to happen and in the minds of the occult Luciferians,
they believe it will increase the likelihood of success in carrying out
the atrocity.
This leads on to another example of predictive programming,
namely the worst known terrorist attack of recent times, the
destruction of the World Trade Centre on 11th September, 2001.
This example provides a look at how a future terrorist attack was
predicted in various media productions before the event. It has
nothing to do with psychic knowledge but rather, reveals that the
hidden hand which controls the media industry also has links, or is
in fact one-and-the-same as the perpetrators of, what has
numerological occult significance, 9/11. In an episode of the
210
‘Simpsons’ in 1997, in other words before the terrorist attack, it

shows Bart holding up a magazine. Displayed very clearly on the
front cover, is the title NEW YORK and the numbers 911, as
represented by a $9 sign with the twin towers in the background.
Bart is holding up a bundle of cartoon money in front of the
magazine that looks similar to dollars. However, on closer
inspection, the money consists of two parallel lines which resemble
two pillars or towers. When overlapping this cartoon money with
the ‘Masonic Tracing Board’, they are found to be identical.
Furthermore, in a sequel of the ‘Terminator’ movie, Arnold
Schwarzenegger is seen riding his motorbike towards a bridge with
the bad guy chasing him in a truck. Just before passing under the
bridge, the scene clearly shows the height marked on the front of
the bridge as CAUTION 9’-11”. Why this is not indicated as ‘10ft’
is already an anomaly that does not occur on other bridges. More
interestingly, when looking at a photo before the filming, the
height does not seem to even exist, it simply reads ‘CAUTION’. In
addition, a pointless central column in the bridge divides the view
of the exit into two and therefore provides two rectangular exit
ways which also resemble the rectangular outline of the twin
towers. Immediately afterwards in the next scene, the truck chasing
Arnie crashes into the bridge causing a huge fireball and explosion,
very similar to that seen on 9/11.
In the film ‘Super Mario Brothers’, the twin towers are shown
crumbling into a dust cloud and in ‘The Lone Gunmen’, a
weapons manufacturer tries to demolish the World Trade Center
by means of remote-controlled aircraft that have been hijacked.
Taken individually, it could be argued that these subtle additions
to movie scenes may well be coincidence. However, when viewed
together they seem to reveal a common pattern of predictive
211
programming. If the reader is still not convinced, then referring

back to the ‘Matrix’ movie, in one scene Thomas Anderson’s
passport just happens to expire on 11th September, 2001. Imagine
the statistical coincidence of that!
To see this last point from an esoteric or occult Luciferian point
of view, Isaac Weishaupt explains the possible link between the
name Thomas Anderson and the expiry of the passport, stating
that:
He is alchemically transforming just like the rest of the planet

when everyone said ‘the world changed on 9/11.’ In the sequence
of events in the Illuminati’s evolution of consciousness they
believe they are to transition us from the time period of patriarchy
and male dominated society to one of technology and individual
freedoms. This timeframe is also referred to as Aleister Crowley’s
Aeon of Horus, the age of the crowned and conquering child. In
fact, in Hebrew, Thomas means ‘twin’ while Anderson derives
from the Greek word for ‘Andreas’ or ‘manly’ so it’s not that far of
a stretch to compare the evolution of man’s consciousness through
the twin towers collapse which destroyed the age of patriarchy.
In addition to planting foreknowledge of a future event, many

films are also created to gradually normalise the Luciferian occult
belief system in society. Directors with inside knowledge of the
Luciferian hierarchy, or those with an understanding of occult
rituals and symbols, often rise to be leaders in the industry. One
such famous film director is Stanley Kubrick, known for films such
as ‘Spartacus’, ‘A Clockwork Orange’, ‘2001: A Space Odyssey’ and
‘The Shining’. However, his last film before his death, ‘Eyes Wide
Shut’, revealed perhaps more esoteric knowledge than his masters
had hoped for, including the notion of ritual initiation found in all
secret societies. Filmed in one of the Rothschild’s stately homes,
212
Mentmore Towers, another step too far for Kubrick may have been
a scene that showed a close-up of the Rothschild insignia of a two-
headed eagle carved into the back of the throne being sat on by the
head of the occult ritual. A greater insight comes from the book
‘Esoteric Hollywood’ by Jay Dyer, in which it describes the
director’s thought process throughout the movie:
Kubrick wants viewers to realise that reality is run, like a show, by

the show-masters behind the veil of the videodrome…. It functions
as an initiation mirroring the desire of the individual to both pass
judgement on the taboos contained in the film, while
simultaneously attending its showing. One is, in a sense,
participating in the ritual, even if afar through the magic of the
screen…. While most viewers of the film focused on socio-political
factors, none have considered the initiatory aspects as a framework
of interpretation.
The film’s narrative shares a pre-occupation with sex rites,
initiation and ultimately the issue of the dissolution of the moral
strictures of the middle-class (Harfords) as they pass beyond the
gates of inhibition.
As can be seen in the poster for the film, mirrors are consistently
present, classic symbols of the inner world of the psyche, as well as
portals to other worlds. Kubrick intends, I think, to show us that
the characters in the film are mirrors of each other, as well as
mirrors of the viewing audience. The symbolism of mirrors also
occurs in ‘Alice in Wonderland’, as well as ‘The Wizard of Oz’ and
both figure prominently in ‘Eyes Wide Shut.’
Throughout the film the viewers’ eyes are wide shut to the reality
of the power structure, just as Kidman and Cruise’s characters,
until the end, with veil removed and eyes ‘opened’, as they state.
The viewer is also being led about, entering between the pillars
from the vantage point of the viewing camera, penetrating the
‘mysteries’, to peer into how the cryptocracy governs from the
213
shadows (yet paradoxically, Kubrick intends us to understand that

most eyes will remain shut).
Stanley Kubrick died of a supposed heart-attack just after the

completion of this, his last movie. However, some observers believe
he over-stepped the mark by revealing too much inside knowledge
of Luciferian rituals and ultimately paid the price with his life; a
warning to others. This sentiment is expressed in an online article
by Alanna Ketler (25th July, 2018) titled ‘Was Stanley Kubrick
Telling Us Something With His 1999 Film ‘Eyes Wide Shut?’
Eyes Wide Shut was a controversial film that was screened just
days before Stanley Kubrick's untimely death. The film is full of
symbolism, showing an elite party that is eerily similar to photos
that surfaced from a real elite masquerade party.
This film was Kubrick’s last, and for those who are aware of what
is really going on behind the scenes in regards to the elite societies
that run our world, it is easy to see why. Eyes Wide Shut was
actually filmed in a Rothschild mansion and the events that took
place in this film are eerily similar to a real masquerade party that
took place in the 70’s. It only takes a little bit of research to see
that these elite parties often have themes relating to some form of
satanic ritual. At the Rothschilds party, there were photos of how
the place was decorated, with doll parts and blood everywhere.
With the menu featuring words to describe human flesh.
It would seem that perhaps Kubrick knew too much for his own
good and attempted to expose what was really going on behind
closed doors.
Another blockbuster series of movies that are ridden with occult

initiation is ‘Star Wars’. To start with, the name Darth Vader
originates from the occult, Cabbalist ‘Tree of Life’. Within this
symbolic schematic of life itself, is a hidden ‘Sephirot’ known as
214
‘Da’ath’, which occultist Aleister Crowley described as part of the

abyss. Once again, the Luciferian elite that control Hollywood have
purposely incorporated an occult theme into a popular movie that
subtly reveals their own religious ideology. Wikipedia describes the
link between the Thelemic notion of the abyss and Da’ath as
follows:
In the Qabalistic system of Crowley, the Abyss contains the 11th

(hidden) sephira, Da'ath, which separates the lower sephiroth from
the supernals. This account derives from the Hermetic Order of
the Golden Dawn's view of Genesis, in which Da'ath represents
the fall of man from a unified consciousness into a duality between
ego and divine nature.
Representing the dark side, Darth Vader is dressed all in black

and is supposed to harness the energy of what is known as ‘The
Force’, albeit from the evil side. This mysterious energy field is
supposedly tapped into by those trained in the art of white or good
magick and similarly by those operating with evil energy from the
dark side. Interestingly, the occult idea of ‘The Force’ was not in
the original scripts and only appeared in the second draft of
January 1975. This point is highlighted by author J.Baxter in
‘George Lucas: A Biography’, which states:
All evidence suggests that the secret of Star Wars’ extraordinary

longevity and the fidelity of its following, indeed the basis of
George Lucas’ later near guru status, was an afterthought.
In ‘The Star Wars Conspiracy’ by Isaac Weishaupt, it links the

notion of the Force back to the Luciferian belief system that stems
from Paganism:
215
The Force is merely a rehashing of the pagan belief in an

impersonal, universal version of God as a cosmic consciousness….
The fact of the matter is that the characters of Star Wars are all
experiencing the mysteries of pagan or eastern religious powers.
The Force of Star Wars is merely an admiration for the days of old
when pagan beliefs dominated the world. Sacred stones and
amulets similar to the Kaiburr Crystal from which the Force
emanates were used by pagans from the time of ancient Egypt and
are described in the Bible.
It seems that there is a common thread that leads back to the
pagan cradle of civilisation and the mystery schools that went
underground from the days of ancient Egypt. This occult
knowledge has been handed down over the ages to those initiates
deemed worthy to hear the esoteric ideas and philosophies, leaving
others to hypothesise what the true teachings were.
It is not only films targeting the teenage or adult audience that

contain hidden or esoteric symbolism and messages. In fact,
George Lucas sold ‘Lucasfilm’ in 2012 to Disney, the film producer
with undoubtedly the most influence over the younger generation.
In an article posted online by Josh Toupos titled ‘The Disney
Deception Occult Gets Cute’, it summarises the Disney film
model:
Images are powerful! Movies are images on steroids. Walt Disney

was a 33rd-degree Mason. He uses subliminal messages in his
cartoons, movies, and advertising. The themes of most of his
movies tend to focus on the children, and the parents are
conveniently left out (most of the main characters are orphans).
This demonstrates that Disney is not pro-family. Disney also has a
strong interest in ‘magic’ (an occult religious concept).
216
In addition to being a member of the Rosicrucian secret society,

founder Walt Disney was also a known Satanist. That in itself is
quite a strange thing to reveal about possibly the most influential
producer of children’s films and cartoons. Bearing this in mind, it
is no wonder that there are many subliminal occult symbols and
messages encoded within the Disney productions. In ‘The Disney
Deception’, author Walter Glenn Moore explains:
The idea that Walt Disney was a secret Satanist is typically

considered an urban legend by many people…. He had an ongoing
acquaintance with Anton Lavey, the author of the Satanic Bible
and the leader of the Church of Satan. Likewise, Anton Lavey
considered him highly, to such an extent that he would openly
state that the followers of Satan should consider Walt Disney as
one of their ‘guides!’ He often placed Satanic themes in several of
his movies, not just Fantasia. He not only placed Satanic themes in
his movies but also sexual, Satanic and hidden occult symbolism
and imagery. His trademark signature (Walt Disney) contains three
hidden sixes, that is ‘666!’ 666 is the number of the Beast of
Revelation thirteen.
In an article from truthinreality.com titled ‘The Disney Occult

Deception’, it reveals the skill in which Disney has manipulated its
young viewers:
Walt Disney has accomplished numerous truly amazing feats when

it comes to deceiving people, seeming to provide exciting yet
wholesome entertainment while delivering witchcraft and occult
mind control right into their homes.
Disney has been able to achieve this by skilfully creating characters,
screenplay and plots carefully crafted to lead people to think along
certain lines, using powerful subliminal messages, imagery and
symbolism, of occult, witchcraft, pagan, Illuminati, masonic, sexual
217
and other satanic origins. The borders separating good and evil are
blurred and good is made to seem evil, boring or just plain wrong,
while evil is presented as good, or somehow interesting,
fascinating, glamorous, exciting and desirable.
Disney has taken fairy tales, fables, legends and stories from all
over the world, and applying various themes to places, nature,
animals, and characters both real and fantasy, along with appealing
music and lyrics, creatively manipulated and packaged to cater for
their evil agenda. Many of these fairy stories are quite dark anyway,
but Disney has cultivated the expertise to make them even darker.
Colourful witches and wizards abound in Disney productions.
From Queen Grimhilde in the first Disney film Snow White in
1938, through Madam Mim in The Sword in the Stone, and
Cruella De Vil, to the 2014 film dedicated to the life story of the
witch Maleficent, almost every Disney film has some type of witch.
There is at least one tragic death in almost every Disney film and
according to a study published in ‘The Social Science Journal’
there were 561 incidents of child abuse and mistreatment in
Disney movies released between 1937 and 2006, with sixty-two-
percent of the main child characters being subjected to abuse on
one or more occasions during the film.
In addition to witches, pagan themes or absent family, Disney

productions have also been exposed as containing subliminal
messages, often of a sexual nature so as to sexualise young children.
This is explained in the article ‘Disney Subliminal Messages’ from
illuminatisymbols.info:
Disney is supposedly a family-oriented company, but it has often

been accused of inserting sexual innuendos into its cartoons. Some
believe that Walt Disney, himself an alleged practitioner of the
occult and closely connected to the thirteen bloodlines of the
Illuminati, was directed by his Illuminati masters to corrupt the
218
youth, make them more promiscuous and help destroy the

traditional family model.
The same article highlights many examples of subliminal

messages found within many Disney productions. Although this is
explained much easier by providing the visuals, a brief description
of a few such examples should provider the reader with an insight
and knowledge of what to look for if researching further:
The Rescuers
In the 1977 version of The Rescuers, another group of rogue
Disney animators signed their work, this time by inserting two
frames of a topless woman.
The Lion King

Stars in in the sky massing together to spell out the word ‘sex’.
There are obvious boobs drawn in the desert background of Lion
King.
The Little Mermaid

Poster and cover art for the same 1989 animated film caused
controversy when someone who looks for these sort of things
noticed that the castle’s golden towers looked like giant penises.
The phallic symbols were removed from later editions.
Who Framed Roger Rabbit

The 1988 Disney film Who Framed Roger Rabbit also caused
some controversy when some enterprising fan watching the film
frame by frame noticed Jessica Rabbit went commando. The
ensuing controversy led to once-again, a surprised Disney,
redrawing the scene with Jessica wearing more appropriate
undergarment.
219
The intention of this chapter has been to show that, like the
mainstream media, the film industry is not only controlled by the
same Luciferian masters but is also designed to manipulate the
minds of the masses. Looking back over the past few decades, it is
abundantly clear that the content of films and blockbuster movies
has become more sinister, negative, over-sexualised and increasingly
of a dark, occult, nature. Children have gone from watching Black
Beauty to Black Mirrors. While films function as a means of
predictive programming, the audience and the actors are elevated
by the mainstream media to be revered like idols. All of this is not
by accident. It all feeds into the same agenda of preparing the
bewildered herd for the same historical plot where a small elite
group rules over everyone and everything. The same conclusion is
expressed in an online article titled ‘Does the Illuminati Control
the Film Industry?’ (19th January, 2018), posted on
alltimeconspiracies.com, which states:
Nowadays, success and money in Hollywood is dominated by just

ten studios, each owned by a big corporation, which sets the
agenda on which films to finance and distribute. The idea that
corporations owning Hollywood have an unfettered means of
accessing and influencing global audiences under a united world
view has led some conspiracy theorists to believe that Hollywood’s
bright lights, surround sound and CGI effects are really tactics to
trigger a more sinister allegiance.
The Illuminati’s aim to corrupt people to their way of thinking
through Hollywood is, for now, a slow and subtle process.
Concerned with changing the zeitgeist of the world’s mind-set,
they are attempting to normalise their agenda, in order to
minimize resistance to their New World Order
220
Most influential film productions, including those previously

mentioned, come from Hollywood. Most people probably don’t
realise the occult significance of the name itself. Referring to the
wood from the Holly tree, this is the source material used for
witches’ broomsticks and Harry Potter’s magic wand. This is
explained in an article titled ‘Magic of Holly Wood’ from
secretsinplainsight.com:
The druids were tree worshippers, especially the oak. The holly was
their most sacred symbol because it was sacred to mother Holle or
Hel, the [Norse] goddess of the underworld…
…thus we have Holle, or Holly-wood (Hel-wood, the ‘place of
magic’) and home of the Illuminati’s mass propaganda and
conditioning machine in California. The holly wood was a
favourite source of magic wands.
If there is to be found a direct link between the content of

blockbuster movies and the Luciferian hierarchy, then this is the
place to look. Having said that, it doesn’t take a rocket scientist to
realise that the vast majority of Hollywood studios, lead actors and
directors, are of Khazarian origin. To avoid the immediate firewall
of anti-Semitism being applied, it will be left to a Jewish writer to
explain this fact. Author Manny Friedman (real name Elad
Nehorai) wrote in The Times of Israel (1st July, 2012) under the
heading ‘Jews do control the media’:
Let’s be honest with ourselves, here, fellow Jews. We do control

the media. We’ve got so many dudes up in the executive offices in
all the big movie production companies it’s almost obscene. Just
about every movie or TV show…. is rife with actors, directors, and
writers who are Jewish. Did you know that all eight major film
studios are run by Jews?
221
The Mel Gibsons of the world are right in saying we’re deliberately
using our power to take over the world.
The truth is the anti-Semites got it right. We Jews have something
planted in each one of us that makes us completely different from
every group in the world.
No, we’re different. We’re special.
Henry Makow summarises Hollywood and the film industry in a

quote from the book, ‘Illuminati 3’:
Movies today are a place for propaganda, pornography,

disinformation and maudlin sentiment. They are not an honest
reflection or comment on our reality.
Having discussed the film industry and arguably the inherent

manipulation or hidden agenda to influence the minds of the
masses, the same could equally be said of the music industry. To
become a leading musician or singer nowadays, it is only the likes
of corrupted and debauched individuals that are promoted to
reach the top. They adhere to the agenda, lyrics and personal image
that they have been instructed to adopt by their Luciferian
handlers. Also noticeable is their unanimous adoption of hand
signals and gestures that reveal their subordination to the same
Luciferian elite. In photo shoots and on stage, they cover one eye
to demonstrate an allegiance to the all-seeing eye of Lucifer, or use
the horned hand signal in reference to Baphomet. Furthermore,
the fore-finger touching the thumb displays a 666 hand sign and
their costumes contain pyramid symbols, horns, all-seeing eyes or
anything pertaining to be sinister or explicit in nature. The result is
the same occult-laden, over-sexualised product that gets pushed by
the mainstream media to be deemed successful and desirable.
222
It’s time to move on from this glossy world of dark corruption

seen in what we call entertainment and investigate how the current
climate change agenda also shows all the hallmarks of the same
Luciferian historical plot.
223
Chapter fifteen
Climate Change and Agenda 2030
It is unavoidable to notice that in recent years the environment

and climate change agenda has been pushed to the fore of
mainstream media exposure, as well as becoming an increasingly
political focus point. Although originally promoted as ‘global
warming’ by the likes of Luciferian insider Al Gore, when
worldwide temperatures actually began to fall, on average, the new
bogeyman-on-the-block was re-branded as ‘climate change’. It would
generally be agreed by most scientists that the world’s climate is in
fact changing but it seems that the Luciferians have hijacked this
natural occurrence or actively augmented it. They have then used it
as the pedestal to launch the final stage of their historical plot for a
New World Order. Their ingenious plan in doing so, not only
224
absolves the pollution and waste produced by the globalist

corporations under their control but it cleverly switches the blame
to their biggest enemy, humanity itself. This conniving plan is
made abundantly clear by the quote at the beginning of this
chapter, made by none other than one of the Luciferian Round
Table members and think-tanks, the Club of Rome.
It seems that among the Luciferian planning departments, the
final push for a One-World Government is intended to come
about using worldwide environmental catastrophe. The excuse
would be that national governments are incapable of dealing with
such a world-wide problem and therefore citizens will relinquish
their sovereign identity in favour of a world body of elites that can
better deal with the issue. This notion is made abundantly clear in
a statement made by one of the Luciferian superiors, David
Rockefeller:
This present window of opportunity, during which a truly peaceful

and interdependent world order might be built, will not be open
for long. We are on the verge of a global transformation. All we
need is the right major crisis and the nations will accept the New
World Order.
Another Luciferian promoter of the historical plot is former

Russian President and co-founder of the Earth Charter, Mikhail
Gorbachev. He is quoted as saying:
The threat of environmental crisis will be the ‘international

disaster key’ that will unlock the New World Order.
So, irrelevant of whether climate change is man-made or not, it

seems that the current solar cycles and weather changes are going
to be the excuse used to impose new draconian laws and
225
regulations which will affect every single part of our lives. In

addition, it seems that environmental disaster on a global scale,
leading to famine and displacement, will be part of the chosen
means of culling the bewildered herd while establishing a
tyrannical New World Order. Forever!
At this stage, it is worth considering what evidence there is for
man-made global climate change, if any, or whether it is all
propaganda to get the masses to abide by yet more rules and
regulations under the guise of ‘Agenda 2030’. To start with, there
seems to be evidence that global temperatures naturally fluctuate
following well-established solar cycles. This is explained by the
World Cycles Institute in an article titled ‘Theory of Revolving
Cycles’:
The climate on earth over the long term is really quite predictable.
By looking back through history (through core samples, tree rings,
fossils, etc), we’ve determined that there are major climate patterns
that cycles every 25, 100, 500, and 1000 years. We’re at the cusp of
a new 500 year cycle and that’s the reason the weather is so
volatile.
This notion is confirmed by climatologist Cliff Harris and

meteorologist Randy Mann in an article titled ‘Global Temperature
Trends From 2500 B.C. To 2040 A.D.’ (1st March, 2015):
Recent global climate variation is entirely within natural cyclical

variation, with a cooling trend now underway and is likely to
continue to 2030’s, according to best data.
From the late 1940s through the early 1970s, a climate research
organization called the Weather Science Foundation of Crystal
Lake, Illinois, determined that the planet’s warm, cold, wet and
dry periods were the result of alternating short-term and long-term
226
climatic cycles. These researchers and scientists also concluded that

the Earth’s ever-changing climate likewise has influenced global
and regional economies, human and animal migrations, science,
religion and the arts as well as shifting forms of government and
strength of leadership.
During the early 1970s, our planet was in the midst of a colder
and drier weather cycle that led to concerns of another ‘Little Ice
Age.’ Inflationary recessions and oil shortages led to rationing and
long gas lines at service stations worldwide. The situation at that
time was far worse than it is now, at least for the time being.
The Weather Science Foundation also predicted, based on these
various climate cycles that our planet would turn much warmer
and wetter by the early 2000s, resulting in general global
prosperity. They also said that we would be seeing at this time
widespread weather ‘extremes.’ There’s little doubt that most of
their early predictions came true.
Our recent decline in the Earth’s temperature may be a
combination of both long-term and short-term climate cycles,
decreased solar activity and the development of strong long-lasting
La Ninas, the cooler than normal sea-surface temperature event in
the south-central Pacific Ocean. Despite the recent rise, sunspot
activity since in the late 2000s has averaged near the lowest levels
since ‘The Little Ice Age’ ended in the mid-to late 1800s. By 2020,
some scientists state that solar activity will plummet once again
that could lead to much colder weather across the globe. This
recent ‘cool spell,’ though, may have only been a brief interruption
to the Earth’s overall warming trend. Only time will tell.
The next ‘warm and dry’ climatic phase is scheduled to arrive in
the early 2030s, probably peaking around 2038. It is expected to
produce even hotter and drier weather patterns than we saw
during the late 1990s and early 2000s.
227
Referring to what we are told by the mainstream media as

causing the change in climate, man-made carbon-dioxide (CO2)
emissions have been trumpeted as the culprit. However, outside of
this controlled narrative, there are many eminent scientists and
researchers that disagree. In an online article titled ‘Carbon
Dioxide and the Global Warming Hoax’ by Adrian Arp (18th
October, 2018), it states:
Man-caused Global Warming/Climate Change being caused by

excess Carbon Dioxide in the atmosphere is a world-wide hoax!
Global warming is a major part of the United Nation’s Agenda
21(Sustainable Development) program and plan to redistribute our
wealth and control all human activity on the planet! $360 Billion
is being spent each year to promote the fear that global warming
will soon destroy the planet and Carbon Dioxide coming from
fossil fuels must be greatly restricted; thus, the war on coal, oil and
gas.
Carbon Dioxide is not a pollutant as the Supreme Court has
ruled, but is necessary for life on the planet. Carbon Dioxide
(CO2) plus water (H2O) during the process of photosynthesis in
plants produces the oxygen we need to breathe and the food we
eat.
Increasing levels of CO2 have not contributed to global warming.
CO2 is a minor greenhouse gas with water vapour being the major
greenhouse gas.
Renowned physicist Freeman Dyson from Princeton University

is one of the leading sceptics on man-made climate change. In his
nineties, he has a lifetime of experience monitoring changes in the
earth’s natural climate rhythm, as well as viewing the change in the
political agenda. From the website CO2coalition.org, it cites the
remarks of Mr Dyson in an article titled ‘Renowned Physicist
228
Freeman Dyson: Theories of Climate are Very Confused… Models

are Wrong!’:
On why we should not trust the models, Dyson says flat out:
‘Because they’re wrong. It’s very simple. They’re wrong.’ Dyson
says they ‘disagree with observations’. He then commented on
modelling scientists: ‘Those people don’t look at observations.
They are in a world of their own ….Unfortunately the thing has
become so political it’s no longer science when you have strong
political dogmas, as you say, on both sides.’
The 93-year old Princeton professor also notes that although the
models are ‘very good tools for understanding climate’, they are a
‘very bad tool for predicting climate’ and that these scientists ‘live
by scaring the public.’
It seems that once you manage to get past the official narrative
presented by the mainstream media, then the truth about CO2
being the cause of man-made climate change is completely false. In
fact, the opposite seems to be true. CO2 actually sustains life on
earth, to the point that without it, entire ecosystems and
potentially everything on it would collapse. This very important
point is confirmed by environmental scientists in an edition of the
‘Science and Environmental Policy Project’ journal titled ‘The
Week That Was’. In reference to this document, Freeman Dyson
argues that author Indur Goklany, is correct about the benefits of
CO2 when stating:
To any unprejudiced person reading (Goklany’s) account, the facts

should be obvious: that the non-climatic effects of carbon dioxide
as a sustainer of wildlife and crop plants are enormously beneficial,
that the possibly harmful climatic effects of carbon dioxide have
229
been greatly exaggerated, and that the benefits clearly outweigh the
possible damage.
However, like so many people that simply cannot overcome

their own cognitive dissonance to accept the truth when presented
with it, it seems that in the scientific community they are no
different. Dyson adds:
The people who are supposed to be experts and who claim to

understand the science are precisely the people who are blind to
the evidence. Those of my scientific colleagues who believe the
prevailing dogma about carbon dioxide will not find Goklany’s
evidence convincing. I hope that a few of them will make the effort
to examine the evidence in detail and see how it contradicts the
prevailing dogma, but I know that the majority will remain blind.
That is to me the central mystery of climate science.
A recent study by Finnish scientists seems to confirm the

knowledge that climate change is not caused by increased emissions
of CO2. The scientific paper titled ‘No Experimental Evidence for
the Significant Anthropogenic Climate Change’ is analysed by
Mike Adams from naturalnews.com:
The climate change hoax has collapsed. A devastating series of

research papers has just been published, revealing that human
activity can account for no more than a .01°C rise in global
temperatures, meaning that all the human activity targeted by
radical climate change alarmists — combustion engines, airplane
flights, diesel tractors — has virtually no measurable impact on the
temperature of the planet.
The paper explains that IPCC analysis of global temperatures
suffers from a glaring error — namely, failure to account for
influences of low cloud cover and how it impacts global
230
temperatures. Natural variations in low cloud cover, which are

strongly influenced by cosmic radiation’s ability to penetrate
Earth’s atmosphere due to variations in the strength of our
planet’s magnetosphere, account for nearly all changes in global
temperature, the researchers explain.
Various international studies have revealed that cloud cover is

much more influential than CO2 in terms of affecting global
temperature change. One such study undertaken by Kobe
University, in Japan, was published as ‘Intensified East Asian
Winter Monsoon during the Last Geomagnetic Reversal
Transition’ and states:
Because the anthropogenic portion in the increased CO2 is less

than ten-percent, we have practically no anthropogenic climate
change. The low clouds control mainly the global temperature.
Clearly, CO2 is not the pollutant that the mainstream media is

claiming it to be. It has negligible effect on climate change and, to
the contrary, seems to be making the Earth a greener place. The
revelation that cloud cover has more effect on climate change is an
extremely important point that will be discussed in more detail in
the following chapter on Geoengineering. Therefore, all the fear-
mongering about burning fossil fuels, leaving carbon footprints,
travelling by airplane or too many humans heating their homes is
not based on scientific evidence but is yet again part of the
Luciferian plot to manipulate the bewildered herd. Whether
increasing taxes, restricting travel, determining vehicle emissions or
even limiting the energy capacity of domestic electrical goods, the
tentacles of environmental control measures are everywhere.
In September, 2019 a letter was signed by 500 scientists and
sent to the U.N. to coincide with the climate summit in New York.
231
In the article ‘500 Prominent Scientists Warn U.N. There Is No

Climate Emergency’, it expresses similar concern from within the
scientific community:
The general-circulation models of climate on which international

policy is at present founded are unfit for their purpose. Therefore,
it is cruel as well as imprudent to advocate the squandering of
trillions of dollars on the basis of results from such immature
models.
The letter was signed by [over 500] prominent scientists and
professionals from related fields, including atmospheric physicist
Richard Lindzen and applied geology professor Alberto Prestininzi.
We urge you to follow a climate policy based on sound science,
realistic economics, and genuine concern for those harmed by
costly but unnecessary attempts at mitigation.
A similar petition was signed by ninety Italian scientists in June

of the same year. This challenged the idea that humans are causing
climate change because the mainstream predictions do not match
observable data:
It is scientifically unrealistic to attribute to humans the

responsibility for the warming observed from the past century to
today. The advanced alarmist forecasts, therefore, are not credible,
since they are based on models whose results contradict the
experimental data. All the evidence suggests that these models
overestimate the [human] contribution and underestimate the
natural climatic variability, especially that induced by the sun, the
moon, and ocean oscillations.
Unfortunately, what the scientists don’t realise is that the U.N.

is under the direction and control of the Luciferian hierarchy. It
therefore follows the agenda agreed by the Round Table think-
232
tanks and those determined at secretive meetings of heads of state

and business, held each year at the Bilderberg conferences. The sad
fact is that the U.N. is not interested in the truth about climate
change neither is the controlled mainstream media or globalist
corporations that are set to reap the profits from any new
environmental regulations.
Once again, all of this is not by accident. The environmental
disaster scenario has led to the final stage of the Luciferian plot to
control all of the world’s resources, to cull the majority of the
population and to rule over the survivors. Insider, George Orwell,
famously wrote, ‘if you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot
stamping on the human face –forever’.
The all-encompassing blueprint for the final stage of the
historical plot is incorporated into what is known as ‘Agenda
2030’. Before going into further detail as to what Agenda 2030
really entails, it is interesting to highlight that Western
governments have realised for decades that democracy cannot
function without a perceived enemy of some sort. After two world
wars, the ensuing Cold War, and various orchestrated terrorist
threats, the new foe to unite us in fear, has been designated as the
degradation of the environment itself. This concept was first
discovered in 1967 when a three-year study was commissioned,
resulting in what is known as ‘Report from Iron Mountain’. The
report concluded that without war a new enemy would be required
to induce allegiance of the population. Similar to the conclusion
previously mentioned by the Club of Rome, the report also
suggested that the environment could function as the new enemy.
It states:
233
An effective political substitute for war would require ‘alternative

enemies’, some of which might seem equally farfetched in the
context of the current war system. It may be, for instance, that
gross pollution of the environment can eventually replace the
possibility of mass destruction by nuclear weapons as the principal
apparent threat to the survival of the species. Poisoning of the air,
is already well advanced, and at first glance would seem promising
in this respect; it constitutes a threat that can be dealt with only
through social organization and political power. But from present
indications it will be a generation to a generation and a half before
environmental pollution, however severe, will be sufficiently
menacing, on a global scale, to offer a possible basis for a solution.
It is true that the rate of pollution could be increased selectively for
this purpose; in fact, the mere modifying of existing programs for
the deterrence of pollution could speed up the process enough to
make the threat credible much sooner.
This is effectively condoning pollution by the Luciferian

globalist corporations, even to the point of recommending
accelerated pollution to increase the threat from the new enemy,
the environment and therefore, humanity itself. In typical no-
nonsense language, author Dean Henderson explains this
transition of perceived enemy in the book ‘Agenda 21’:
The ‘Order Ab Chao’ pretext was environmental cataclysm and

global warming.
With Occidental petroleum billionaire owner Armand Hammer’s
protégé Al Gore as its spokesman, the Luciferians would now
promote their myth of scarcity, which assigns blame to humanity
instead of to themselves. From their Babylonian pulpit they
preached misanthropy, carbon footprints, carbon taxes, tiny
houses, a contraction in living standards and general austerity.
234
But we were not to blame the elites. We were to blame ourselves

and fellow humans. In fact, we were to think that ‘humans’ had
screwed up the planet so badly that the world would be better off
without us. The ultimate self-hatred was becoming a normalized
plank in their perception management offensive.
In 1992, this new enemy to unite humanity was presented at the

‘UN Conference on Environment and Development’ in Rio de
Janeiro and was known as ‘Agenda 21’. Signed by 179 nation
states, it has recently been re-labelled as ‘Agenda 2030’. Leading
this initiative was Maurice Strong, a Canadian oil and mining
billionaire. Before even contemplating that such a profit-hungry oil
baron could really express philanthropy towards the rest of
humanity, consider his words regarding bringing about the
destruction of civilisation as we know it:
Isn’t the only hope for the planet that the industrialized
civilizations collapse?
Isn’t it our responsibility to bring that about?
Agenda 2030 is presented in a very astute manner which attracts

the natural empathy and caring nature of most human beings.
Reducing pollution, cutting emissions, using less fossil fuel,
recycling and the like, could all gain support from the masses. This
is especially attractive and convincing when adopting buzzwords
like ‘sustainability’, ‘smart growth’, ‘comprehensive land use
planning’ and ‘big society’. However, all these genuine
environmental concerns are masquerading for a hidden agenda of
imposing Orwellian restrictions on all aspects of life. This disguised
environmental agenda is summarised by Dean Henderson as
follows:
235
Under the guise of a front called ‘Local Governments for

Sustainability’, the elitist polluters have set out to push this anti-
human agenda into every corner of the planet. The word
‘sustainability’ is their Trojan Horse. Wherever you see it used,
know that it has nothing to do with protecting the earth, and
everything to do with destroying it and you.
Some of its goals include an end to national sovereignty, the
restructuring of the family unit, the assignment of certain jobs for
certain people, restriction of people’s movements, an increase in
the role of the state in raising children, the creation of densely
populated human settlement zones accompanied by an emptying
out of rural areas, a dumbing down of education via testing rather
than learning, the abolition of private property, and at its core a
massive reduction in the population of Planet Earth.
Rather than being seen as a centralised, authoritarian

programme, Agenda 2030 is purposely being instigated at the
community level. The reason for this is that local communities are
viewed to be easier to manipulate, without national interference
from more knowledgeable groups. However, this can also backfire.
Presenting an example from a meeting to adopt such measures at
the Summit Hill Borough Council, one local resident, Sandy
Dellicker, obviously saw through the environmental propaganda
when she said:
UN Agenda 21/Sustainable Development is the action plan to

inventory and control all land, all water, all minerals, all plants, all
animals, all construction, all means of production, all information,
all energy, and all human beings in the world. This is not a
conspiracy, this is for real.
In a publication titled ‘Agenda 21 – Your Life in Their Hands’,

author Martin Edwards writes:
236
The Big Society is the UK version of the UNs Agenda 21. It is a

Marxist inspired plan which will have a devastating impact on, not
only your own life, but also upon the lives of your children and
grandchildren.
Almost every concept under Agenda 21 / Sustainable
Development is written in Newspeak. In order that the public
might be deceived, words often have the opposite meanings of
those described in your Oxford Dictionary. The term ‘economic
prosperity’ is no different. If you look around you will see that
there is austerity for the masses whilst the global elite enjoy
economic prosperity as though they were isolated from world
realities.
Everything in the curriculum now has the sustainability stamp on
it centred on ‘saving the world’ through green issues as well as
acceptance of global citizenship. A UN program called ‘Decade of
Education for Sustainable Development’ (DESD) has been
implemented globally in an attempt to indoctrinate an entire
generation of future workers and generations to the Agenda 21
principles.
As regards indoctrination, as mentioned in the previous quote,

the Luciferians realise that the most important target group is the
youth of today. By influencing the minds of children and young
teenagers today, they will become willing participants that accept
the New World Order of tomorrow. If viewed as a marketing
campaign, the best way to influence and steer the mind-set of the
youth towards the desired outcomes of Agenda 2030 would be to
incorporate a youngster in the advertising initiative. To increase
the empathy towards this individual and to prevent open rebuttal
or denial of authenticity, a person of disability would be a
marketing dream.
237
At the time of writing, that marketing campaign is approaching

full throttle with the roll-out of, what could be argued is child
exploitation and abuse, young eco-warrior Greta Thunberg. Born
in 2003 and supposedly suffering from Aspergers, this innocent
looking daughter of a famous Swedish opera singer and liberal
activist has had her youth taken away from her and replaced by
global media intrusion. At a first glance, her decision to strike from
school and raise awareness for the environmental agenda seems
original and humble. However, by scraping away the veneer of
marketing publicity the truth behind her meteoric rise to fame has
been well orchestrated by the Luciferian think-tanks. Rather than
being Greta’s idea, the marketing campaign calling for a world-wide
school strike for climate protection actually originated from the
‘Global youth Summit’ of May 2015, long before Greta had been
groomed for the role of youth eco warrior.
The environmental organisation ‘Plant-for-the-Planet’, which
Greta promotes, is linked to Luciferian controlled or financed
groups. These include the Avina Foundation, which is funded by
the Rockefeller Foundation, the Club of Rome and the Global
Marshall Plan. Whenever there is such world-wide manipulation
going on, the infamous George Soros is never far away. Spear-
heading the Luciferian agenda, his name also keeps cropping up
around the marketing campaign of child pawn Greta Thunberg.
This is revealed in an article from Free West Media (24th April,
2019) titled ‘George Soros is Backing Greta Thunberg’. A recipient
of George Soros’ funding via the ‘ONE’ foundation, German
climate activist Luisa-Marie Neubauer, is shown to be her direct
handler and choreographer, being photographed instructing Greta
at different events and protests around the world. As the plot
thickens, the ‘ONE’ foundation also includes elite financiers such
238
as Bono and none other than Bill Gates. The truth is that behind
the innocent schoolgirl climate warrior is a shadowy cabal of
lobbyists, energy companies and financial investors that are
targeting huge profits from the new rules and regulations that will
be enforced as a result of Agenda 2030. This view is confirmed by
author Cory Morningstar in ‘The Manufacture of Greta Thunberg
– with consent’:
As the oligarchs financed, shaped and largely managed the climate

movement – it’s only natural that they alone benefit from it. The
power elites repackaged our oppression as revolution and sold it
back to us. By exploiting the innocent youth, which in turn
exploited our emotions and fears as a collective populace, we
devoured it. And soon, young Greta and all the youth they have
exploited will be thrown under the bus.
As for poor Greta Thunberg in the middle of this Luciferian

power grab, an article from henrymakow.com titled ‘Greta
Thunberg – Rothschild Pawn’ confirms that:
Many around the world are now unsettled at what we have seen, of
an age sixteen Swedish young lady with self-admitted mental
vulnerabilities, pushed onto the world stage, with some very
disturbing elite forces doing the pushing.
The four million euro yacht, on which Greta sailed to the USA,
was a yacht of the Rothschild family, who transferred it to German
tycoon Gerhard Senft. Co-captaining the voyage was Pierre
Casiraghi, grandson of Monaco's late Prince Rainier III and actress
Grace Kelly.
The global climate change industry is worth an annual $1.5
trillion, says the Climate Change Business Journal. Greta
Thunberg's backers are financial speculators in companies seeking
billions in profit from taxpayer-funded 'climate change' programs.
239
As always, following the money reveals the true authors of the

latest climate change propaganda, Agenda 2030 and the
widespread promotion of sustainability. Globalresearch.ca explains
this in an article titled ‘Climate and the Money Trail’ by F. William
Engdahl (5th January, 2020):
The links between the world’s largest financial groups, central

banks and global corporations to the current push for radical
climate strategy to abandon fossil fuel economy in favour of a
vague, unexplained Green economy, it seems, is less about genuine
concern to make our planet a clean and healthy environment to
live. Rather it is an agenda, intimately tied to the UN Agenda
2030 for ‘sustainable’ economy, and to developing literally trillions
of dollars in new wealth for the global banks and financial giants
who constitute the real powers that be.
Make no mistake. When the most influential multinational
corporations, the world’s largest institutional investors including
BlackRock and Goldman Sachs, the UN, the World Bank, the
Bank of England and other central banks of the BIS line up
behind financing if a so-called green Agenda, call it Green New
Deal or what, it is time to look behind the surface of public
climate activist campaigns to the actual agenda. The picture that
emerges is the attempted financial reorganisation on the world
economy using climate, something the sun and its energy have
orders of magnitude more to do with than mankind ever could –
to try to convince us ordinary folk to make untold sacrifice to ‘save
our planet.’
Author David Livingstone provides an excellent summary of the

real reasons behind the environmental movement. In ‘Terrorism
and the Illuminati – A three thousand year history’, it states:
240
The environmental movement is being used as a cover to promote

return to the creed of the Ancient Mysteries, in the form of the
worship of mother-nature, a pagan notion that equates the goddess
with earth, known among the ancient Greeks as Gaia. Originally,
she is the Babylonian Ishtar, known to the Bible as Astarte, or the
Egyptian Isis. This pantheistic idea has its origins in ancient
paganism, and is central to the Kabbalah and all Western occult
tradition, including Freemasons and the Illuminati.
Highlighting the fact that Agenda 2030 and the mainstream

environmental emergency is nothing but propaganda; it is not what
is included in the official narrative that rings alarm bells but what
is not discussed. At no point amongst the fear-mongering and
direct blame pointed at humanity do the Luciferians ever mention
the real dangers we face, namely 5G microwave radiation,
genetically modified organisms (GMO) and aerosol geoengineering.
The potential dangers of GMOs have already been discussed, so it’s
time to look at one of the real causes of weather manipulation and
climate change, known as geoengineering.
241
Chapter sixteen
Geoengineering
Geoengineering is basically the manipulation of the natural

environment and can include such measures as the capture of
carbon-dioxide from land and sea or Solar Radiation Management
(SRM), which aims to block the sunlight from reaching the earth’s
surface. This chapter is particularly concerned with the global
spraying of fine particles into the stratosphere from jet planes,
primarily for the purpose of weather manipulation and other
strategic reasons that will be highlighted. Increasingly, in recent
years, plumes of toxic nano-particles can be seen criss-crossing the
once blue skies or streaking out like long trails normally associated
with the launching of rockets. Rather than dissipating in the same
manner as condensation trails, they slowly spread out to form a
hazy sky, lingering for hours until eventually falling down into the
air column that we breathe. Due to worldwide testing of air and
soil samples, it has been revealed that these trails principally
contain the chemicals aluminium, barium and strontium, which
242
create nuclei for atmospheric moisture to condense around but are

also toxic to human health, animal and plant life. With the use of
land-based microwave radiation stations, these particles can then be
heated up to create high pressure zones which are then used to
manipulate or re-direct weather fronts, induce rainfall or promote
extreme drought.
Governments around the world continue to deny that such a
potentially devastating environmental experiment is actually going
on. This is only possible with full support of the mainstream media
and the unknowing support of most of humanity. People have
been conditioned to trust the authorities and seem unable to bring
it upon themselves to question what they see with their own eyes.
One of the most comprehensive sources of information on this
means of manipulating the weather is geoengineeringwatch.org.
On the website it explains that:
Government officials and geo-engineers have long since proposed

spraying ten to twenty million tons of highly toxic heavy metal and
chemical aerosols into the atmosphere annually as a form of
climate change mitigation. Though the blatantly obvious ongoing
sun blocking ‘solar radiation management’ programs are officially
denied, all available data confirms full deployment of global
geoengineering occurred decades ago with increasingly catastrophic
consequences.
The idea that the earth is being sprayed continuously with toxic
chemicals is a subject that most people simply cannot allow
themselves to comprehend or accept. The automatic reaction is one
of complete denial and dismissal, even though their own eyes can
see this deception in the skies right above them. This example is
probably the clearest demonstration of how cognitive dissonance,
243
combined with a lifetime of social engineering by the mainstream

media and an ingrained trust in the authorities, has led the
majority of people to be unable to trust their own senses. It is one
of the most fundamental issues facing humanity, the principle
cause of engineered climate change and has profound implications
for all life on earth, yet people remain blinded to the truth simply
because the deception is so big that it becomes unbelievable. The
notion of a lie being big enough to seem incontrovertible was well
known by the leaders of the German Reich. However, they also
realised a fundamental aspect that all truth-seekers know, which is
that the truth cannot hide forever, especially from those that
devote time to uncover it. In Mein Kampf, Hitler wrote about this
enormous means of deceiving the population, saying of the masses:
It would never come into their heads to fabricate colossal untruths,

and they would not believe that others could have the impudence
to distort the truth so infamously. Even though the facts which
prove this to be so may be brought clearly to their minds, they will
still doubt and waver and will continue to think that there may be
some other explanation. For the grossly impudent lie always leaves
traces behind it, even after it has been nailed down, a fact which is
known to all expert liars in this world and to all who conspire
together in the art of lying.
In the case of the geoengineering lie, the ‘traces’ left behind on

spray days represent an unrecognisable sky compared to a decade
ago and the massive aluminium build-up in soil samples reveals
nothing but the truth. It remains an anomaly that educated people,
when shown, still cannot comprehend the reality of what is going
on in the sky. But then again, that is what this book is all about.
It’s a heart-wrenching wake-up call for all fellow human beings,
before it’s too late.
244
Technically, the term ‘contrail’ refers to the condensation

produced by a jet engine when flying above 35,000 feet, at a
temperature of minus forty degrees celsius and, according to the
U.S. Airforce definition, appearing at a distance of one wing-span
behind the aircraft. For geoengineering purposes, the chemical-
laden trails seen in the sky are sprayed at lower altitudes where ice
crystallisation cannot occur and due to their artificial constituents,
are commonly known as ‘chemtrails’. This term originates from the
1990 U.S. Air Force Academy Chemistry 131 Manual. Quoting
from this document, Elana Freeland explains the terminology in
‘Chemtrails, Haarp, and the Full Spectrum Dominance of Planet
Earth’:
….preparing cadets in molecular geometry, acid rain, spectroscopy,

acid base titration, the chemical of photography, identification of
chemical compounds, chemical kinetics, electrochemistry and
organic chemistry in preparation for Air Force aerosol programs.
(On the cover by the word ‘Chemtrails’ is a rocket spouting
fumes.)
In ‘Chemtrails Exposed – A New Manhattan Project’ by Peter

A. Kirby, it describes the visibility of these trails in the sky and asks
some very basic questions for the unconvinced observer to think
about:
A typical chemtrail first appears as a white line high in the sky

emitted by a large jet airplane. These lines become diffuse as they
float down to earth. Heavy spraying creates a thick haze over vast
areas. Chemtrails often form Xs and sometimes grid patterns.
Chemtrails are also sometimes sprayed in a circular fashion.
Although a seemingly endless amount of photos and videos are
245
posted online, you can observe these phenomena with your own
eyes. One just needs to look up.
When two jet airplanes fly at a similar altitude, why is it that one
will emit a persistent trail while the other does not? The fuels are
not different. Jet fuel, like gasoline, is standardized. How does a
trail appear behind one engine of the same airplane, but not the
other? How does a plane fly along emitting a trail that alternately
persists and then abruptly does not, then abruptly does again? It is
safe to assume that the engine is not being turned off and on. Why
is it that one day the sky will be full of lines in every direction and
the next day there will be none, even though the weather is
identical? Why do the lines in the sky usually not follow common
flight paths?
After many years filming geoengineering in the skies across

Europe, on spray days the fleet of planes are instantly recognisable.
Not necessarily following standard flight paths, they often
concentrate just before the arrival of a weather front or forecasted
cloud patterns. By doing this, the sprayed particles give the
condensation already in the air something to cling to, which can
then be used to manipulate the weather. Geoengineering is
particularly noticeable along coastal areas where weather patterns
are particularly changeable and influenced by the adjacent land
mass. As plumes of white trails billow out of the rear of jet planes,
they streak out across the sky. As they widen, they form a giveaway
eddying effect where one side of the trail forms a row of curled
swirls. Sometimes while observing the plane, the trail will suddenly
stop completely as if the engine has been turned off then all of a
sudden, it starts once again. Everyone knows that planes cannot
stall their engines mid-flight due to the risk of crashing although
such observations can be clearly explained by spray tanks being
246
turned on and off. This undeniable sight actually became a eureka

moment for an aviation-enthusiast friend of mine. When shown
chemtrails stopping and starting for the first time, he exclaimed in
disbelief knowing full well that it could not be the engine causing
the disruption. Since that moment of truth, he now speaks out
against the toxic spraying that we must endure while the vast
majority of people remain totally ignorant of what they are
witnessing with their own eyes. If a critical mass of people awakens
to the truth about this fact alone, the Luciferian agenda would
crumble tomorrow due to the vast implications of this secretive
agenda.
From a technical point of view, it is interesting to explain the
relevance of modern jet engines which are purposely designed to
reduce the amount of air intake into the combustion chamber,
therefore making them more efficient. During this process, the
resultant exhaust gases produce a negligible or practically non-
existent condensation trail. In plain English, this means all modern
planes should have no trail following behind them or at most, a
condensation trail that persists for no more than a few seconds.
Known as ‘high-bypass turbo-fan jet engines’, this key point to
understanding the cover-up is explained by Dave Wigington in an
article titled ‘High Bypass Turbofan Jet Engines, Geoengineering,
and the Contrail Lie’:
We are told by all ‘official sources’ that the sun-blocking weather

disrupting jet dispersed trails we see in our skies are only
‘condensation trails’. The ‘condensation trail’ official narrative is
perhaps the greatest lie the power structure has ever perpetrated to
pacify the masses into ignoring the immense threat posed by
climate engineering operations occurring over our heads on a daily
basis…. Here is the fact of the matter, all commercial jet aircraft
247
and all military tankers are fitted with a type of jet engine that is by
design nearly incapable of producing any condensation trail except
under the most extreme circumstances, the high bypass turbofan.
This important point is emphasised in ‘Under an Ionized Sky’

by Elana Freeland, stating that:
The high bypass flow-cycle turbofan engine operates more like a

large diameter propeller that routes incoming air around rather
than through the engine. The propeller delivers ninety-percent of
the thrust without burning extra fuel, with only ten-percent going
through combustion. No extra fuel means less water vapour or
CO2. Given that condensation requires high vacuum (not high
pressure), high humidity, and low temperatures, the air-to-exhaust
ratio is too high in the high-bypass engine to facilitate
condensation. This engine is primarily used by commercial airlines
and large super-tankers.
From a historical perspective, the military industrial complex

has long sought to control the weather, mainly for nefarious
reasons. During the Vietnam War in the 1970s, it is well
documented that cloud seeding was used to induce excess amounts
of rain so as to flood the Vietcong out of the Cu-Chi tunnels in
which they hid. More recently, for the Beijing Olympic Games, the
Chinese authorities used weather manipulation to clear the smog-
ridden skies over the city and in 2007 announced the first-ever
artificial snowfall in Tibet. Reverting to an article in the National
Observer in 1963 titled ‘Weather: Warfare’s Next Weapon?’ it
reveals some of the earlier intentions of geoengineering:
Admiral Raborn outlines such possibilities as diverting storms

toward enemy communications, causing destructive weather
phenomena, or controlling the weather to help a military assault….
248
The possibilities for the military employment of the ‘weather

weapon’ may be as diverse as they are numerous. An ability to
control the weather could introduce greater changes in warfare
than those which occurred in 1945 with the explosion of the first
nuclear weapons…. Ground, sea, air, and amphibious operations
might be supported by the dissipating of fog or clouds, or by the
production of rain or drought…. Creating or dissipating
atmospheric temperature/humidity ducts might modify the
refractive index of the atmosphere enough to influence radar or
radio transmission. Artificially induced ionospheric storms might
produce a blackout of communications.
In 1996, around the time that chemical aerosol spraying was

first introduced, a research paper presented to the U.S. Air Force
reveals the secret intention of the global geoengineering program.
‘Weather as a Force Muliplier: Owning the Weather in 2025’
states:
A high-risk, high-reward endeavour, weather-modification offers a

dilemma not unlike the splitting of the atom. While some
segments of society will always be reluctant to examine
controversial issues such as weather-modification, the tremendous
military capabilities that could result from this field are ignored at
our own peril.
The essential ingredient of the weather-modification system is the
set of intervention techniques used to modify the weather. The
number of specific intervention methodologies is limited only by
the imagination, but with few exceptions they involve infusing
either energy or chemicals into the meteorological process in the
right way, at the right place and time. The intervention could be
designed to modify the weather in a number of ways, such as
influencing clouds and precipitation, storm intensity, climate,
249
space, or fog…. By 2025 we will certainly be capable of increasing

or decreasing precipitation over the short term in a localized area.
One major advantage of using simulated weather to achieve a
desired effect is that unlike other approaches, it makes what are
otherwise the results of deliberate actions appear to be the
consequences of natural weather phenomena.
Thanks to the revelations of a military pilot responsible for

flying aircraft that spray chemical aerosols into the sky, the program
of geoengineering is his geographical location was revealed as code-
named ‘Indigo Skyfold’. In an article posted by The Haarp Report
titled ‘Secret Chemtrail Pilot Speaks, on Dec 8, 2014’ it reveals
knowledge from within the geoengineering operation:
Pilots are told to fly specific routes, while satellites control aerosol
dispersal patterns. The pilots make course corrections from time
to time, and perform landings and take-offs. Pilot navigation and
maintenance crews are rotated constantly, and only spend about
eighteen months at one given base, to keep pilots and their
families from making too many friends, and ending up with ‘loose
lips’. They also rotate between day and night flights, one base for
daytime flights, and one for night. Each base covers a 250-mile
zone, and each fleet (squadron) of planes covers three states, or an
even larger swath of ocean.
In a document titled ‘Project Cloverleaf: Timeline, 1994 to the

Present’ it exposes some of the other reasons for spraying metallic
nano-particles into the atmosphere:
The purpose is nothing less than the actual physical

transformation of the earth’s atmosphere in order to provide a
platform for the latest chemical and electromagnetic technologies
of warfare, communication, weather control, low-yield biological
250
warfare, and control of populations through ‘non-lethal’

chemical/electromagnetic means.
If anyone still doubts that our governments have condoned the

spraying of chemical aerosols into the atmosphere, whether for
climate mitigation or other nefarious purposes, the Environmental
Research Letter titled ‘Modification of Cirrus Clouds to Reduce
Global Warming (2009) states:
Since commercial airliners routinely fly in the region where cold

cirrus clouds exist, it is hoped that the seeding material could
either be dissolved or suspended in their jet fuel and later burned
with the fuel to create seeding aerosol, or injected into the hot
engine exhaust, which should vaporize the seeding material
allowing it to condense as aerosol in the jet contrail. The objective
would not be to seed specific cloud systems but rather to build up
a background concentration of aerosol seeding material so that the
air masses that cirrus will form in will contain the appropriate
amount of seeding material to produce large ice crystals.
Furthermore, in the House of Commons report conducted by

the Science and Technology Committee, ‘The Regulation of
Geoengineering’ (2009-10), it calls for regulations surrounding the
geoengineering program; very interesting for something that both
government and mainstream media deny is taking place! It states:
Geoengineering covers many techniques and technologies but

splits into two broad categories: those that remove carbon dioxide
from the atmosphere such as sequestering and locking carbon
dioxide in geological formations; and those that reflect solar
radiation. Techniques in this category include the injection of
sulphate aerosols into the stratosphere to mimic the cooling effect
caused by large volcanic eruptions.
251
Geoengineering techniques should be graded with consideration

to factors such as trans-boundary effect, the dispersal of potentially
hazardous materials in the environment and the direct effect on
ecosystems.
This inquiry was innovative in that we worked collaboratively with
the US House of Representatives Science and Technology
Committee …. We are enthusiastic supporters of collaborative
working between national legislatures on topics such as
geoengineering with international reach.
To achieve the effect of manipulating the weather and ionizing

the sky for its use in full spectrum dominance of earth, in addition
to spraying aerosols, ground-based microwave stations are required.
The patent issued for this is #4,686,605 ‘Method and Apparatus
for Altering a Region in the Earth’s Atmosphere, Ionosphere,
and/or Magnetosphere’ applied for by Bernard J. Eastlund on
behalf of Arco Technologies Inc. This led to the construction of
what is known as HAARP (High Frequency Active Aurora
Research Program) in Alaska, starting in 1993. Although this
facility has since been superseded by many smaller facilities around
the world, Alaska was originally selected due to its near vertical
magnetic field lines which could be made to act as a global shield
of charged particles. An excellent insight into this secretive
program is provided, in the book ‘Angels Don’t Play This Haarp’
by Jeanne Manning and Dr. Nick Begich:
The Haarp system is designed to manipulate the ionosphere, a

layer which begins about thirty miles above the earth. The
transmitter or Haarp device on the ground is a phased array
antenna system – a large field of antennas designed to work
together in focusing radio-frequency energy for manipulating the
ionosphere.
252
It will be used for ….communications with submarines, to

manipulate communication of others, over-the-horizon radar,
energy transfers from one part of the world to another, creating
artificial plasma (energy) layers or patches in the ionosphere, to
alter weather and may be used as an anti-satellite weapon.
If researching an image of the Haarp facility online, an

expansive area of Alaskan wilderness can be seen, now covered
with antennae. These masts act together to form one extremely
powerful ionospheric heater. Using the technology originally
discovered by Nikola Tesla’s ‘death ray’, up to 1.7 billion watts of
electro-magnetic energy can be simultaneously beamed into the
ionosphere, the charged layer of the earth’s atmosphere. Dr. Nick
Begich continues:
These researchers learned that Haarp represents a technology

which could lead to a new class of weapons that could change our
world profoundly – an all-purpose military tool. If misused, the
tool could mess up the weather. It could be used against humanity
in a way that would change what people think, believe and feel.
Elana Freeland confirms this assertion about Haarp technology,

including the ability to divert the jet stream to the extent of re-
routing storms and hurricanes:
Eventually, ionospheric heaters could generate 3 million gigawatts

to heat up one square kilometre of the ionosphere to 28,000 °C.
Control the jet stream and you can reroute storms, hurricanes, and
droughts and make a fortune from weather derivatives. Shoot
microwaves into the earth (tomography) and you can discover oil
reserves, underground bunkers, and war booty. Decimate a
developing country, then send in contractors, earth-moving
machinery, ‘aid’, CIA, military etc. to boost the economy back
253
home, and if a country does not comply with transnational and

IMF ‘guidelines’, a flood or drought might convince its leaders to
reconsider.
To summarise, metallic particles are sprayed into the

atmosphere via retro-fitted airplanes, the interior of which can be
viewed online displaying hazmat labelled chemical tanks. As
moisture in the atmosphere clings to these nano-particles, they can
then be heated up by ionospheric heaters to enable weather fronts
to be manipulated. To get a better understanding of the global
scale of such operations, it is advisable to research online satellite
images that show recognisable regions completely covered with
chemtrail streaks and the effect of them being re-directed.
Examples include the West coast of California being starved of
rainfall for long periods of time due to re-directing the cloud cover
away from the coast. As with Australia, the resultant forest fires are
linked to this targeted phenomenon.
However, from experience it is quite likely that most readers will
still dismiss the evidence provided, as regards the spraying of toxic
chemicals into the atmosphere on a global scale or the use of
ionospheric heaters. Therefore, to scientifically support the
undeniable observation of strange trails coming from jet airplanes
around the world, it is interesting to highlight some of the test
results from soil and air samples from various countries. Quoting
from ‘Under an Ionized Sky’:
By 1998, the Ontario Ministry of Environment, Canada, found

seven times the safe limit for aluminium in rainwater samples.
More and more citizens complained of sudden headaches, joint
pains, dizziness, fatigue, acute asthma, gastrointestinal pain,
coughs, and feverless flu symptoms.
254
Geophysicist J. Marvin Herndon, Ph.D. presents four sets of

experiments to back up his thesis that hazardous coal fly ash is
likely the principal aerosolized particulate sprayed in the
troposphere by jets for geoengineering, weather modification,
and/or climate alteration. Earlier, he’d compared water leach from
coal ash with rainwater and discovered eight elements in common,
especially aluminium-barium and strontium -barium ratios.
Rainwater samples in San Diego, California measured at least
thirty-percent aluminium, and in Chico and Alachua County,
Florida, he had high readings of barium, as well.
Francis Mangels, a 35-year wildlife biologist with the U.S. Forest

Service and soil conservationist for USDA’s soil Conservation
Service…. has collected rainwater revealing 2,020 times the normal
levels of aluminium, and the PH of his soil reads 7.4 instead of the
normal 5.6. Aluminium, a desiccant, sucks nutrients and moisture
from the soil and air and produces chlorosis (insufficient
chlorophyll for photosynthesis).
In an article from rense.com titled ‘Chemtrails - Shocking

Phoenix Air Quality Test Results’, written by Ted Twietmeyer, it
reveals test results from air samples taken in 2008:
Air was sampled through an air filter which operated

approximately four hours during the day and four hours after
sunset for twenty-eight days. The method used by the test
laboratory was defined as ‘ICP scan, inorganic analysis’.
Fig.1: In this chart we see that barium is 278 times higher than the
toxic health limits set by federal standards. Copper is 98 times the
toxic limit and manganese a staggering 5,820 times the toxic limit.
Fig.3: Here aluminium is a staggering 6,400 times the toxic limit.
Although physically lighter in weight than steel or other metals,
aluminium is still considered a heavy metal. Like teflon,
255
aluminium is very difficult to remove from the human body. It is

also well known that for unknown reasons, aluminium has been
found in higher than normal concentrations in the brains of
deceased Alzheimer's patients.
The well-known laboratory testing centre, the Carnicom

Institute, lists all kinds of results from air and soil samples. One
example concerning the alarming increase in aluminium found in
rain water is listed under the heading ‘Preliminary Rainwater
Analysis: Aluminum Concentration’ (2nd November, 2015). The
results state:
The current work, under these preliminary conditions and

examinations, leads to an assessment of a concentration level
estimate of aluminium (+3, ionic state) within the rain sample at
approximately 2.5 PPM. A conservative approach in all manners
of examination has been adopted in the preparation of this
estimate, and the condensing of the sample is accounted for.
The Environmental Protection Agency in 2012 lists the secondary
regulations for aluminium in drinking water as being within the
range of 0.05 to 0.2 mg/L. This corresponds to a range of 0.05 to
0.2 PPM for this same standard.… Continuing with the most
conservative approach possible, one is led to the assessment that
this particular rain sample from a rural location in northern Idaho
exceeds the EPA drinking water standard and health advisory by
roughly a factor of twelve.
As a starting point, we might wish to consider the role that
aluminium may play within a geoengineered environment, and it
may be worthwhile to look at the exothermic energetics of nano-
particulates of aluminium under exposure to moisture. It raises
some tantalizing prospects for additional capabilities of an induced
or artificial plasma state.
256
There is an abundance of test results available from laboratories

around the world. It seems that the main conclusion found is that
there seems to be a significant increase in the levels of aluminium,
barium and other metallic particles found in soil and air samples,
especially from areas where continuous geoengineering aerosol
spraying has occurred. Although beyond the scope of this book, for
anyone particularly concerned about being sprayed from above like
chemical crop sprayers, there is an even more shocking discovery.
In addition to toxic metallic nano-particles which are linked to
various illnesses, other artificial filaments have been widely
reported, known as morgellons. This rather worrying development
reveals unrecognisable nano-fibres, nano-tubes and carbon-silicon
fibres to have been found exiting from sores, toe nails or discarded
from the skin. The persons exhibiting such excretions are
unanimously from areas where excessive aerosol spraying has been
reported. There are many photos available online that reveal this
frightening anomaly. The existence of these nano-fibres found
leeching from human patients is highlighted in an article from
nature.com titled ‘Nanoparticles in the Brain’ (2004) by Jim Giles:
Chemtrails carry polymers as well as conductive metals and

crystalline substances. We are breathing and ingesting polymers
and polyethylene-silicon-carbon nano-fibres and nano-wires that
can house and/or piggyback combinations of pathogens, blood
cells, sedatives, and nano-particulates programmed to be
microprocessors and sensors – all of which pass into our blood and
bypass the blood-brain barrier.
Not much seems to happen in this world by accident, so when

relating the consistent reports of increased levels of aluminium in
air and soil samples, as well as the brains of Alzheimer sufferers,
257
the Luciferian hierarchy seems to be closely linked. The leading

chemical company Monsanto has not only been pinpointed as
providing chemtrail spray ingredients but has coincidentally also
acquired the patent for aluminium-resistant GMO seed!
In addition to poorer air quality, increased recorded illnesses
and manipulated rainfall or droughts, it is also likely that
geoengineering is the true cause of climate change. Rather than
blocking out the sun’s rays, which is the excuse for solar radiation
management, it seems the blanket of metallic particles is being
heated up then actually trapping the heat beneath it, causing
temperatures to rise. This is explained by the Carnicom Institute in
an article titled ‘The Theft of Sunlight’ (25th October, 2003):
Rather than reducing the temperature of the earth and lower

atmosphere, the aerosol operations commonly have the opposite
effect of increasing temperature and aggravating, if not inducing,
drought conditions. This is a result of a combination of factors,
including the specific heats of the elements involved as well as the
hygroscopic properties of the aerosols. Physical and chemical
analysis of the aerosol dynamics will lead to the expected
observations of increased temperature, decreased moisture and an
increase in winds.
This is confirmed in an article titled ‘Geoengineering is the

Primary Cause of Global Climate Change, Not CO2’ posted on
themillenniumreport.com, stating that:
The globalists who are behind this unrivalled ruse have spent
billions trying to convince humanity that their (each individual’s)
carbon footprint is to blame for the climate chaos. No one denies
that much more CO2 is generated by an industrial civilization.
However, compared to the ongoing and incessant chemtrail
258
operations conducted around the globe, the real anthropogenic

culprit would be geoengineering, not industrial operations and/or
energy consumption.
The geoengineers have pushed the edge of the envelope with their
atmospheric manipulation in ways that are now having a
tremendous influence on worldwide weather patterns. The longer
term climatological impacts are likewise being seen and felt as
never before.
At the end of the day one firm conclusion will be drawn from the
current geoengineering paradigm. That any and all dramatic
changes, which have been observed regarding global weather
patterns, are directly attributed to the out-of-control chemical
geoengineering regime that now overlays much of the planet.
Planet Earth is being systematically geoengineered into a slow-
motion extinction level event.
A similar opinion is expressed in an article titled ‘Global

Warming is Reaching an Environmental Tipping Point’, originally
sourced from stateofthenation.com:
There is no greater threat to the biosphere, and therefore to

human life, than geoengineering.
The systematic utilization of chemtrails and HAARP to conduct
climate engineering will only produce the results expected from
any bad experiment gone awry. The problem, however, is that the
‘explosion in the lab’ is not limited to a university laboratory; this
ongoing geoengineering experiment will profoundly affect the
entire global atmosphere for generations to come.
The people who live under chemtrailed skies are guaranteed to
suffer from all the toxic side effects which are caused by the
indiscriminate, systematic, wide-area spraying of chemical aerosols.
The animal life and plant kingdom will likewise suffer varying
degrees of collateral damage.
259
Standing at the threshold of so much planetary transformation

ought to inspire humankind to respond in a manner that is both
responsible and collaborative; decisive and bold. Do we want to be
part of the problem, or part of the solution to this awesome and
quite challenging planet-wide predicament?
As more and more people become aware of what is going on,

the mainstream media has started to condition the bewildered herd
to accept the idea of spraying aerosols, rather than completely
denying that it exists. The excuse of replicating a volcanic eruption
or the urgent need to block out the sun’s rays seems to be the
proposed smokescreen. An example of which was in the UK’s
Independent under the title ‘Spray sun-blocking chemicals into
atmosphere to cut global temperature rise in half, scientists say’,
(12th March, 2019):
Liberally spraying aerosols into the air could even exacerbate

climate problems by tampering with rainfall in some regions. But
with rising concerns about the devastating impact of climate
change, experiments are already in the works to establish how
effective such techniques could be.
Another study that attempted to quantify the far-reaching impacts
of solar engineering published last year concluded it could be
‘remarkably inexpensive’ if existing planes are modified to drop
aerosols into the sky.
With full knowledge that the subject of geoengineering and

sprayed aerosols is something most people find too difficult to
comprehend it is hoped, at least, the reader will pay a little bit
more attention on heavy spray days. When the sky is particularly
full of thick criss-crossing lines emanating from the rear of
airplanes, take a few minutes to observe if the trails suddenly stop
260
and start. Similarly, take note of other planes flying at similar

altitudes that will seem almost invisible due to not emitting long-
lasting plumes behind them. The only way to stop such wanton
destruction of life on earth is for a critical mass of people to be
aware that it is happening right in front of their eyes.
It’s time to move on to the potential effects of another threat
from which there will be no escape; 5G radiation.
261
Chapter seventeen
5G and Everything Smart
The latest buzzword in the tech industry is the 5G ‘internet of

things’ (IoT). It sounds harmless enough and in fact, just seems to
be a natural progression from 3G then 4G internet speeds.
Providing greater bandwidth due to the saturation of its
predecessors, no doubt the gamers and smart phone addicted
youth will be queuing up in their droves to get the latest inter-
connected products that are set to become widely available.
However, as military grade technology, this newly marketed tool for
faster internet uses millimetre waves (mmW) which have
considerable health risks to all human, animal and plant life. In
‘Illuminati - Agenda 21’, author Dean Henderson gives a summary
of 5G and explains how intrusive it will become:
Known as the internet of things, 5G involves hundreds of billions

of microchips that will permeate our possessions, our homes, our
cars, our neighbourhoods and eventually our bodies.
262
There will be 5G transmitters on every block of every city

connecting this ‘smart grid!’ Alexa-type devices will monitor every
home. Your ‘smart phone’ will track your every purchase,
movement, discussion, emotion and thought …. Through
Facebook, they have learned and will now play upon your
weaknesses.
The Hunger Games have begun. And we will all become nothing
more than Maze Runners if we do not escape this net of
technology that has been cast upon us.
It seems that the Luciferian juggernaut is moving full speed

ahead by simultaneously introducing 5G around the world. Sold to
the masses in the name of technological progress, convenience and
greater connectivity, it is an essential component of the AI-
controlled, totally locked-down society that is envisioned by the
New World Order. 5G technology uses millimetre waves which do
not travel well through buildings or in areas where trees are
present. Such obstructions interfere with the signal. As a result,
antennas are required at much shorter distances, such as on every
lamppost and possibly on every home or business property. Despite
being known to soak up CO2 from the atmosphere, trees are
already being felled in densely populated areas ready for the roll-
out of this new technology. However, the real, hidden purpose
behind 5G is not to provide greater consumer access, it is to enable
machines to communicate with each other at lightning speed. This
all-encompassing grid controlled by Artificial Intelligence (A.I.), will
envelop everywhere and everything. There will be nowhere to hide
and nowhere to escape from the electromagnetic smog. This is
highlighted by Lloyd Burrell in an article titled ‘5G Radiation
Dangers – 11 Reasons to Be Concerned’ (15th January, 2020):
263
5G will break down data and send it in smaller sizes to offer

significantly reduced transmission times. Data will be sent with
only a one millisecond delay instead of a fifty millisecond delay
commonly found with 4G. With communication this fast, it’ll
allow machines to talk to each other with practically no room for
error. As Marcus Weldon the CTO of Alcatel Lucent comments,
‘up until now, we’ve designed the networks for people and their
needs, and now we’re designing it for things.’
It is interesting to note here the name ‘Alcatel Lucent’, from the

previous quote. Once again, international corporations linked to
the Luciferian hierarchy often display their allegiance in company
names and logos. This is highlighted in an online article titled, ‘On
Corporations and Products: Lucifer, Lucis and Lucent’, which
states:
Let us peruse just a few corporations, companies, products, etc.

which carry the variously termed name Lucifer, Lucis and Lucent…
They are simply different terms for the same thing, the same being.
Now, when corporations, companies, products use the term
Lucifer it becomes clearer that they mean business, as it were.
Whether talking about the Lucis Trust, Lucent Medical Systems

or the LUCIFER instrument located next to the Vatican’s
telescope in Arizona, it’s not difficult to see their association with
the hidden masters of the historical plot. Referring back to the
previous article, author Lloyd Burrell continues:
Given what we already know about the links between serious

diseases, including cancer and cell tower radiation from the
existing cellular network, there is cause for concern.
264
5G will use pulsed millimeter waves to carry information. But as

Dr. Joel Moskowitz points out, most 5G studies are misleading
because they do not pulse the waves. This is important because
research on microwaves already tells us how pulsed waves have
more profound biological effects on our body compared to non-
pulsed waves. Previous studies, for instance, show how pulse rates
of the frequencies led to gene toxicity and DNA strand breaks.
In an article titled ‘5G Wireless Technology Is War against

Humanity’ from globalresearch.ca, UN staff member and whistle-
blower, Claire Edwards explains:
People’s first reaction to the idea that 5G may be an existential

threat to all life on Earth is usually disbelief and/or cognitive
dissonance. Once they examine the facts, however, their second
reaction is often terror.
We may have already lost eighty-percent of our insects to electro-
magnetic radiation (EMR) in the last twenty years. Our trees risk
being cut down by the millions in order to ensure continuous 5G
signalling for self-driving cars, buses and trains. Are we going to
stand by and see ourselves and our children irradiated, our food
systems decimated, our natural surroundings destroyed?
Expanding on the term the ‘internet of things’, an excellent

point of reference comes from the website whatis5g.info. Offering
a glimpse of what is already taking shape, right across society and
what will undoubtedly find willingness from the majority of people,
it explains:
The Internet of Things (IoT), as being marketed and sold to the

public, is a vision of connecting every ‘thing’ possible to the
Internet – all machines, appliances, objects, devices, animals,
insects and even our brains. In addition, the IoT will include
265
artificial intelligence (AI), augmented reality (AR), virtual reality

(VR), robots, micro-chipped humans, and augmented humans
(humans with some form of technology implanted or integrated
into their biology to ‘enhance’ human characteristics or
capabilities). IoT sensors and surveillance cameras will pepper our
communities as well. New IoT cyber physical systems will render
all objects ‘smart’ – i.e. connected to the Cloud – thus enabling
pervasive machine-to-machine (M2M) communications and
massive data collection and leaving us open to devastating cyber-
attacks.
Some tech-obsessed readers may think that such connectivity is

great. After all, they probably already have the latest smart
televisions which film and record everything they do in their own
homes then send the data back to a remote server. In addition,
such willing dupes may also have the very dark notion of an
electronic voice, such as Alexa, talking to their children in their
bedrooms and transmitting the conversations. However, in the
coming years every electric device will be connected to the same
A.I.-controlled world brain, currently known in ‘newspeak’ as the
Cloud. Marketing companies are already planning how to sell, to
the bewildered herd, the vital necessity for the latest inter-
connected gadgets such as smart fridges, door-bell cameras, digital
clocks, coffee makers, toasters, children’s toys and much more. All
of the data from these devices will be monitored by inbuilt sensors
and stored in huge databases, eroding far more personal privacy
than George Orwell could have ever imagined. This mass of
personal usage-data will be used by government, law enforcement,
industry and hackers; none of which serve the benefit of humanity.
The level of intrusion by big brother into every aspect of our lives
will far exceed Orwell’s fear of the telescreen in the corner of every
266
home. Dr. Devra Davis, President of Environmental Health Trust,

sums it up quite appropriately:
If you are one of the millions who seek faster downloads of

movies, games and virtual pornography, a solution is at hand, that
is, if you do not mind volunteering your living body in a giant
uncontrolled experiment on the human population.
At present, the only thing slowing down the roll-out of the 5G

smart grid, are concerns raised by decent human beings regarding
the potential health risks of such pulsed microwave radiation. The
website whatis5g.info introduces some of the potential health
impacts of 5G:
Every IoT ‘thing’, including robots, sensors, surveillance cameras,

and augmented reality, will increase our exposure to pulsed
microwave radiation – known to adversely impact both humans
and wildlife.
Before us looms perhaps the biggest health and environmental
crisis of our times, that of the proliferation of wireless technology.
The current soup of wireless radiation is effectively playing with
the genetic makeup of all life.
Whereas the lower frequencies travel through our bodies, the
higher mmW frequencies do not. With 5G frequencies, the outer
layer of our bodies will be affected – skin, eyes and testes.
In an article from radiationhealthrisks.com, titled ‘5G

Radiation Dangers – Get the Facts!’ it explains:
First of all, 5G cellular technology is dangerous because it emits

Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation. And it does so at ultra-high
frequencies and with ultra-high intensity, compared to earlier
technologies. The World Health Organization classified RF
Radiation as a possible ‘carcinogenic’ in 2011. And there are
267
literally hundreds of peer reviewed scientific studies linking ‘non-

ionizing’ RF Radiation to things like cancer, crib death, DNA
damage (especially in infants and foetuses) and male infertility.
A Bluetooth headset and the typical microwave oven use the exact
same RF Radiation frequency, 2.45 GHz. The difference between
one cooking you and one not is the amperage of the signal, or its
density. Cell towers around a town could do more damage to the
inhabitants of the town if the density of the signal is increased.
Theoretically they could either cook the town as a whole, or point
the energy at a specific person and cook them.
The Cellular Phone Task Force website lists many organisations

representing hundreds of doctors, scientists and specialists in
electromagnetic radiation. Regarding the dangerous effects of EMF
from the 5G matrix, it states:
Numerous recent scientific publications have shown that EMF

affects living organisms at levels well below most international and
national guidelines.
Effects include increased cancer risk, cellular stress, increase in
harmful free radicals, genetic damages, structural and functional
changes of the reproductive system, learning and memory deficits,
neurological disorders, and negative impacts on general well-being
in humans. Damage goes well beyond the human race, as there is
growing evidence of harmful effects to both plant and animal life.
Director of the ‘Center for Family and Community Health’ at

the University of California, Joel M. Moskowitz Ph.D., is one of
many concerned experts trying to raise awareness for the potential
dangers of 5G:
Millimeter waves are mostly absorbed within a few millimeters of

human skin and in the surface layers of the cornea. Short-term
268
exposure can have adverse physiological effects in the peripheral

nervous system, the immune system and the cardiovascular system.
The research suggests that long-term exposure may pose health
risks to the skin (e.g., melanoma), the eyes (e.g., ocular melanoma)
and the testes (e.g., sterility).
To summarise the potential health risks of 5G with a simple

example that anyone can relate to, an article from gaia.com states:
Many scientists understand that the electromagnetic radiation

leaking through the doors of our microwave ovens are
carcinogenic, and therefore, can cause cancer. Most of these
scientists also believe that these waves are mutagenic, meaning they
change the DNA structure of living beings.
The launch of 5G will be similar to turning on your microwave,
opening its door, and leaving it on for the rest of your life. There's
good reason why hundreds of scientists are taking action against
the wireless industry.
Coinciding with the introduction of 5G is the widespread

government and mainstream media push to promote and install
smart meters around the world. At this point it should be
mentioned that anything including the word ‘smart’ has nothing to
do with benefiting the individual but everything about increasing
profits and level of control by those pulling the strings. This
includes smart phones used for surveillance, tracking and data
collection, smart motorways to increase revenues, smart shopping
in supermarkets to reduce the number of paid staff, smart
televisions to monitor a family’s social life or smart meters to
monitor household patterns of consumption. Nothing labelled
‘smart’ has anything to do with benefiting humanity, rather the
opposite. To get the masses on board with these new control and
269
data-gathering systems that are an essential part of the planned

‘smart’ cities, the marketing spin is the usual pitch of – providing
greater efficiency or being essential for technological progress.
There may well be some form of initial cost benefit to lure in the
ignorant masses but in the long run the costs will increase, along
with a permanent reduction in privacy and liberty. All these smart
devices are a continuing tip-toe into a completely controlled,
monitored and locked-down society which is ruled over by a tiny
group of Luciferian psychopaths.
Unlike existing water, gas and electric analogue meters, the new
smart meters that are destined to replace them, all continuously
transmit information to a data-collection server. This would reveal
when there is nobody in the house or perhaps when there is a get-
together happening due to the increased consumption of services;
what time the kettle goes on in the morning, when the bath is filled
or bedroom lights go off, for example. This may sound trivial but
the data provided enables marketing companies to determine the
complete pattern of someone’s life, from the time they wake up, to
the time they go to bed. In ‘Under an Ionized Sky’, Elana Freeland
confirms this observation:
Smart meters are joined at the hip with the Internet of things.
Every plug-in and wireless appliance, every film you watch, whether
you are at home or not, your state of wakefulness or sleep, is
monitored, thanks to the ZigBee microchip in each smart meter
that wirelessly communicates from smart appliances to utility
poles, central utilities offices, police stations, and fusion centers.
And ZigBee chips have a kill switch.
A similar conclusion is reached by smartmetertruth.org in an

article titled ‘What is a ‘Smart Meter?’
270
Most Smart Meter battles are being fought around electric meters.
They are capable of automatically sending the information they
collect to the utility company. This might be okay if it only
happened once a month. It does not. If your house has a Smart
Meter, data about your electric use can be sent almost
continuously.
The problems are compounded because many Smart Meters
transmit this information wirelessly. The result is that you end up
with a radio transmitter device hanging on your house that
broadcasts bursts of high energy radiation carrying potentially
detailed information about what is happening inside your home.
Finally, there is the problem that the communication is not just
from your meter to the power company. The power company can
talk back to the meter and the meter can react to commands.
Ultimately this may include things like controlling devices within
your home or limiting the amount of electricity you can use.
When combined with personal social data that most people

have already willingly provided, via the likes of Facebook, there will
be very little that the Luciferian control matrix does not know.
This is described by Dean Henderson in ‘Illuminati – Agenda 21’:
The Facebook/Cambridge Analytica scandal gave us a glimpse of

how Facebook is being used as an emotional dossier gathering tool
on each individual for later use by DARPA in their 5G control
matrix. They are mapping everyone’s psyche to find out which
buttons to push when they hit the 5G switch and transform us all
into permanent reliable negative energy batteries for the roll-out
and acceptance of their Satanic New World Order.
As with 5G in general, there is rising concern about the health

risks posed by having smart meters installed in every home. With
more and more research linking mobile phone use to brain cancer,
271
an article titled ‘Nuclear Expert: Smart Meters 100x Radiation

Exposure of a Cell Phone’, by J.Hart, relates this to the forced
introduction of smart meters:
One smart meter exposes people to 100 times the microwave

radiation of a cell phone.
A website that specialises in electromagnetic frequencies,

emfrf.com, carried out research into the radiation effects from
smart meters. The results from this study are featured in the article
‘Exploring the Truth about Smart Meter Dangers & Health Risks’
(20th January, 2015) by Peter Sierck:
A large number of individuals have reported significant changes in

their health and well-being related to the installation of wireless
Smart Meters on their property. This has led to community
activism against the installation of wireless meters, with websites
and appeals to decision makers and politicians. The main
symptoms reported by individuals are: sleeping disorders,
insomnia, tinnitus (ringing in the ears), fatigue, nausea, dizziness,
irritability, listlessness, heart palpations, and changes in cognitive
behaviour.
The installation of Smart Meters is only the first phase. In the

second phase, individual appliances will communicate with the
Smart Meter. This provides information on when and how much
electricity a particular appliance utilizes.
With the installation of millions of Smart Meters, their repeaters,
and data transfer, the number of cellular transmitters is
dramatically increasing and changing our RF exposure and
environments. These fields do not occur in nature. In the second
phase, when our electrical appliances are talking wirelessly to the
272
Smart Meter, the RF levels and exposure to RF frequencies inside

our buildings can be raised.
A highly recommended documentary, concerning the dangers

of smart meters, called ‘Take Back Your Power’ has purposely been
made available for free viewing online. Directed by Josh del Sol, the
film reveals evidence that thousands of people have suffered health
problems immediately after a smart meter was installed in their
homes. In commenting on this documentary, Dr Mercola also
expresses medical concerns in an article titled ‘Must-See
Documentary Reveals Dangers of Smart Meters’ (5th August, 2017):
While largely unknown and rarely discussed, there's evidence to

suggest a significant percentage of the diseases we now face is
related to electromagnetic interference (EMI), so-called ‘dirty
electricity,’ and microwave radiation from cell-phones, routers,
portable phones, smart meters and more. In a nutshell, these kinds
of exposures impact your biology, specifically your mitochondrial
function, which we've now come to appreciate is at the heart of
virtually all chronic disease.
Sunlight is a natural or native form of electromagnetic frequency
(EMF), and this type of EMF exposure is not only healthy but a
vital part of maintaining healthy biology. Non-native or artificial
EMF exposures, on the other hand, do quite a bit of harm.
Another medical professional raising awareness about smart

meters is from the Harvard Medical School. A specialist in the area
of electromagnetic fields, the findings of Dr. David Carpenter are
described in an article titled ‘Harvard Medical Doctor Warns
Against Smart Meters’, written by Sarah Pope:
Dr. Carpenter adamantly insists that there is no evidence

whatsoever that smart meters are in any way safe for human
273
beings. He goes on to say that there is, in fact, ample evidence that
demonstrates ‘convincingly and consistently’ that exposure to
radiofrequency radiation (RFR) at elevated levels for long periods
of time increases the risk of cancer, damages the nervous system,
and adversely affects the reproductive organs.
The revealing information about the increased health risks due

to RF radiation exposure from smart meters, has not been
controlled as well as the Luciferian hierarchy would have hoped. In
some ways this should be seen as a ray of hope, that not every
newspaper reporter or bought middleman will always comply,
especially when their own families are at risk. When researching
the mainstream media there are articles voicing concern about
smart meters but seldom due to their serious risk to human health.
One such example is from the UK’s Telegraph, with an article
titled ‘Six Reasons to Say No to a Smart Meter’, (2nd August, 2017)
by Sam Meadows. At a first glance this would give the idea that
even elements within the mainstream media are capable of
expressing concerns about the health of the general public.
However, although interesting, the six arguments presented do not
once mention the health risks and rather concentrate on the
delayed roll-out or extra costs incurred by the consumer:
The Government had originally said that every household would

be set up with a smart meter by 2020 - and nearly seven million
have been installed so far - but in June the Government subtly
downgraded this requirement. Now every home will be ‘offered’ a
smart meter by 2020, with no obligation to take one.
Every household will, ultimately, pay for the new meter roll-out via
their bills. As energy companies are quick to say, this is one reason
why bills are rising.
274
Although 5G and ‘smart’ devices seem to be pushing the

boundaries of technology, the ultimate agenda of the Luciferian
hierarchy is to have smart control over the ultimate prize, the
human mind. It may sound like science fiction but the technology
is already being tested by the likes of insiders, Elon Musk and
Facebook. Known as the brain-computer interface (BCI),
thousands of electrodes are inserted into the brain via implanted
threads, enabling the transfer of information into and out of the
brain, eliminating the need for conversation to relay information.
If the television series, ‘The Bionic Man’ from the 1970s has
anything to do with predictive programming, then the idea of
‘trans-humanism’ is also part of the smart agenda to control the
human body. In ‘Trans-Evolution – the Coming Age of Human
Deconstruction’, Daniel Estulin also reveals the predictive
programming embedded in the movie Avatar:
The transhumanists have big plans for humanity. Their star-

studded goal is called ‘Project Avatar’ – human like robots
controlled via brain computer interface.
What’s fascinating is that David Cameron’s futurist film, Avatar
and our real world are almost identical. The elite plans and the
film’s storyline are too familiar to be a coincidence.
Trans-humanism fills people’s hopes and minds with dreams of

becoming superhuman, but the fact of the matter is that the true
goal is the removal of that pesky, human free will itself.
An article by Aaron Dykes, titled ‘United Nations Envisions

Trans-humanist Future Where Man is Obsolete’ (10th June, 2012)
summarises the Luciferian end goal for humanity:
275
At its heart, Trans-humanism represents an esoteric quest for

godhood among certain circles of the elite connected to Masonry,
occultism and science/technology wherein supposedly evolving,
superior beings ‘ethically’ replace lesser humans. This philosophy
is portrayed in the blockbuster film Prometheus, directed by Sir
Ridley Scott.
5G and everything smart signals the start of rolling out the

Luciferian New World Order control matrix. If past experience is
anything to go by, most people will ignorantly welcome it with
open arms. Assisted by mainstream media marketing, they will be
rushing to acquire the latest inter-connected electrical devices so as
to keep a pace with technology and their peers. Bought, no doubt,
primarily on credit, the bewildered herd will not only be increasing
usury payments to the Luciferian hierarchy but effectively walking
like irradiated lambs to the slaughter. Once again, to think that all
this is occurring as a natural progression in technological advances
is nothing but naïve. Nothing happens by accident and the smart
grid internet-of-things that will shortly engulf everywhere has been
well planned in advance by the Luciferian hierarchy.
It seems appropriate to finish this somewhat ominous chapter,
with a quote from the Luciferian manual on the historical plot to
take over the world and everything in it. In the Protocols 11:4,
written in the 1800s, it continues to reveal the true aims of the
hidden hand, stating:
The goyim are a flock of sheep, and we are their wolves. And you
know what happens when the wolves get hold of the flock?
276
Chapter eighteen
Numerology & Gematria
The use of numbers to conceal hidden meaning dates back to

the ancient Mysteries of Babylon. Known as the father of numbers,
Pythagoras also taught a select few how to interpret and decipher
secret coding revealed from numerology. This hidden knowledge
has been passed down through secret societies and remains revered
amongst Qabbalistic Freemasonry today. For those initiated into
the true meaning of numbers, prominent dates and times of events
are seen to be carefully planned to coincide with occult
numerological significance. At the top of the hierarchy of power,
the Luciferians are very knowledgeable of the mysterious
significance of numbers and therefore plan world events to happen
on precise dates of numerological importance. Even within their
organisational structure, the Luciferian hierarchy is structured on
the basis of specific powerful numbers. The number 13 is of high
importance to the occult elite, hence why there are the same
number of ruling bloodlines that make up the ‘Supreme Council
277
of 13’. It is no accident that the next tier on the hierarchical

pyramid is the ‘Council of 33’ or that Freemasonry has 33 degrees
of initiation. The ‘Committee of 300’ also reduces to the holy
number 3 which, in their eyes, represents the Pagan trinity of
Osiris-Isis-Horus. The secret annual meeting of Heads of State and
globalist corporations, known as the Bilderbergers, also have a core
of 39 members which are then broken up into separate meetings of
3 groups of 13 members. The 39 members answer to 13 members
of the Policy Committee, who in turn answer to the Round table of
9. None of this is by accident.
In ‘The Occult Power of Numbers’, W. Wynn Westcott writes:
Numbers are a key to the ancient views of cosmogony ... spiritually

as well as physically ... to the evolution of the present human race;
all systems of religious mysticism are based upon numerals.
The occult numbers that have specific esoteric meaning to the

Luciferian hierarchy are 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 and 33. Multiples of the
same numbers are also used due to what they believe bring
increased power, such as 22, 33, 39, 44, 55, 66, 77, 88 etc. When
these numbers are tripled, such as 666, 777, 999 etc they are
believed to have additional occult energy.
To give an everyday example, everyone has heard of 666, the
mark of the beast from the book of Revelation but few probably
know that it, coincidentally, happens to be the total of all the
numbers on a roulette wheel. The world-wide-web is accessed by
typing three times the letter ‘w’ which happens to equate to the
Hebrew letter ‘vav’ which has a numerical value of 6, hence giving
www=666. Similarly, the number of the beast is also apparent on
every barcode, for every product sold with such a label. Known as
the Universal Product Code, each pair of lines represents a
278
number. Two thin parallel lines represent the number six. When
viewed on every product barcode, there is an unnumbered six at
the beginning, an unnumbered six in the middle and an
unnumbered six at the end of the sequence of numbers, giving
666. You don’t have to be religious to understand that the
Luciferians are following their own biblical agenda, much of which
is hidden within numerical code. Revelation 13:17 states that:
And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or
the name of the beast, or the number of his name.
When inverted, 666 becomes the number to dial for the

emergency services, 999. The link between police chiefs and
Freemasonry is well documented; Masonic symbolism is even on
display in the form of the black and white chequered pattern on
police uniforms. In America, the emergency services number is
911, which will already be a familiar number due to being
conditioned into the psyche of everyone since September 2001.
The international dialling code for their adversary, Iran, just
happens to be the reverse of this, 119. Freemasons, and therefore
Luciferians, believe in duality, where something is always balanced
by the opposite or inverted form. The prevalence of the
combination 9 and 11 found in historical dates will be addressed
in more detail shortly.
Before looking at number combinations it is worth highlighting
the significance of some of the key occult numbers, including 3, 5,
7, 9, 11, 13 and 33. These numbers and their multiples will be
evident in almost all major world events that have occurred since
the Luciferians formed the Illuminati in 1776.
An article titled ‘Occult Numerology’ from the website
bibliotecapleyades.net states that:
279
In Freemasonry is embedded the core or the secret heart of the

occult mysteries, wrapped up on number, metaphor and symbol.
(Benjamin Crème)
The numbers 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 33 and all multiples of them have
esoteric meaning to the Brotherhood and are used in a variety of
ways. They are geometrically encoded in brand names and
encrypted in corporate logos. They are used as numbers of
councilmen, signatories, and important documents. Dates with
numerological significance are used to dedicate monuments, to
stage false flag events and to plan assassinations. Without fail, the
Brotherhood nearly always numerically or symbolically leaves its
fingerprint. By analyzing these sacred numbers and their
interrelationships, occult ideas/secrets begin to surface.
Such hidden numerology is evident in many corporate logos.

When the Macdonalds ‘M’ is rotated ninety degrees clockwise it
reveals a 13, as do the logos for Arby’s and Westell Corp. The
Windows computer logo, on further inspection, contains both the
numbers 13 and 33 and within Walt Disney’s signature logo can be
seen the number 666. Commencing with the analysis of the occult
number 13, the same previous article explains its significance:
Still mystically related to the 12, is the more arcane 13. 13 is the
12 around 1. There are 12 Jurors and 1 Judge. 13 is the master
with 12 disciples. 13 is the experiencer of the 12 signs of the
zodiac. There are only 12 months in the Gregorian sun calendar
but there are 13 months in the lunar calendar.
Hence every occurrence of the number thirteen, and likewise of

every multiple of it, stamps that with which it stands in connection
with rebellion, apostasy, defection, corruption, disintegration,
revolution, or some kindred idea. (E. W. Bullinger)
280
Alexander the Great ruled for 13 years and bought his horse
Bucephalas for 13 gold coins (then he died at 33). During the
Salem witch trials of 1692, 13 women were executed. When the
colonies were being setup, (New) York Rite Freemasonry had 13
degrees.
The original American flag had 13 stars and 13 stripes for the
original 13 colonies. Mason Pierre L’Enfant designed a 13 street
pentagram in the middle of Washington D.C. In 1913 the
criminal Federal Reserve was founded; it is composed of 12
regional banks dominated by the New York Federal Reserve Bank.
In 1933 they began printing bills with Illuminati pyramids and
Bohemian Grove owls on them. Those bills also encode the
number 13 repeatedly. There are 13 stars above the eagles head, 13
steps on the Pyramid, 13 letters in Annuit Coeptis, and 13 letters
in Et Pluribus Unim. There are 13 vertical bars on the shield, 13
horizontal stripes at the top of the shield, 13 leaves on the olive
branch, 13 fruits, and 13 numbers. In the Department of Treasury
seal on the front, there is a Free Masonic square, like the
compass/square on the Masonic seal and if you get a magnifying
glass, you’ll see there are 13 holes in the square.
Moving on to the number 33, the quote at the beginning of this

chapter from occultist Manley P. Hall has already alluded to its
relevance in numerology. In an article titled ‘Everything Changes at
33: Numerology & Occult Symbolism’ from dtss.us, the number
33 also has extremely high significance for the Luciferian elite:
At the Vatican there are 32 archways on each side of the courtyard

with a giant obelisk in the middle. The Pope’s cassock has 32
buttons and his head represents the 33rd. The United Nations flag
shows the globe divided into 33 sections encircled by olive
branches…. 33 is the highest degree of Scottish Rite Freemasonry.
281
…The Grand Orient de France of Freemasonry was founded in

1733. Harry S. Truman, a 33 degree Mason, became 33rd
President of the United States. In 1933, Adolf Hitler became
Chancellor of Germany…. Walt Disney was a 33rd degree
Freemason and Disneyland has a ‘Club 33.’ During WWII, 33rd
degree Winston Churchill gave us the ‘V for Victory’ two-finger
salute which since the 60s became ‘Peace.’ Before it stood for
Victory or Peace, it was a symbol of the 33rd degree. There are 3
joints to the knuckle on two fingers making 33 then held apart like
a V is about 33 degrees.
Mount Hermon is at 33 degrees latitude and longitude. In the
Book of Enoch, Mount Hermon is the place where the Grigori;
‘Watchers, Sons of God or the Nephilim,’ descended to Earth….
All the pyramids in the world are on the 33rd parallel…. The
ancient city of Babylon was very near the 33rd-parallel while
modern Baghdad is on the 33rd parallel.
In ‘Masons and Mystery at the 33rd Parallel’, author Day

Williams states:
If a life is taken close to the northern 33rd Parallel, this fits with
the Masons’ demonic mythology in which they demonstrate their
worldly power by spilling human blood at a predetermined locale.
It just so happens, that President John F. Kennedy was

assassinated on the 33rd Parallel. While his motorcade was re-
routed into Dealey Plaza, the site of the first Masonic temple in
Dallas, it arrived at a triangular (pyramid) road formation, known
as the grassy knoll, where he was shot from multiple angles.
Coincidentally, it occurred on the 22/11/1963, revealing occult
numbers of 22 and 11 which also add up to 33. Furthermore, his
death was recorded at 12:22 (222). In ‘Tavistock Institute’ by
Daniel Estulin, he describes the assassination as a ritual killing:
282
The JFK killing was a ritual slaying, what is known in the world of
the occult as ‘the killing of the king’…. To understand the
Kennedy assassination and place it within the realm of Tavistock
mind control, secret societies, One World conspiracy and Nazi
occult, you must open the doors of perception into a nether world
of the unknown by changing the way we look upon the details and
the fantastic convergences of life…. The ultimate purpose of John
Fitzgerald Kennedy’s assassination was not political or economic
but sorcerous.
The systematic arrangement and pattern of symbolic things having
to do with the killing of Kennedy, indicates that he was a scapegoat
in a sacrifice. The purpose of such macabre ritualism is further
recognizable in patterns of symbolism culminating in the final
‘making manifest all that is hidden’.
Concerning the charade of world politics, it is also interesting to

note that the new Israeli Supreme Court building, designed and
paid for by the Rothschilds, has 33 steps leading up to what looks
like an all-seeing eye embedded in a pyramid. Like Freemasonry,
the first 30 steps lead up to the light but it is only on reaching the
upper 3 levels that illumination occurs. Quite bizarrely, the
parliamentary building in Tehran is built like a pyramid and
adorning the side are 33 windows, 13 of which are located higher
than the rest.
Moving on to the significance of the number 11, one of
history’s greatest Satanists, W. Wynn Wescott, who was particularly
influential in the latter part of the nineteenth Century, wrote:
.... so 11 is the essence of all that is sinful, harmful, and

imperfect…. Thus, while 11 is very important, multiplications are
also important, such as 22, 33, 44, 55, 66, 77, 88, and 99.
283
The number 11 seems to keep appearing in prominent dates.

To give a few examples, the Euro was first introduced on 1/1/1999
(111 and 999), in 11 countries. The Fukishima nuclear disaster,
which some believe was linked to an earthquake induced by
HAARP, occurred on 3/11/11 and Osama Bin laden was
supposedly killed on 5/2/2011 (5+2+2+1+1=11). The Madrid
bombings took place on 11/3/2004 (3+1+1+2+4=11), where 191
were reported as dying (1+9+1=11) and it just happens to have
occurred exactly 911 days after the attacks in New York. George W.
Bush presented the 10,000 page Patriot Act before Congress just
11 days after September the 11th. As for corporate logos, Bank of
America’s new logo consists of three 11s forming the shape of the
U.S. flag: (11 11 11 =33).
Having looked at some of the more important occult numbers,
the combination of 9 and 11 seems to have specific relevance.
Among the ranks of the Luciferian elite, their members from secret
societies follow a Qabbalist philosophy which links to the esoteric
numerological coding passed down from the ancient Mysteries of
Babylon. Part of this symbolism is encoded in the Qabbalist ‘Tree
of Life’. The diagram below reveals that within this revered
schematic, the Roman numerals for 911 can be seen. This may
provide one reason why so many important events seem to occur,
or are planned, on this date.
284
In ‘Secret Teachings of All Ages’, author Manly P. Hall links the

Tree of Life with Masonic numerology:
Alchemy is a threefold art, its mystery well symbolized by a triangle.

Its symbol is 3 times 3 – three elements or processes in three
worlds or spheres. The 3 times 3 is part of the mystery of the 33rd
degree of Freemasonry, for 33 is 3 times 3, which is 9, the number
of esoteric man and the number of emanations from the root of
the Divine Tree.
There is an abundance of evidence available for anyone willing

to look which proves without any shadow of doubt, that the
mainstream narrative of what happened on 9/11 in New York is
false. For anyone that immediately dismisses this statement, please
take a short time to research about the third skyscraper that was
demolished on the same day as the twin towers. The 47-storey
building, known as Building 7, collapsed at freefall speed into its
own footprint, reportedly due to office fires alone. It is the only
steel framed building in history to have supposedly collapsed from
285
the effects of fire alone. This is the Achilles heel that reveals the
undeniable truth about the false flag attack which took place on
that fateful day, hence why it has been wiped from the mainstream
media coverage of the event. While on the subject of numerology,
the pre-planned destruction of the twin towers is awash with occult
numerological significance. Robert Howard, author of ‘Destruction
of the Trade Centers: Occult Symbolism Indicates Enemies Within
our own Government’, links the date of the attack on the World
Trade Center with historical Templar numerology:
The Templars were recognized at Clermont in 1118. 1+1+1+8= 11.

The authors of Holy Blood Holy Grail provided the definitive
evidence that there were 9 original founding Templars and they
first banded together in 1111 and taking no new members for 9
years. And this was the numerical basis for the 911's in this
tragedy.
The significance of 9/11 is also noted by an article from

atlanteanconspiracy.com (24th July, 2013), which continues:
So 9 Knights Templar banded together in 1111AD and

maintained the original 9 for 9 years. Centuries later on 9/11/19
the U.S. invaded Honduras and on 9/11/22 was the British
mandate in Palestine. On 9/11/41 was the ground-breaking
ceremony for the Pentagon, which would 60 years later be one of
the ‘terrorist’ targets. Then on 9/11/73, Salvador Allende of
Chile, the world’s first democratically elected Marxist president,
was overthrown by the U.S. in an admitted CIA-coup engineered
by Nixon, Helms, and Kissinger; the same Henry Kissinger that
was originally to head the 9/11 commission ‘investigation’ (cover-
up).
286
11 years before the 2001 attacks, on 9/11/90, President Bush gave

his State of the Union Address about the New World Order,
mentioning it several times. The next year on Sept. 11th he gave
another speech regarding a New World Order. Exactly 7 years
before 9/11 on Sept. 11th, 1994, just after 11pm, a single-engine
Cessna was stolen then flown into the side of the White House.
If all this just seems like coincidence, it is worth elaborating on

the numerological significance surrounding the worst ‘terrorist’
attack in modern history. The twin towers themselves are said to
resemble the Masonic pillars of ‘Boaz’ and ‘Jachin’, which were
names of the detached pillars in front of King Solomon’s temple.
Many researchers believe that the towers were built to represent the
second Solomon’s temple and therefore knowingly constructed
with their future destruction in mind. The third and final
Solomon’s temple is believed to be planned for construction in
Jerusalem, on the site of the current Al-Aqsa mosque.
The year before construction began on the WTC, Luciferian
insider David Rockefeller can be seen on the cover of Newsweek,
posing in front of the New York skyline displaying a watch with the
hands pointing to 9 and 11. Considering the occult numbers
previously highlighted, here are some more relevant numbers listed
on Wikipedia, a controlled website that is full of esoteric
numerology:
- The twin towers had 110 storeys (reduces to 11)
- WTC took 11 years to construct
- Building 7 had 47 storeys (4+7=11)
- The debris contained 2,500 contaminants (2+5=7)
- There were 18,000 victims of toxic dust (1+8=9)
- 31,900,000ft² of Lower Manhattan destroyed
(3+1+9=13)
287
- American Airlines Flight 11: (hit the North Tower)

- Flight 11
- 11 crew
- 76 passengers (7+6=13)
- It hit at 8:46am (8+4+6=18 reduces to 1+8=9)
- The North Tower collapsed after 102 mins (1+2=3)
- United Airlines Flight 175: (hit the South Tower)

- Flight 175 (1+7+5=13)
- 9 crew
- 56 passengers & hijackers (5+6=11)
- It hit at 9:03am (9+3=12 reduces to 3)
- South Tower collapsed after 56 mins (5+6=11)
- American Airlines Flight 77: (hit the Pentagon)

- Flight 77 (multiple of 11)
- 58 passengers and crew (5+8=13)
- United Airlines Flight 93: (Stoneycreek)

- Flight 93 (9+3=12 reduces to 3)
- 44 Crew and passengers (multiple of 11)
- Death toll of four planes 265 (2+6+5=13)

- Total death toll 2977 (2+9+7+7=25 reduces to 7 or
11,77)
- 67 Britons died (6+7=13)
- 70 Pentagon civilian deaths (reduces to 7)
- 55 Pentagon military deaths (multiple of 11)
288
- Of which 47 were Army civilian employees

(4+7=11)
- And 22 soldiers (multiple of 11)
- The Navy lost 3 civilians and 33 sailors (333)
- 1355 people died above the point of impact (13
and 55)
- On 22/12/2010 congress passed new health claims
legislation (221 221 rewritten as multiples
22,22,11)
- Signed into law on 2/1/2011 (21211 rewritten
22,111)
- In NYC 430,000 jobs were lost in the first 3
months (4+3=7)
If there does not seem to be enough occult numerical links to

the attack on the WTC in 2001, then perhaps it is worth
considering other significant events which happened (or were
orchestrated) on the date 9/11. The U.S. backed military coup in
Chile occurred on 9/11, 1973 and the Russian leader during the
Cold War, Nikita Khruschev, died on 9/11, 1971. The Berlin Wall
famously came down on 9/11, 1989 and stood for a total of 3,633
days (9 years, 11 months, 11 days). The length of the border
between West Berlin and East Germany is recorded as 111.9
kilometres (911 reversed). During the Munich games of 1972, a
supposed ‘terrorist’ attack happened on 9/11 of that year and 11
Israeli’s are reported as dying. The Iran hostage crisis ended on
19/1, 1981 (reveals two multiples of 9/11, one reversed) and lasted
444 days.
If all this just seems like coincidence, then it’s time to delve
deeper to reveal just how extensive numerological influence really
289
is. Although the repetition of lots of numbers may seem confusing

for some, the main thing to take from this is how often the same
occult numbers keep on occurring in important historical dates.
When deciphering dates for their numerological significance, the
most important aspect that can be manipulated for a certain event
is the time, day and month. Any number of double digits can also
be reduced further to a single number, such as 12 which reduces to
(1+2=3). The principle thing to note is whether there is a clear
indication of the main occult numbers or their multiples in the
time, day, month or geographical coordinates of an influential
event.
Taking some examples of prominent world events in recent
history, the end of WW1 is famously remembered on the 11th
hour, of the 11th day, of the 11th month (11,11,11). On January
30th 1933, Adolf Hitler was sworn in as chancellor (reduces to 13
and 33). The fire in the Reichstag parliamentary building that
started WWII happened on the 27/2/1933 (2+7+2=11 and year
33). Hitler’s supposed suicide, when a gunshot was heard in his
bunker, was reported as 3:30pm on 30th April, 1945 (333). The
first ever testing of an atomic bomb was at the Trinity nuclear
bomb site on the 16/7/1945 (1+6+7+1+9+4+5=33). The atomic
bomb in Hiroshima occurred on the 6/8/1945 (6+8+1+9+4+5 =
33), in a location that borders the 33rd parallel and was dropped by
a B-29 plane (2+9=11) called ‘Enola Gay’ which was flying its 13th
mission. The nuclear weapon used was called L-11 ‘Little Boy’ and
the obelisk memorial for Hiroshima was erected 33 years later;
taking note that obelisks are used by the Luciferians to mark
political or military dominance.
The Cuban missile crisis was marketed as 13 days to prevent
world war, while Kennedy gave his famous speech on 22nd October
290
1962, and was assassinated exactly 13 months, to the day,

afterwards. Former U.S. president, Ronald Reagan had an
assassination attempt against him at 3.30pm (33) on the
30/3/1981 (33), which would have seen George Bush Sr. become
president if he had died. Palestinian president Yassar Arafat died
on 11/11, 2004 (11, 11) at a recorded time of 03:33 UTC (333).
He was reburied according to Islamic law on 13/11 at 3am (13, 11,
3 also 3x13=39 and 3x11=33).
Pope John Paul I died on his 33rd day as Pope on 2/4/2005
(2+4+2+0+0+5=13), his death being reported at 21.37
(2+1+3+7=13). He was 85 years old (8+5=13). Pope Francis I was
elected on 3/13/2013 (3+1+3+2+0+1+3=13) at 7:06 (7+0+6=13).
Apollo 11 launched on 16/7/1969 (1+6=7 and 1+9+6+9=25=7
therefore giving 777), which in occult multiples symbolises the
heavens/sky/cosmos). Apollo 13 launched on 11th April, 1970 at
13:13 CST on its 13th mission. It passed at an altitude of 254km
(2+5+4=11) or equivalent to 137 nautical miles (1+3+7=11) and
was reported at a distance 400,171km from earth (4+1+7+1=13).
The Euro was introduced on 1/1/1999 (multiples 111 and 999)
in 11 countries. The one euro coin itself has 6 stars above, 6 stars
below and 6 pillars (666). A total of 7.4 billion notes (7+4=11) and
38.2 billion coins (3+8+2=13) were minted for the release date.
As regards other false flag ‘terrorist’ attacks (arguably all such
attacks), the London bombing is known as 777, the same name as
occultist Aleister Crowley’s book. There were also reportedly 52
killed (5+2=7), with an average age of 34 (3+4=7) and over 700
injured (7). The first two explosives were on a C77 stock train (77)
whereas the third train was number 311 (3,11) and exploded after
450metres (4+5=9) in carriage number 166 (1+6+6=13). The three
train bombs were detonated simultaneously at 08:50 (8+5=13). In
291
Tavistock Square the bus was number 30 (3) from fleet number
17758 (reveals 77 and 5+8=13). The explosion happened at 09:47
(9 and 4+7=11 therefore 9/11).
The Boston bombing false flag occurred on 666 Boylston Street
at 2:45pm (2+4+5=11) with two bombs recorded as 13 seconds
apart. 3 people died and 264 injured (2+6+4=12=3 therefore 33).
Perpetrators in false flag attacks are known as patsy’s. In this case,
the name Tamerlan Tsarnaev gematrically adds up to 13 along with
the name of his brother Dzhokhar Tsarnaev, which also equals 13.
The Brussels airport attack on 22nd March, 2016 (322 and
2+1+6=9) reveals a link to the secret society known as Skull and
Bones 322. The first explosion occurred at 07:58 (7 and 5+8=13)
and was located at check-in row 11. At 09:04 (9+4=13) Belgium
raised the terror status to its highest level. The Malbeek Metro
explosion occurred at 09:11 CET. The Metro was shut down at
09:27 (99). This attack took place 130 days (13) after a similar
attack in Paris that killed 130 (13).
These are just a few examples but the same hidden numerology
can be found within official times and dates from all so-called
‘terrorist’ attacks. This may all seem rather bizarre if the reader has
not come across this historical form of coding before. However, for
the Luciferian elite it is of vital importance, that is to say nothing
happens in the world without adhering to strict numerological
significance. This in itself reveals the undeniable hidden hand
behind major world events, all so-called ‘terrorist’ attacks, World
Wars, political milestones and any key moments in history that
have been orchestrated as part of the historical plot to control
everything and everyone.
In addition to written numbers, gematria is also used to encode
numbers within certain words or letters, as has been alluded to
292
previously in the names of the Boston bombers. Although

deciphering hidden Pythagorean numerology requires using the
original Greek or Hebrew text, modern Luciferians use numbers
allocated to letters of the Western alphabet so that the initiated can
reveal the hidden hand behind certain events, company logos, or
documents. An explanation of gematria from gematrix.org states
that:
Gematria or gimatria (Hebrew: , gēmaṭriyā) is a system of

assigning numerical value to a word or phrase, in the belief that
words or phrases with identical numerical values bear some
relation to each other, or bear some relation to the number itself.
The gematria of English provides the key to unlocking many of the
secret doctrines of the Freemasons and the true identity of the
greatest writer in the English language, William Shakespeare…. the
gematria coding of English has been one of the best kept secrets of
the English-speaking world.
English gematria is simply allocating the relevant number to the

letter in a word, such as A=1, B=2, C=3 etc up to 9 then repeated
through the alphabet. The total number for a given word can then
be reduced down to its single digit form. To give one example, at
the time of writing this chapter, the Coronavirus fear-mongering
campaign was working full-steam across all mainstream media
networks. Coincidence or not, the word Coronavirus just happens
to have 11 letters. In gematria, the sum total is 56, which reduces
to 11.
C=3, o=6, r=9, o=6, n=5, a=1, v=4, i=9, r=9, u=3 and s=1
(3+6+9+6+5+1+4+9+9+3+1=56 which reduces to 11)
Noticeable from just a single mainstream media article, the

total number of deaths that day had reached 56 (5+6=11),
293
simultaneously, as reporting that 56 million Chinese people

(5+6=11) in Wahun had been cordoned off. When combined, the
same headline contained three times 56, or 11,11,11. This is not so
difficult to coordinate when you understand that all media articles
get their numbers and facts from the same source.
It is also interesting to note that the notion of a deadly virus
emanating from Wuhan was written about by a best-selling author
in 1981. In light of what has previously been discussed concerning
predictive programming in the film industry, the similarities with
the coronavirus fear-mongering campaign is unmistakable. This is
presented in an article from zerohedge.com titled ‘Wuhan-400
Coronavirus: 1981 Novel Predicts Virus Origin’ (11th February,
2020) by Tyler Durden:
In a bizarre coincidence, a 1981 fictional novel The Eyes of

Darkness by Dean Koontz predicts a Coronavirus like outbreak
and its origin. The book talks about how the virus called Wuhan-
400, was developed in military labs around the Chinese city of
Wuhan from where it got its name. The top secret information of
the Biological weapons Program is later acquired by US
intelligence from a Chinese defector. The American military is
ultimately successful in creating a vaccine which the Chinese could
not.
When looking at the continuous use of the same occult

numbers, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 and their multiples in principle world
events, it could be argued that some examples just happen to be by
way of coincidence. However, when combined, the likelihood of all
the above examples being just a random occurrence is not
statistically possible. Therein lies the finger-prints of the Luciferian
hidden hand. Once aware of it, the numerological significance of
all future ‘terrorist’ attacks, major world events and prominent
294
political dates, will all conceal the same occult numbers. This
reveals to those in the know that the same hand of power was
involved. Once the esoteric becomes exoteric, or apparent to the
viewer, the occult power is eliminated.
To complete this chapter, the extent to which Luciferians
incorporate numerology into world events will be suggested by
giving an example of a different sort. It will be left to the reader to
consider whether the story of the 33 Chilean miners trapped
underground for 69 days was completely staged for public
distraction, based on the numerology embedded in the event.
Wikipedia states that the mine was located 45 kilometers (4+5=9)
north of The Copiapó and that the men were trapped 700 metres
(reduces to 7) underground, which was 5 kilometres from the
mine’s entrance. The mineshaft collapsed at 14:00 CLT (1+4=5) on
5/8/2010 (5+8=13 and 2010 reduces to 3). The completion of the
rescue was on 13/10/10 (13+10+10=33) and from the time of
drilling it took 33 days to retrieve all the miners. Each miner was
provided with a 5% glucose solution by doctors, although on
exiting they had lost an average of 18 pounds (1+8=9). 3 separate
drilling teams were incorporated in the rescue. At 08:05 CLDT
(8+5=13) on 9/1/2010 (9+1+2=1=13), the Schramm T13XD was
the first drill to reach the trapped miners. The shaft drilled to
lower the rescue device was 66cms in diameter (multiple of 11),
which enabled the 54cm diameter (5+4=9), 13ft tall capsule to be
lowered. From Wikipedia:
Golborne also indicated he expected only the first 100–200 meters

(330–660 ft)…. In the end, only the first 56 meters (184 ft) were
deemed to require casing.
Note: (100-200: 1+2=3)
295
(33 and 66 multiples of 11)

(5+6=11) and (1+8+4=13)
The name allocated to the rescue capsule was the ‘Fenix’

(Phoenix). Significantly, Manly P. Hall writes in ‘Secret of all Ages’:
In the Mysteries it was customary to refer to initiates as phoenixes

or men who had been born again, for just as physical birth gives
man consciousness in the physical world, so the neophyte, after
nine degrees in the womb of the Mysteries, was born into a
consciousness of the Spiritual world.
The suggestion that this whole event was more than just an
accident is highlighted by vigilantcitizen.com:
All aspects of the rescue have been carefully staged to make the
entire thing a spectacular show inspiring emotions, admiration
and national pride. For those knowledgeable of Masonic and
occult symbolism, it is hard not to ponder on the numerological
and symbolic facts of the event.
The name of the rescue device was named “Fénix” (Phoenix),
which is the bird that rose from its ashes. Once again, the selection
of the name Phoenix, a mythological creature holding a great
importance in occult mysteries, is quite interesting. The bird is
considered a symbol of accomplishment of alchemical
transmutation, a process equivalent to human regeneration.
To summarize the rescue event, 33 miners, who were trapped for
69 days in the depths and darkness of the underground were lifted
one by one, on 10/13/10 in a device called ‘Fenix’ – a creature
representative of occult initiation – to the light of day. As they say
‘Ex tenebris lux’: From darkness to light.
With these facts in mind, I’m asking you this: was the Chilean
Miner’s rescue a Masonic mega-ritual?
296
Adding to the suggestion that the whole event was staged as

some form of Masonic ritual, involving a re-birth from darkness
into the light of Lucifer, followed by resuming life as if being re-
born, it is interesting to note the following comment listed on
Wikipedia:
After the rescue, Dr. Rodrigo Figueroa, chief of the Trauma Stress
and Disaster unit of the Pontifical Catholic University of Chile,
said there were serious shortcomings in the censorship of letters to
and from miners' relatives above ground and in the monitoring of
activities they could undertake, as being underground had
suddenly turned them back into ‘babies’. Nevertheless, the natural
strength of ‘the 33’ kept them alive, and their natural organization
into teams as a response to disaster was also part of the innate
human response to threat. Figueroa went on to say that as the
miners' sound minds had seen them through, they would continue
to be tested as they resumed life above ground.
Finally, to top it off, on exiting the phoenix rescue capsule,

while wearing sunglasses because of the extreme light (Lucifer),
each miner was presented with a t-shirt to wear. It just happened to
display an inverted pentagram, possibly revealing under whose
control they had been reborn. Something to ponder!
From hidden associations, behind the allocation of numerical
values, it’s time to delve deeper into the glue that holds all
Luciferians together. As a fundamental part of the historical plot,
the Luciferian belief system has been cunningly marketed to the
bewildered herd in the form of the New Age movement.
297
Chapter nineteen
One-World Religion
The traditional monotheistic religions of Christianity and Islam

have become stale and boring. It is no longer commonplace, seen
as contemporary or looking towards the future, to be associated
with such stagnant belief systems. Religious curricula have been
withdrawn from the education system and all forms of mainstream
media now promote some form of New Age philosophy. In
transcending former barriers presented by a belief in a single God-
creator, humans are presented as evolving into a new consciousness
of truth and love, all joined as one with everything else in the
cosmos. There are those that adopt the belief in a former great
civilisation from Atlantis, others that look towards the New Age of
Aquarius or even extra-terrestrials, and some that seek
transcendental meditation to climb through their chakras to open
their third eye. There is now a prevalence of kundalini yoga,
spiritual healing such as Reiki, channelling of various kinds, those
that look to tarot cards, astrology or crystals, and a whole plethora
of other trendy New Age philosophies on offer. In an article titled
‘New Age and Occult Luciferianism’, author Jim Duke, includes:
298
Those who dabble in horoscopes, New Age, psychic phenomena,

channeling, Reiki, Intergalactic Cosmic consciousness, UFOlogy,
Alien Ascension, most likely follow the doctrines of New Age.
Included are also doctrines promoting a New Age peace, love, and
unity.
In ‘Eighteen New Age Lies – An Occult Attack on Christianity’,

author Robert Pye presents more information about some of the
New Age philosophies:
The path of Wicca is nothing more than traditional demonic

witchcraft presented in a sugar-coated form, while the various
Angel cults, which are so popular among New Age followers, are
all designed to bring their practitioners under the influence of
demonic entities in the guise of angelic beings. Reiki is presented
as an Oriental healing modality, when in fact it is an initiatory
path whose practitioners channel an occult force that is potentially
harmful.
The founder of Scientology, Ron Hubbard, was a practising

Satanist and tried to raise powerful demons through a series of
ceremonial magical rites that he conducted with the famous
Satanist, Jack Parsons. Parsons himself studied magic under the
most notorious black magician of the 20th Century, Aleister
Crowley.
Both ‘A Course in Miracles’ and ‘The Power of Now’ – both of

which are strongly promoted by celebrities such as Oprah Winfrey
– are profoundly occult…. The ‘god’ of both ‘A Course in Miracles’
and ‘The Power of Now’ is Lucifer.
The most zealous followers, who practice meditation,

contemplation, creative visualization or ‘spiritual’ healing, are
299
going even further and exposing themselves to supernatural

influences which are demonic in origin and potentially very
dangerous…. It might be helpful at this stage to make some
additional points of a general nature regarding the occult. By
various arcane means, all of its practitioners are trying to
manipulate The Force. Those who work at ‘white’ magic, as they
call it, are focusing on the Luciferian or light side of the Force,
while those who practice black magic are working with the darker,
Satanic element. However, spiritually it is all magic and all
harmful. There is no such thing as ‘white’ magic, just magic.
Most of these New Age belief systems offer a higher

achievement or destination for mere human mortals, whether it is
through re-incarnation, the prospect of evolving into a higher form
of consciousness or providing a feeling of inclusion and worth in
the greater universe. An article titled ‘New Age Religions’ posted
on majorreligions.com states that:
New Age spirituality is characterized by an individual approach to

spiritual practices and philosophies, while rejecting religious
doctrine and dogma. It combines aspects of cosmology, astrology,
esotericism, alternative medicine, music, psychology, and
philosophy.
The New Age Movement includes elements of older spiritual and
religious traditions ranging from atheism and monotheism
through classical pantheism, naturalistic pantheism, and
panentheism to polytheism combined with science and Gaia
philosophy. In many ways, elements of psychology and philosophy
play a major role in its belief systems — existential philosophy and
jungian psychology in particular.
As the quote at the beginning of this chapter wisely states, there

is something for everyone in the wide-ranging options of New Age
300
spiritual association. Even the word religion, has been cleverly

omitted amongst most New Age societies or denigrated to implying
something antiquated and negative. Instead, it is replaced by
positive, fashionable sounding names such as spirituality,
transcendentalism, cosmic one-ness or higher consciousness.
Whether talking of Karma, the Law of Attraction, ego, spiritual
healing, the worship of mother earth (gaiaism) or a focus on mind,
body and spirit, they all incorporate the New Age philosophy. In
effect, they are all elements of a new religion designed to replace
the historical notion of a God-creator. Wikipedia describes this
New Age religion as follows:
New Age is a term applied to a range of spiritual or religious beliefs

and practices that developed in Western nations during the 1970s.
Precise scholarly definitions of the New Age differ in their
emphasis, largely as a result of its highly eclectic structure.
Although analytically often considered to be religious, those
involved in it typically prefer the designation of spiritual or Mind,
Body, Spirit and rarely use the term New Age themselves. Many
scholars of the subject refer to it as the New Age movement,
although others contest this term and suggest that it is better seen
as a milieu or zeitgeist.
The New Age theology ultimately makes man the new god. On
this evolutionary path to godhood, it is man’s progression into a
more spiritual being which will ultimately become divine.
Accompanied with this is the notion of global unity, where
everyone and everything is interconnected. This is described on
allaboutspirituality.org as:
The principles of evolution are constantly moving mankind toward

god-consciousness, where man and reality connect in unified
301
enlightenment…. Evolutionary Godhood means that mankind will

soon see itself as god. This is often referred to as the ‘Christ
principle’ or ‘Christ consciousness.’ New Age teaches that we are
basically good and inherently divine, and ultimately, we can create
our own reality.
Since man is divine by nature, all people can realize their ‘divinity’
and contribute to the unified purpose of man, earth and nature.
The ultimate goal in life is to fully realize our own divine goodness.
The New Age god is impersonal and omnipresent…. There is no
objective morality in the New Age philosophy. We should have
tolerance for all systems of truth, meaning and purpose. We
should create a world of pure relativism, where morality and
religion are strictly relative to each person's individual notion of
reality itself.
In New Age understanding, mankind is central. Humans are
considered to be divine, as co-creators, and as the ultimate hope
for the future of the world.
In direct accordance with the beliefs held at the higher levels of

Freemasonry, the New Age doctrine promotes man becoming
divine under the force of Lucifer. In ‘Ecumenism and New World
Order’, an article posted on truthinresality.com, it states:
The god of the New Age (i.e. Lucifer) is the supposed illuminator
of mankind, and is taught to be a ‘force’ that can be used for good
or evil. Lucifer is regarded as having a dark and a light side.
Therefore, the contrast of black and white forms a common theme
for secret symbols of the New Age.
Within the New Age Movement it is believed that man can
communicate and draw power from the spirit world, and step
outside the limitations of the human body. The New Age is seen
as a step in man’s evolutionary development towards mastering the
spiritual dimension. The greatest spiritual power is seen as being
302
available when mankind around the world is united and one with
nature. New Age teaching denies a personal and sovereign God.
Man is not accountable, and there is no ultimate arbiter of what is
right or wrong, apart from oneself; for it is believed, like in
Freemasonry, that man can become god.
Historically, the term New Age was used as early as the 1800s by
the likes of William Blake as well as a Freemason journal adopting
the same name. However, postmodern spread of New Age
philosophies really started to expand from the 1970s. According to
Wikipedia:
Prominent esoteric thinkers who influenced the New Age include

Helena Blavatsky and Carl Jung…. A further major influence on
the New Age was the Theosophical Society, an occult group co-
founded by the Russian Helena Blavatsky in the late 19th century.
In her books Isis Unveiled (1877) and The Secret Doctrine (1888),
Blavatsky claimed that her Society was conveying the essence of all
world religions, and it thus emphasized a focus on comparative
religion.
Author Robert Pye describes the carefully planned origin of the

New Age movement in the eighteenth century. Known as the
‘Great Work’, its intention was to bring about the demise of belief
in a single God, paving the way for a new religion. In ‘Eighteen
New Age Lies – An Occult Attack on Christianity’, he writes:
Witches, Masons, Rosicrucians, Cabalists and other leading

practitioners of the occult decided in the late 18th century that, if
they were to increase their influence in society, they would have to
present their beliefs in a disguised form. So they formulated a plan
known as the Great Work.
303
The Great Work led to many innovative ways of spreading occult

ideas. These included hypnotism (or Mesmerism), spiritualism
(séances), the Theosophy of Helena Blavatsky, the Anthroposophy
of Rudolph Steiner, Wicca, Darwinian Evolution, Freudian
psychology, the Society of Psychical Research, and the endowment
of academic chairs to investigate the paranormal.
The plan also included a broad attack on mainstream Christianity.
Protestant men were lured into joining the local Masonic lodge,
generally on the pretext that it would improve their social standing
and business connections.
The result of this historical, multi-pronged attack on

monotheistic religion is what we now know as the New Age
movement. The array of New Age belief systems were designed to
sound attractive, inclusive, forward thinking and viewed as more
fashionable than the out-dated nature of standing in a church isle
praying to the God of the Old Testament. As far as marketing
campaigns go, by encompassing anything and everything that
excludes God, in a youthful, modernistic, enticing way, it has
rebranded various elements of what has effectively become a new
religion. The New Age movement encompasses all kinds of belief
systems, one of which is potentially appealing to almost everyone.
On this matter, Robert Pye writes:
The New Age movement is actually a cohesive network of groups

and organisations working toward a common goal…. Much of it is
dressed up in attractive attire and made to seem very cute and very
logical. While the various groups and organisations may appear to
have sprung up spontaneously in various countries and at different
times, with no obvious connection, they are actually part of a
single plan. Most New Age groups are funded, at least initially, by
Masonic financiers and other wealthy practitioners of the occult.
304
In returning to the principle notion of this book, it is

interesting to investigate how the New Age belief system fits into
the historical plot to rule the world. It has already been well
established that the hierarchy of power is controlled by just
thirteen bloodlines, which, alongside other associates lower down
the pyramid of control, are joined together by the principle uniting
factor of being Luciferians. This links back to the root of the New
Age movement, which was originally expressed as being openly
Luciferian at its core. More recently, due to the negative association
of Lucifer with the Devil or Satanism, the use of the name
Luciferian, has been concealed within other New Age terminology.
Jim Duke goes on to say:
The teachings of New Age mask the emphasis on the name of

Lucifer. Instead other attributes are given to him, such as light,
love, cosmic energy, and Christ Consciousness. Other names are
used that are manifestations of Lucifer, such as Lord Maitreya and
Sanat Kumara, Christ, Messiah, and even God.
What many do not realize is that Blavatsky was a Luciferian. She

openly declared that Lucifer was her god. Alice Bailey also
proclaims the same, as her agency was originally called ‘Lucifer
Publishing’ before changing its name to ‘Lucis Trust.’ The
connections are obvious. And disciples of her movement, Marilyn
Ferguson, David Spangler, Benjamin Creme, and others believe
the same.
David Spangler once had a post in the United Nations as Director

of Planetary Initiation, which he developed policies that would
steer towards Luciferian Doctrine. In his own writings he stated
that no one will enter the New Age without a Luciferic Initiation.
305
Evidence of this post was once displayed on U.N. literature and on

their website but since has been deleted.
Although the Luciferian philosophy has been embedded into

the various elements of the New Age movement, it seems that as
the hierarchy of power grows in confidence, they are once again
becoming bolder about mentioning Lucifer openly. This is evident
in the recent attempts to normalise the name Lucifer, including a
television series of the same name or even a heat wave that
scorched most of Europe in 2017. Quoting from the series
‘Lucifer’, it says ‘Bored of being the Lord of Hell, the devil relocates to
Los Angeles, where he opens a nightclub and forms a connection with a
homicide detective’. A similar observation is reached on the website
letusreason.org, stating that:
Secret initiations have always been part of the occult but what was
once hidden is now open. New Age leaders have gone public since
1975 have for over 20 years admitted that it is Lucifer, called both
the Solar God and Solar Logos, is whom the New Age actually
serves.
The highest degree in freemasonry 33 brings one to the
illumination realization that Lucifer is actually God the one who
brings light and Adonai the God of the Bible is not the true god.
Clearly the Lucifer of this movement that wants to unite all
religions is the basis of operation for theosophy, Masonry,
Rosicrucianism, Bahai and numerous other false philosophies.
As previously mentioned in this book, the ultimate aim of the

Luciferian hierarchy is a tyrannical New World Order, with a One-
World Currency and a One-World Religion. In order to achieve a
single, Luciferian world religion, all monotheistic religion must
first be abolished or willingly replaced by something marketed to be
306
more attractive and all-encompassing. It must be fit for the new

‘Age of Reason’ which is inscribed in the Georgia Guidestones.
The entire New Age movement reveals, yet again, the hidden hand
of the Luciferians as part of their historical plot to rule the world
and everyone in it. This is confirmed by Albert Pike, former Grand
Master of Scottish Rite Masonry, in a letter to Guiseppe Manzini
(1871):
….the multitude, disillusioned with Christianity, whose deistic

spirits will form direction and leadership, anxious for an ideal, but
without knowledge where to render its adoration, will receive the
pure light through the universal manifestation of the pure doctrine
of Lucifer, brought finally out into public view, a manifestation
which will result from a general reactionary movement which will
follow the destruction of Christianity and atheism, both
conquered and exterminated at the same time.
To clarify, it is important to note that Luciferians do not see

themselves as being Devil worshippers or Satanists. To fully
understand the mind-set of the Luciferian hierarchy, it is necessary
to comprehend their religious philosophy. As often is the case,
people immediately switch off when it comes to religion. However,
as previously stated, you don’t have to be in any way religious to
acknowledge that the Luciferian elite are as devout in their beliefs
as any Christian preacher or Muslim cleric. As bizarre as it may
seem, they believe Lucifer to be the real, good God, fighting on the
side of humanity against Adonai, the evil God of the Old
Testament. This is explained in greater detail by Jim Duke:
New Age Luciferians deny that Lucifer is the same being as Satan.
Which is why they deny that they believe in Satan. And they
believe that Lucifer gives them illumination, power and life.
307
In New Age doctrine, Lucifer, who is the Light Bearer, came from
Venus to free man from the corruptness that was done by Adonai.
In their account, Lucifer is the good God and Adonai (Yahweh
God) was the impostor who bound man from becoming gods.
They believe that Atlantis was the first epicenter of the earth and
that Adonai was jealous of their freedom and destroyed the earth.
Lucifer was the giver of life to man.
This is confirmed in an article titled ‘Luciferianism: The False

Light Bearer’ by Marcia Montenegro (12th October, 2019):
Luciferians are different from Satanists in that they see Lucifer as a

true ‘angel of light’ and deny that he is the devil. Luciferianism
makes a distinction between Satan and Lucifer, believing that
Christianity turned Lucifer into the evil character called Satan.
Theosophists were/are Luciferians. Some of the early spokespeople
of the New Age movement, like David Spangler, were/are
Luciferians (Spangler is still alive).
Luciferianism is closer to New Age Neo-Gnostic beliefs than to
Satanism, since it claims to value good. Satanism, in contrast,
derides the idea of seeking what society considers good. So valuing
the idea of good is Luciferianism but not classic Satanism.
What most Christians fail to realise is that the hidden hand that
rules the world do not believe in the Devil or Satan, as they would
like to believe. They are Luciferians. As Albert Pike famously said,
their god is Lucifer, referring to the bright shining light, a force for
good trying to save humanity from the all-powerful but negative
God-creator, who they refer to as, Adonai. This leaves a typical
dichotomy based on each side’s faith. Both sides could argue that
they are right and the other wrong, as is the case with all religions.
From this perspective it is just down to one’s personal belief
system. However, there is one very big influencing factor that could
308
sway this argument. If the Luciferians are really the followers of the
true god that is fighting on behalf of humanity then this will surely
be apparent from the fruits of their actions.
If monetary theft from the system of usury, contamination of
the food chain with pesticides, nitrates and GMO, poisoning of the
water with toxic fluoride, spraying poisonous chemicals into the air
we breathe, polluting the human mind with broadcasted lies,
pornography and gender questioning, or treating sick people with
addictive, mind-bending pharmaceuticals is just a taste of the fruit
of the Luciferian historical plot, then the reader can decide if these
constitute good or bad attributes. It seems that the Luciferian god
aspired to by the hierarchy of power or as Bob Dylan described in
an interview as, the ‘Commander-in-Chief’, seems to reveal his true
colours by the fruits of the historical plot. However, no-one can tell
any religious zealot, whether Christian, Muslim or Hindu, that they
are wrong. In the same way it seems quite likely that Luciferians
would not accept the truth if confronted with the evidence. After-
all, nobody likes to accept that they have been duped.
When it comes to researching the truth about how a small elite
group want to control the whole world and everything in it, due to
the mainstream media being completely controlled by the same
hidden hand, the truth-seeker is left to discern what is right or
wrong from an abundance of alternative media sources. However, a
common pitfall is to be drawn in by revelations of the truth, only
to be led down some form of New Age rabbit-hole or other.
Probably the most vocal and well-known New Age philosopher that
purports to be seeking the truth, is David Icke. Although previously
known to have called himself the son of god, while claiming the
Queen to be a shape-shifting reptilian, the principle focus of his
books and website relay the message of cosmic one-ness, infinite
309
self, and all-manner of other New Age terminology. Even the title
of one of his books ‘Infinite Love is the Only Truth. Everything
Else is Illusion’ is the precise quote from an online blog associated
with the Ryde Masonic lodge on the Isle of Wight where he resides.
David Icke, whether unwittingly or not, is one of the greatest
modern-day proponents of the Luciferian doctrine. Unfortunately,
as a very charismatic speaker, he has led thousands of people
seeking the truth towards his New Age Luciferianism. In addition,
he has no doubt convinced his two sons to adopt the same
Luciferian belief system. Maybe when he passes away on his cosmic
path somewhere in the Universe, possibly bumping into members
of the Luciferian hierarchy along the way, his sons will be free of
his New Age baggage, enabling them to discern the truth for
themselves.
Running parallel with the invention of the New Age movement,
the historical plot also employs another tactic towards its goal of a
One-World Religion. Known as the ‘Ecumenical Movement’, it
aims to blend all existing religions into one. In ‘All Roads lead to
Rome’, author Michael de Semlyen writes:
The aim of the ecumenical movement is to achieve one world

communion; to bring all churches, denominations, and ultimately
all religions together…. The term ‘oikoumene’, used many times in
the Old Testament means ‘the whole world’.
An article by Alan Vincent, posted on clarionsound.com titled

‘The Ecumenical Movement and The One World Religion’
explains:
The Ecumenical Movement is the driving force behind the

formation of a one world religion. It seeks to unite all ‘religions’
on the basis that they all allegedly worship the same God. This is
310
disingenuous and what I consider to be demonic sleight of hand; a

doctrine of demons. The driving force behind the formation of a
one world religion is that society has rejected the laws of God, and
now worships a false god – Satan – the Prince of this world.
The creation of a one world religion is an oxymoron. It is
ridiculous to believe that all religions represent truth or that they
all worship the same god. Religions are distinguished by their
teachings and the distinction between their teachings form the
basis of their existence. Clearly, different religions describe the
different deities they worship or serve. If this were not the case,
only one religion would exist on the earth.
The reality is that the Roman Catholic Church is the spearhead of
the Ecumenical Movement. The Vatican has always sought to
assert its authority over the Christian church, and has a long
history of embracing paganism. Rather than seeking to
Christianise pagans, Catholicism seeks to paganism Christians.
To bring about a One-World Religion, the Luciferian hierarchy

has steadily infiltrated all religious institutions. By putting in place
their own false prophets at the head of each faith, they are
continuing to destroy all monotheistic institutions. Ecumenism is
the process of blending all religions into a single melting pot of
belief systems, so that they no longer retain the principle belief in
God the creator. One of the most renowned Christian preachers of
modern times has been Billy Graham. Holding rallies for tens of
thousands of devotees, he has single-handedly steered the direction
of the Christian church towards pagan-based Ecumenism. In ‘All
Roads lead to Rome’, it continues:
In 1981 Billy Graham described the Pope as the greatest moral

leader of the world and the world’s greatest evangelist. Dr
Graham’s enthusiasm for close working with the Roman
311
Catholicism has been a very influential factor in the advance of

ecumenical unity in the 80s…. In an interview with US News and
World Report in December 1988, Dr Graham said: ‘World travel
and getting to know the clergy of all denominations has helped
mould me into an ecumenical being’.
What most Christians probably do not realise is that Billy

Graham was a 33rd degree Freemason and therefore a devoted
Luciferian. Selecting one source from an abundance of similar
documents, an article titled ‘The Billy Graham Deception – Is Billy
Graham a 33° Freemason?’ posted on endtimesdeception.com
states that:
It is by placing key 33rd degree Freemasons at the apex of political,

religious and economic institutions that their satanic goals can
succeed. Billy Graham has been selected and used by the
Illuminati to work to bring about a One World Global Church
based at the Vatican.
To bring this chapter to a conclusion, it should by now be very

clear that the all-encompassing New Age movement, under its
multiple guises, is at its’ root a Luciferian belief system. In the same
meticulous manner that the historical plot has gradually tip-toed
towards the complete enslavement of mankind, the New Age
marketing campaign has been a well-planned and executed element
which is gaining momentum to become the One-World Religion of
the New World Order. Simultaneously, all existing monotheistic
religions are being blended together by the Ecumenical Movement
to form a mish-mash of paganism under the single banner of what
is known as the United Religion. In confirmation of this, former
Assistant Secretary General at the UN, Robert Muller is quoted as
saying:
312
We have brought the world together as far as we can politically. To

bring about a true world government, the world must be brought
together spiritually. What we need is a United Nations of
Religions.
In ‘Reflections on the Christ’ by David Spangler (Former UN

Director of Planetary Initiation), he states:
No one will be allowed to enter the New Age unless he or she

takes a Luciferic initiation...When man entered the pathway of
self, he entered into a great creative adventure, of learning the
meaning of divinity by accepting himself. The being that helps him
reach that point is Lucifer, the angel of man’s evolution…. Lucifer
works within each of us to bring us to wholeness as we move into
the New Age.
With a One-World Religion on its way, the historical plot is

showing all the signs of approaching its completion. It’s now time
to look at what has been written about the final stage of this
centuries-old Luciferian plan to rule the world and the coming
effects for all of humanity.
313
Chapter twenty
The Global Reset – Social Cataclysm
The author of the above quote, Albert Pike, was the former
Grand Master of Scottish Rite Freemasonry. As an insider to the
historical plot, he correctly predicted the first two world wars long
before they had occurred. He said that World War I would be
orchestrated to defeat the Czars in Russia, enabling the imposition
of an atheistic Communist regime. World War II would be to
destroy Nazism and bring about the sovereign state of Israel in
Palestine. At the same time, an empowered Communism would act
to keep Christendom restrained until it was needed, for, what he
called, the ‘social cataclysm’.
Anybody that has researched the influence of the Luciferian
hierarchy of power in funding both sides of all conflicts in modern
history will be in no doubt about both World Wars being
intentionally started by the Luciferian elite. Combined with this
knowledge, the correct prediction of the first two World Wars
makes it wise to consider Pike’s expression of the need for a third
314
World War to facilitate the completion of the historical plot for

world domination. He states:
The Third World War must be fomented by taking advantage of

the differences caused by the ‘agentur’ of the ‘Illuminati’ between
the political Zionists and the leaders of Islamic World. The war
must be conducted in such a way that Islam (the Moslem Arabic
world) and political Zionism (the State of Israel) mutually destroy
each other.
When this statement is viewed in the context of what is

currently going on in the world, it reveals the same hidden hand
purposely promoting increased conflict between Islam and the
Zionist-controlled West. Israel continues to provoke the
Palestinians and neighbouring Arab countries while backing so-
called ‘terrorist’ groups in the rest of the Middle East. The
narcissistic Donald Trump has proved to be the perfect Zionist
puppet, surrendering more of America’s control to the Luciferian
Trojan Horse while intentionally sabre-rattling with Iran.
Incidentally, Iran just happens to be one of only a few remaining
countries that do not have a Luciferian-controlled central bank. If
history is anything to go by, similar situations in Iraq, Afghanistan
and Libya, reveal that these gradually get ticked off the list. In
addition to imposing a Luciferian central bank in Iran and starting
another World War, the fact that the biggest gas field in the world
is located in the Persian Gulf (South Pars/North Dome field) also
gives a clear enough indication as to why Iran is currently the
principle target of Western aggression and propaganda.
Whether there will be a third World War in the near future is
most likely beyond the control of the people or, in fact, Western
governments. As with all wars, the hidden hand of power that
315
controls the finances of all nations is the ultimate deciding factor

as to whether war is started and when it ends. This point is
confirmed by Former UK Defence Minister, Dennis Healey, who
said:
World events do not occur by accident. They are made to happen,

whether it is to do with national issues or commerce; and most of
them are staged and managed by those who hold the purse strings.
As with all international conflicts, leading members of the

Luciferian hierarchy of control are never far away from the
decision-making or instigation of fighting on both sides. In an
article titled ‘Rothschild: Windbags of War’, (11th March, 2015) by
Volubrjoptr, it states:
1891: The British Labour Leader makes the following statement

on the subject of the Rothschilds, ‘This blood-sucking crew has
been the cause of untold mischief and misery in Europe during the
present century, and has piled up its prodigious wealth chiefly
through fomenting wars between States which ought never to have
quarrelled. Whenever there is trouble in Europe, wherever
rumours of war circulate and men’s minds are distraught with fear
of change and calamity you may be sure that a hook-nosed
Rothschild is at his games somewhere near the region of the
disturbance’.
Quoting from closer to the source of conflict instigation, it was

Gutle Schnaper, the wife of Mayer Amschel Rothschild and
mother of his five sons that said:
If my sons did not want wars, there would be none.
316
This level of power over Western governments is also made

clear by author David Livingstone. In the highly recommended
book ‘Terrorism and Illuminati: A 3,000 Year History’, he offers an
insight into how the Luciferians are building up to a final social
cataclysm which will bring about the New World Order. This will
be the culmination of centuries of planning to achieve the ultimate
goal of the historical plot to enslave the whole of humanity. There
will be no going back. Livingstone writes:
Today, fronted by the powerful banking dynasties of Europe, the

Illuminati exercise supremacy over the world’s governments, as
well as their economies, and even their cultures. Ultimately, the
Illuminati are an international network, existing in a parallel
world, straddled between fronts of legitimacy, and activities on the
black market and in the underground.
Their method of conquest is to wholly demoralize the societies of
the world, wrecking their very fabric, by promoting every vice,
including sexual depravity, greed and war. By enslaving the nations
of the world through colossal debt, they ensure subservience, and
guarantee the slow transfer of their sovereignty to global
government. By encouraging stock market speculation they siphon
off the wealth of the ignorant masses. In the end, by creating a
global economic cataclysm of untold magnitude, they intend to
demonstrate to humanity their own ineptitude, and offer their
reign as salvation, by implementing a global fascist state, to be
governed by their expected messiah.
By wielding inordinate financial and political power, the plan of

the Illuminati is to foment a global war, or World War III, from
which will emerge, out of the ashes of the expired civilizations of
our time, like a phoenix from the fire, a New World Order. The
coming confrontation is being presented as a ‘Clash of
317
Civilizations’, between the ‘Liberal Democratic West’ and ‘Islamic

fundamentalism’.
In addition to the prospect of a third world war fought between

Islam and Western Zionism, the principle means of simultaneous
global catastrophe has been predicted to involve total financial
collapse. With knowledge that the Luciferian hierarchy control
nearly all central banks in the world, the ability to orchestrate such
monetary chaos would be well within their means. The Luciferian
banking system of usury is continually increasing national debts to
unsustainable levels. At some point, this Ponzi scheme has to
collapse, potentially causing the greatest financial meltdown the
world has ever known. This is commonly known amongst financial
analysts as the ‘global reset’. From the website forbes.com, an
article by financial writer John Mauldin, titled ‘Brace Yourself for
'The Great Reset', predicts:
As it hits, we will have to deal with the largest twin bubbles in the
history of the world. One of those bubbles is global debt, especially
government debt. The other is the even larger bubble of
government promises. These promises add up to hundreds of
trillions of dollars. That’s vastly larger than global GDP.
After a big recession, debt is usually reduced. That is what many

expected in 2009…. As of 2014, total global debt rose to $199
trillion. It grew $57 trillion in just the previous seven years. That’s
about $8 trillion a year…. After that 2014 report and through 3Q
2016, global debt rose by $17 trillion.
Author Brandon Smith, in an article posted on alt-market.com,

titled ‘What Will the Global Economy Look Like After the Great
Reset?’ (11th May, 2016), writes:
318
A very common phrase used over the past couple years by the
International Monetary Fund’s Christine Lagarde as well as other
globalist mouthpieces is the ‘global reset.’ Very rarely do these
elites ever actually mention any details as to what this ‘reset’
means.
They most definitely are seeking to establish the International

Monetary Fund’s Special Drawing Rights basket system as a
replacement for the dollar system; this plan was even outlined in
the Rothschild run magazine The Economist in 1988. They want
to consolidate economic governance, moving away from a
franchise system of national central banks into a single global
monetary authority, most likely under the IMF or the Bank for
International Settlements. And, they consistently argue for the
centralization of political power in the name of removing
legislative and sovereign barriers to safer financial regulation.
Who knows what the trigger will be? There are so many potential
catalysts for economic instability that there is no way to make a
prediction. The only thing that is certain is that one or more of
these catalysts will be triggered. A Saudi de-peg from the U.S.
dollar, a large scale terrorist attack, a general rout in stock markets
due to a loss of faith in central bank policy, a confrontation
between Eastern and Western powers. It doesn’t really matter
much. All of it is designed to produce one outcome — chaos. To
which the globalists will offer ‘order,’ their particular order using
their particular solutions as ‘objective mediators.’
Expert on the Luciferian hierarchy of power Dr. John Coleman

confirms this analysis in ‘Conspirators’ Hierarchy: The Story of the
Committee of 300’:
319
The key to successful control of the world is their ability to create

and manage savage economic recessions and eventual depressions.
The Committee of 300 looks to social convulsions on a global
scale, followed by depressions, as a softening-up technique for
bigger things to come, as its principal method of creating masses of
people all over the world who will become its ‘welfare’ recipients of
the future.
Coleman goes on to list the projected goals of the hierarchy of

power which includes:
To cause a total collapse of the world’s economies and engender

total political chaos.
In preparation for the coming economic collapse, it seems that

the Luciferian hierarchy of power are preparing the masses for a
One-World Currency. This will undoubtedly be some form of
digital or crypto currency, providing complete surveillance and
control over every single transaction made. Cash is increasingly
being phased out while cash-point machines and bank branches are
closing at an alarming rate. Meanwhile, the bewildered herd are
being conditioned to favour digital payment methods, including
contactless positioning of their hands close to the payment reader.
This is just one step away from having an RFID chip implanted
under the skin or in the form of a tattoo. In an article that seems to
promote the reduction in cash transactions, ‘The End of Cash’,
posted on Bloomberg.com (4th December, 2017), it does also allude
to some of the risks:
Economists see great payoffs in a cashless society: lower transaction

costs, new tools to manage economic growth and an end to tax
evasion and money laundering. Critics see an erosion of privacy,
frightening new powers for tyrants and an increase in inequality.
320
Sweden may be the most cashless society on the plant, with bank
notes and coins accounting for just 1.7 percent of its gross
domestic product….China’s city dwellers are rapidly going cash-
less, thanks to a system that uses encrypted codes on phones for
transactions. A credit-card consortium is working to extend it
globally. In India, 255 million people use Paytm, a seven-year-old
start-up backed by China’s Alibaba Group Holding Ltd., to make
payments through a virtual wallet…. In Australia, Citibank stopped
accepting cash at its branches after most of its customers embraced
digital transactions. And the European Central Bank has decided
to stop producing the 500-euro note in 2018 to counter terrorist
financing.
Critics say that in a digital-only economy, governments and banks

could take control of your financial life; with a flick of a switch,
they could leave you without a penny. Networks can fail. And
everybody could be vulnerable to a cyber-attack or power outage.
In an article titled ‘Why the potential end of cash is about more

than money’, by Jan Bellens, it expresses concern about certain
members of society if cash is eliminated as a form of payment:
Banks may rejoice at the prospect of a cashless society, but a digital

economy raises questions around identity and inclusion.
For others, the prospect of going cashless would not just be
undesirable, but have harmful consequences…. Even in Sweden,
famed as the most cashless country, the rapid phasing out of notes
and coins from circulation has led to political debate about how
some members of society, particularly rural, older or disabled
populations, may be left behind.
The creation of digital identities raises concerns around how these
are managed and protected.
321
Journalist Lubomir Tassev explains more about the approaching

cashless society in the article ‘Global Trend Against Cash
Intensifies as China Joins the Squeeze’ (16th November, 2019):
For various reasons, a growing number of nations are experiencing

the rapid development of cashless society. Paper money may
become extinct in some countries in the not-so-distant future.
Prompted by the spread of private and decentralized crypto-
currencies and the threat of losing control over their monetary
policies, more and more governments are now working to create
central bank issued digital currencies to replace banknotes and
coins.
Paper money has certain advantages for ordinary people, like better
privacy for the holder, that governments don’t mind getting rid of,
which to a large extent explains the initial push to create cashless
societies.
As regards replacing cash with some form of digital currency,

this was predicted by the Rothschild-owned ‘Economist’ back in
January 1988. On the front cover of the financial magazine stood
the occult symbol of a phoenix over-riding a pile of burning
American dollars whilst wearing a golden coin around its neck.
The front-page title aptly warned ‘Get ready for a world currency’.
The most likely head of the Luciferian Supreme Council of
Thirteen, the Rothschild bloodline, knows as well as anybody when
and what the One-World Currency will be. However, as with many
other elements of their evil plans, the timeframe seems to have
been delayed longer than the thirty years predicted since the article
was printed. Quoting from the Economist article it states:
THIRTY years from now, Americans, Japanese, Europeans, and

people in many other rich countries, and some relatively poor ones
322
will probably be paying for their shopping with the same currency.
Prices will be quoted not in dollars, yen or D-marks but in, let’s
say, the phoenix. The phoenix will be favoured by companies and
shoppers because it will be more convenient than today’s national
currencies, which by then will seem a quaint cause of much
disruption to economic life in the last twentieth century.
The world phoenix supply would be fixed by a new central bank,

descended perhaps from the IMF…. Each country could use taxes
and public spending to offset temporary falls in demand, but it
would have to borrow rather than print money to finance its
budget deficit…. This means a big loss of economic sovereignty,
but the trends that make the phoenix so appealing are taking that
sovereignty away in any case.
The Economist cover which predicted a new global currency

over thirty years ago also clearly demonstrates that the dollar seems
destined to go up in flames. Since the Bretton Woods Agreement
(1944), which set the dollar as the international reserve currency,
the planned demise of the dollar seems to be happening right
before our eyes. In 2016, the IMF already approved the euro,
Pound Sterling, Yen and Yuan as other reserve currencies. As
regards the true motive behind the end of the U.S. Dollar as the
principle international reserve currency, only the Luciferian
hierarchy know for sure. However, as mentioned previously, the
transition into a One-World Currency will require a new form of
world central bank, replacing the existing franchises. The new all-
powerful international bank of the New World Order will no
doubt issue a digital crypto currency which will replace all existing
national currencies, existing cryptos and all cash. In an article by
Lynette Zang titled ‘The End of The Dollar as the World Reserve
Currency’, posted on itmtrading.com (14th May, 2014), it states:
323
In May 2005 Russia announced that their natural resources and

other assets would no longer be valued in terms of dollars but from
here forward, be valued in terms of rubles, euros and gold…. I’ve
been saying since then that the dollar had already lost total reserve
status, it just retained the title.
In 2008 the SDR (IMF currency), which has been around since
1969, was shifted from a non-convertible reserve asset (you could
not use it to buy (convert) oil, lumber etc.) into a fully convertible
reserve asset and since then, as of September 2012, every central
bank, government and global corporation has been given 5000%
more SDR’s than they had prior to 2008.
In ‘When will the US Dollar Collapse’ by Kimberly Amadeo

(19th August, 2019), it explains:
A dollar collapse is when the value of the U.S. dollar plummets.

Anyone who holds dollar-denominated assets will sell them at any
cost. That includes foreign governments who own U.S. Treasuries.
It also affects foreign exchange futures traders. Last but not least
are individual investors.
Two conditions must be in place before the dollar could collapse.
First, there must be an underlying weakness. Between 2002 and
2018, the dollar declined 6% according to the U.S. Dollar Index….
Second, there must be a viable currency alternative for everyone to
buy.
China and others argue that a new currency should be created and
used as the global currency…. It's unlikely bitcoin could replace the
dollar as the new world currency. Its value is highly volatile because
there's no central bank to manage it.
324
A sudden dollar collapse would create global economic turmoil.

Investors would rush to other currencies, such as the euro, or
other assets, such as gold and commodities. Demand for
Treasuries would plummet, and interest rates would rise.
It seems that the way the historical plot is progressing, if a

critical mass of people do not awaken to the gravity of the
situation, soon, the predicted ‘social cataclysm’ is going to make
the Great Depression fade in comparison. It may seem somewhat
abstract to imagine a collapse of the banking sector. However, even
rampant hyper-inflation would see money rapidly losing its value or
simply disappear from the screen overnight. When combined with
orchestrated global conflict, planned environmental catastrophes
and perhaps an international pandemic, widespread chaos would
soon ensue. Having personally worked in the aftermath of many
international humanitarian disasters, including earthquakes, floods
and conflicts, the resulting complete destruction of society is all too
memorable. In a matter of hours the food shelves become bare
from panic buying or looting, fuel dries up and people start to
think solely about survival. Soon after, there is often a rapid
increase in violence; sanitation becomes non-existent, water
supplies disrupted and disease rampant. Referring back to Albert
Pike’s quote at the beginning of this chapter, the aftermath of large
humanitarian disasters certainly demonstrates the potential for
‘savagery and of the most bloody turmoil’. Populations are left
completely helpless and totally reliant on international aid and
external security.
It seems that when the time comes, the Luciferians plan to
unleash on the world simultaneous catastrophes. World warfare
may erupt between Islam and Zionism while floods, extreme heat
or prolonged drought could be orchestrated to occur globally.
325
Imagine all of this during a banking collapse or induced pandemic

of plague proportions. Due to such unfathomable scale of disaster,
there would be no knight in shining armour to save the majority of
those affected. Absolute chaos and anarchy would almost
immediately erupt; millions would die of disease and starvation. As
grim as this may sound, this is exactly what the psychopathic
Luciferians have been planning for centuries.
In the aftermath of this worldwide cataclysm, Albert Pike reveals
how the Luciferian doctrine will form a central part of bringing
‘ordo ab chao’ (order out of chaos):
Then everywhere, the citizens, obliged to defend themselves

against the world minority of revolutionaries, will exterminate
those destroyers of civilization, and the multitude, disillusioned
with Christianity, whose deistic spirits will from that moment be
without compass or direction, anxious for an ideal, but without
knowing where to render its adoration, will receive the true light
through the universal manifestation of the pure doctrine of
Lucifer, brought finally out in the public view. This manifestation
will result from the general reactionary movement which will
follow the destruction of Christianity and atheism, both
conquered and exterminated at the same time.
Like a phoenix out of the flames, the Luciferian New World

Order intends to reveal their centuries-old plan for a One-World
Government, One-World Currency and One-World Religion. This
tyrannical system of control will be based on Communism with a
tiny select few ruling over the rest of the world. Insider, Mikhail
Gorbachev, said in 1987:
We are moving toward a new world order, the world of

communism. We shall never turn off that road.
326
Before his death (presumed murder) in 1983, Rep. Larry P.

MacDonald wisely said:
The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one-

world government combining super-capitalism and Communism
under the same tent, all under their control. Do I mean a
conspiracy? Yes, I do. I am convinced there is such a plot,
international in scope, generations old in planning, incredibly evil
in intent.
The resulting Luciferian New World Order, based on a system

of Communism is planned for the aftermath of the great reset and
social cataclysm. A brave Jewish author that is unafraid to speak the
truth about the plans of this tiny elite group is Henry Makow Ph.D.
In an article from his website titled ‘What is Communism?’, it
explains how left-leaning socialists have been duped by what they
think is benefiting the masses:
Most people think Communism is an ideology dedicated to

championing workers and the poor. This was an incredibly
successful ruse which manipulated millions. Behind this artifice,
‘Communism’ is devoted to concentrating all wealth and power in
the hands of the central banking cartel (the Rothschilds and their
allies) by disguising it as State power…. Any ideology that further
concentrates wealth and power in the hands of the ‘State’ is
Communism in another guise. These ideologies -- socialism,
liberalism, fascism, neo-conservatism, Zionism, and feminism -- are
fronts for ‘Communism’, and are organized and funded by the
central banking cartel.
The Rothschilds are Cabalist Jews who worship Lucifer who

represents their own demented megalomania. They are imposing
their occult tyranny by virtue of their worldwide monopoly over
327
the medium of exchange…. Their agenda is to protect their money

monopoly by extending it into a monopoly over everything -
power, knowledge, culture, religion -- by re-engineering humanity
to serve them. This is the real meaning of Communism. This
requires the breakdown of nation, race, religion (God) and family
(gender). This is why Western nations are flooded by migrants.
Why Communist and LGBT values are foisted on children. Why
universities have been neutered. Why corporations and banks
promote migration and homosexuality. Why the foreign policy of
the West is bent on destroying any resistance (Russia, Syria,
Yemen, Iran, Korea).
Excluding a small group of conniving Luciferians, nobody really

knows exactly what the fruition of their centuries-old plot will be.
However, one thing can be sure, if it comes to pass, the New World
Order will only be for the permanent benefit of this tiny group of
psychopathic bloodlines at the expense of the rest of humanity.
Billions are destined to perish and for those that remain life will be
one of servitude and complete slavery. The encroaching big brother
state continues to approach an Orwellian nightmare. Once
combined with 5G smart cities, the police state will provide
unescapable surveillance of everything and everyone. The planned
economic collapse will bring forth a One-World digital currency
that can be erased from an individual’s ‘Verichip’ at the flick of a
switch. For those that refuse to bow down to Lucifer, the god of
the New World Order, the punishment will be death.
As regards the precise timing for such events, only the
Luciferian hierarchy of power knows for sure. Either way, any
principle catastrophic event or financial collapse will no doubt
coincide with a prominent occult numerological date or occult
holiday. Although speculating, it is interesting to note the
328
significance of Agenda 2030 which coincides with the start of

increasing global temperatures due to natural solar cycles. Similarly,
the Club of Rome’s graph of forecasted population reduction
shows a dramatic decline starting soon after the year 2030.
Although the exact dates may not be known, one thing is
abundantly clear. After centuries of planning to take-over the world
and everyone in it, the historical plot is rapidly approaching the
final phase.
Faced with what seems like an unavoidable precipice for
humanity, it is understandable that on discovering this knowledge
many people will choose to be overcome by cognitive dissonance or
opt to bury their heads in the sand once more. This offer of defeat
is not going to save today’s children, grandchildren or the rest of
humanity, from future enslavement. Confirming this viewpoint, in
‘What Will The Global Economy Look Like After The Great
Reset?’ (11th May, 2016), Brandon Smith writes:
Through it all, courageous people have risen to the occasion.

Some are successful and some are not, but we do not live in
a New World Order, yet, and that is saying something.
Today is nowhere near as terrible as tomorrow could be if we
do not act accordingly.
The globalist reset needs a trigger, a crisis which admittedly
we do not have the ability to avoid. But, the reset also
depends on the right people in place to rebuild the system
after the crisis unfolds. Here is where the future can be
determined. Whoever is left standing after the opening salvo
will have a choice: to hide and hope for the best, or to fight
for the position to choose who builds tomorrow. Will it be
the psychotic globalist cabal, or will it be free people of
329
conscience? It may not seem like it now, but the end result is
up to us.
It’s time for the bewildered herd to start transforming into a

stampeding force for good. Each and every individual human being
that stands up for what is right, must start to make changes to their
lives. Small personal actions, when multiplied by millions of people
can dramatically slow down the approaching catastrophe. If
momentum, awareness and confidence grow, the tiny group of
Luciferian vultures will be trodden under the rampaging hooves of
an ‘Awakened Herd’. On this note, it’s time to have a look at some
of the measures each and every concerned citizen should start
thinking about.
330
Chapter twenty-one
Time to Act
Facing the magnitude of such a well-coordinated, malicious, all-

encompassing historical plot which has been brought about
through complete control of the world’s financial institutions, it is
no wonder that most people feel helpless as to what to do about it.
However, great victories will never be won or gross injustices ever
overturned unless individuals face up to the threat and decide to
act. The greatest fear of the evil, scheming group of Luciferian
psychopaths is that the masses will realise what is going on and join
together to crush their centuries-old plan. This is the exact reason
why they have bought-out the entire mainstream media industry to
control the propaganda that people are subject to on a daily basis.
For the same reason, the education curricula indoctrinates the
young, films condition older generations and society is kept so busy
chasing perpetual debt or wandering around in a pharmaceutically-
induced haze that people do not have the time to analyse the
source of humanity’s demise. To put it into perspective, there are
over 7.5 billion people that inhabit this earth and yet just a few
thousand members of the entire Luciferian hierarchy of power. At
the head of the snake sit just thirteen of the most pernicious,
331
destructive, power-hungry bloodlines that think they have the right

to rule over the entire world and everyone in it. As each individual
member of the Awakened Herd becomes aware of the threat and
starts to act, the power of the Luciferian hierarchy will be affected.
If a critical mass of informed individuals is reached, when acting
together the greatest threat the world has ever faced can be averted.
The same positive reaction to the threat faced by humanity is
expressed by the American Reform Party’s former presidential
candidate, Patrick Buchanan. Speaking to the World Affairs
Council, in reference to ‘The New World Order’ by H.G. Wells,
he said:
Well, Mr Wells, we are your malcontent. But we’re not going to

die protesting your New World Order, we’re going to live
fighting…. This, then is the millennial struggle that succeeds the
Cold War. It is the struggle of patriots of every nation against a
world government where all nations yield up their sovereignty and
fade away. It is the struggle of nationalism against globalism, and it
will be fought out not only among nations, but within nations!
James Perloff expresses a similar sentiment in ‘Truth is a Lonely

Warrior’:
A few people, with determination and initiative, can achieve

amazing victories over tyranny…. We have an asset that the
Illuminati don’t – a commodity called truth. And truth is more
powerful than any big lie that the propaganda hacks at CNN can
fabricate.
The single, biggest impact an individual can have against the

Luciferian Cabal is to educate oneself with the truth and to pass
the information on to others. Insider Francis Bacon is known for
the phrase ‘knowledge is power’, which may well be true. However,
332
in addition to power, Helen Keller expresses the happiness that

comes from knowledge of the truth:
Knowledge is power. Rather, knowledge is happiness, because to

have knowledge – broad, deep knowledge – is to know true ends
from false, and lofty things from low. To know the thoughts and
deeds that have marked man’s progress is to feel the great
heartthrobs of humanity through the centuries; and if one does
not feel in these pulsations a heavenward striving, one must
indeed be deaf to the harmonies of life.
In reference to the Luciferian plot to control all of humanity, it

is hoped that this book offers an initial step to understanding the
truth, which, from experience, will eventually bring an immense
feeling of liberation. Further knowledge of the truth is available for
anyone willing to look. However, there is a minefield of
disinformation and propaganda purposely swamping the first
avenues of research. This is mentioned in the Protocols. Hiding
truth in a mountain of lies and half-truths. For those interested,
commence with turning off the television, stop reading mainstream
news articles and start looking for independent research from a
much wider selection of sources. There are many highly educated,
knowledgeable researchers and private organisations desperately
trying to alert their fellow man. However, none of these will be
seen on the evening news or anywhere else in the mainstream
media. This does not negate the importance of their message; it
simply illustrates the complete control the Luciferians have over
our access to knowledge. Even online searches are highly affected
by Google analytics, where only the mainstream narrative reaches
the top of the list of searches presented. For that matter, why use
Google as a search engine in the first place? For internet searches
333
without being tracked and having your data stored on Google

servers, try ‘GoodGopher’, ‘DuckDuckGo’ or ‘Startpage’ as
alternatives. You Tube has become completely locked-down by the
hierarchy of power, demonstrated in recent years by the mass
purging of hundreds of thousands of alternative media video
presentations which contradict the mainstream narrative.
Knowledge of the truth is becoming harder and harder to access
but, for now, truthful books on the subject can still be purchased
and alternatives to the mainstream narrative still accessed online.
The important skill to master when seeking knowledge is to be able
to discern what is true from what is purposely deceitful or
misleading.
In ‘The Creature from Jekyll Island’, author G. Edward Griffin
confirms the importance of knowledge but also expresses the need
to act on the information received:
Education is important but it makes little difference what we know

if we don’t do anything with that knowledge. It has been said that
knowledge is power, but that is one of the greatest myths of all
time. Men with great knowledge are easily enslaved if they do
nothing to defend their freedom. Knowledge by itself is not power,
but it holds the potential for power if we use it as a guide for
action…. The future belongs, not to ideas, but to people who act
on those ideas.
This sentiment is also expressed by Edmond Burke, who said:
All that is necessary for evil men to triumph is for good men to do
nothing.
Laying down a very simple challenge to all readers, try turning

off the television and avoiding all mainstream media outlets for
334
two weeks. This may prove to be harder than first thought.

However, one thing is guaranteed: an almost immediate sense of
positivity will come from not being constantly bombarded with the
orchestrated negativity that television offers. Forget about the so-
called ‘news’, try to spend more time closer to nature and reap the
benefits away from the propaganda. Television is purposely
designed to hypnotise and control the mind of the viewer. By
switching it off, a person takes back a small amount of control over
their own life and their own mind.
Regarding knowledge, the education system has been
manipulated to indoctrinate children from a young age. Ideally, the
only way to escape the mind-controlling effect from years of
reciting facts for exams or learning to obey authority is through
home schooling. Although this is beyond the means of most
households, another option could be to group together with other
families to share the task of teaching from a wider knowledge base
of parents while caring for the children. Alternatively, parents need
to monitor how their children are being programmed by the state
to perform as future debt slaves. Practical life skills can be taught
from home, how to cook, clean, fix things, stay healthy and just as
importantly, to steer away from screen time and get out into the
natural environment.
The next fundamental issue that needs to be addressed to cut
the fuel that feeds the Luciferian monster is debt. As previously
mentioned, every interest payment made on borrowed money
provides the system of usury that has led to the over-riding power
gained by the hierarchy of power. On this matter, almost everyone
is to blame for the rise in the wealth of the Luciferian elites. Not
only is everything more expensive when bought on credit, it
provides a continual source of income that is financing the
335
historical plot which is now in its final phase. The only way that
this can be reversed is if individuals start to live within their means.
Stop following societal pressures to keep abreast of the latest
technology, fashion or marketed trends. They are irrelevant. Stop
competing with friends, neighbours or peer groups to outwardly
express what the system calls success. Start thinking what really
matters in life and stop trying to buy happiness. Become less
materialistic. Debt on a credit card or owed to the bank is debt to
the same Luciferian masters that are conniving to enslave the
whole of humanity. Although mortgages may provide longer term
financial savings, most other loans and purchases on credit can be
reduced until avoided all together. This is all about priorities and
re-thinking what is important in life, especially with the knowledge
of what this book has tried to warn about.
The other side of debt enslavement is that of national
governments. With political pawns leading our governments, most
of which have been preselected by the hierarchy of power, the
mountain of interest-paying debt continues to climb. The higher
the debt, the more tax-payers have to contribute to paying off the
fraudulent system of usury. As national debt increases so does the
revenue received by the Luciferian-controlled central banks. The
only way to break this cycle is for governments to return to issuing
their own money, interest-free and without the fraud of usury.
Examples of interest-free national currencies include the
Greenbacks printed by Abraham Lincoln in 1865, the United
States Note issued by Kennedy in 1963 and the Bradbury Pound in
the UK. Interestingly, Lincoln is quoted as saying ‘I have two
enemies; the Southern army in front of me and the financial institutions in
the rear. Of the two, the one in the rear is my greatest foe’.
336
Unfortunately, leaders with a similar intention such as

Muammar Gaddafi, the founder of the pan-African, gold-backed
currency called the Dinar, were soon liquidated. However, the
combined power of the people would, no doubt, overcome the
Luciferians behind the central banks if they were knowledgeable of
the scale of the fraud that they are paying for. With the same
positive attitude, in reference to the Federal Reserve System in
America, author G. Edward Griffin writes:
The Creature has grown large and powerful since its conception
on Jekyll Island. It now roams across every continent and compels
the masses to serve it, feed it, obey it, worship it. If it is not slain, it
will become our eternal lord and master. Can it be slain? Yes it
can. How will it be slain? By piercing it with a million lances of
truth. Who will slay it? A million crusaders with determination
and courage. The crusade has already begun.
Reverting back to the power of individuals, when it comes to

purchasing power, the potential influence of an Awakened Herd is
enormous. If people on mass start to avoid globalist companies
linked to the Committee of 300, rather opting to buy from local
suppliers, family companies, organic growers or individual
producers, the Luciferian-controlled corporations would be hit
where it hurts them the most. As profit-driven, corporate monsters
feeding on greed, by actively avoiding the big international
companies, the combined efforts of individuals can not only
considerably reduce their revenues but also strengthen small, local,
well-meaning individuals and businesses.
At the same time, so as to slow down the demise of money and
the planned introduction of a crypto-based One-World Currency,
try reverting back to using cash. Rather than every single purchase
337
being traceable by bank statements and third-party marketing

companies, cash supports privacy. If more people start drawing
cash out from their accounts, this will provide increased pressure to
prevent cashpoints and bank branches from closing. Similarly, by
paying with cash a person is less likely to buy on credit and
marketing agencies cannot monitor their buying habits or compile
personal data. Throwing away the accumulation of store discount
cards – all they do is monitor what a person has been purchasing –
reduces the personal data provided to third-party agencies.
Discount cards are nothing but marketing tools for big
corporations, offering a miserly reduction which is factored into
the price, in return for valuable personal shopping habits.
Similarly, if going to a supermarket, ticket outlet or petrol station,
try choosing one that offers the option of encountering a human
being. Avoid all automatic payment systems wherever possible. This
may mean queuing up for slightly longer but if everyone acts in this
way it will dramatically slow the planned robotisation of society
and save thousands of jobs. Not only that, talk to your fellow
human being while at the counter, it will improve your day. After
all, real happiness comes from social interaction and helping others
in need.
While on the subject of combined purchasing power, by not
buying all the latest gadgets or newer versions of technological
items that are already owned, this will hit the revenues received by
the Luciferian-controlled globalist corporations. Chasing the latest
models released simply fuels unnecessary materialism while
increasing avoidable debt. This will become particularly apparent
when all the new ‘smart’ appliances start to arrive in the
marketplace. Nobody needs Alexa-style devices in their private
homes or any other interconnected devices that link to the 5G
338
control grid. The sole reason for such signal-emitting technology is

to spy on everyone and to harvest personal data. Similarly, try
looking up an organisation that is trying to ban smart meters in
the local area, support them and print a big colourful sign to put in
the meter cupboard that clearly states ‘Do Not Install a Smart
Meter!’ Act by informing others to do the same.
Most people nowadays have a smart phone. This hand-held
tracking device not only transmits and records a person’s every
movement, it also provides valuable data to marketing companies
and the institutions that come under the control of the Committee
of 300. Personal emails, texts, messages, call logs, social media
entries, online searches, digital purchases, online banking and
much, much more is all being monitored and recorded directly
from that single device. In addition, most youngsters are literally
addicted to their smart phones, resulting in a reliance on the
dopamine hits from ‘likes’ on social media rather than interacting
in person with other human beings and developing essential social
skills. Time spent on a smart phone also leads to health issues and
obstructs vital connection to the natural environment, including
receiving vitamin D from the sun. If people reading this book really
want to start making a difference, try returning to an older-style
mobile phone with no internet connection or preferably steer away
from mobiles all together for large parts of the day. Get off social
media, stop chasing ‘likes’ and get outside where far greater
satisfaction will be gained from nature itself. This is another
example where an individual can reap the benefits of increased
satisfaction in a very short period of time.
In a similar way, by becoming more aware of personal health an
individual will gain increased well-being while reducing the chances
of ending up on pharmaceutical drugs for life. The old saying goes,
339
healthy body – healthy mind. This is so true. By eating well,

keeping physically active and making the effort to get closer to
nature, the rewards are self-evident. Ideally, purchasing a weekly
organic vegetable box from a local supplier dramatically reduces the
toxins ingested by the body and takes away further revenues from
the mega companies that control the food chain. At the same time,
by reducing the amount of processed foods, this will improve
health and help to reduce weight. These foods laden with
unnatural additives are also what provide the greatest profit
margins to the food monopolies. As for water, research whether tap
water in the local area is fluoridated; if so, join a group that
campaigns to get this cancer-causing toxin removed. Meanwhile,
look into buying a water filter that removes fluoride and heavy
metals. This not only reduces toxic elements entering the body but
eliminates the need to purchase bottled water or throw away the
plastic after a single use. Another simple means of eliminating
fluoride is to swap to fluoride-free toothpaste such as one based on
Aloe Vera. Speaking from experience, such toothpastes make the
teeth stay cleaner for longer, help to protect enamel, get rid of
black spots and are just as efficient as other toothpastes in
preventing dental decay.
Another point to consider regarding health is to actively reduce
exposure to toxic chemicals. Most households nowadays have so
many different cleaning products in the form of inhalable sprays,
products that come in contact with the skin or end up ingested
from food dishes and containers. Not only are such chemicals
linked to an increase in allergies, asthma and cancer, the longer
term effect on personal health is only now becoming apparent.
Most of these products are unnecessary and could easily be
exchanged for a natural detergent used with water.
340
There is growing evidence that certain vaccinations do not

work, or more worryingly as in the case of the MMR jab, they are
directly linked to massive increases in autism. There is also
increased governmental pressure for the older generation to get a
yearly flu jab. Before getting heavy metal adjuvants or other toxins
injected directly into your bloodstream, spend a short while
investigating whether the vaccine actually works and what could be
the longer term side effects. It has been well documented that the
Luciferian hierarchy of power intend to dramatically reduce the
world’s population. As previously discussed, it seems that the
preferred method will either be caused by an airborne pandemic or
perhaps a pathogen hidden within the resulting vaccinations. Be
diligent when any vaccination becomes compulsory, highly
recommended by authorities or marketed by the likes of Bill Gates
and his population-reduction campaign.
At the time of writing, the latest fear-mongering campaign called
coronavirus was being maximised right across all mainstream media
platforms. Following a similar format to Swine Flu, Bird Flu, Zika
Virus, Ebola, West Nile Virus and Sars, the principle outcome for
the perpetrators is to impose greater restrictions and legislation.
With coronavirus this seems to be related to quarantining flights,
passenger boats or even entire cities. Once again it uses the same
formula of problem-reaction-solution. In this scenario, the outcome
of the coronavirus scare will be that populations will have been
conditioned to accept future quarantine controls, marshal law or
possibly forced detention and vaccinations. If a person is aware of
the real intention of such campaigns, the presented fear becomes
less important than the imposed reduction in civil liberty.
On a similar note, all false flag ‘terrorist’ attacks are perpetrated
by elements of our own security services under the control of the
341
same hidden hand of power. They serve to keep the masses living
in perpetual fear, relying on the authorities to provide the solution
while providing the scenario to implement new restrictions and
laws. Once a person knows the typical signs that reveal the
Luciferian hand behind such attacks, it immediately negates any
intended fear-mongering. Whenever there is a so-called ‘terrorist’
attack, immediately question everything. First of all, check to see
whether it occurred on an occult holiday or whether the date or
number of victims reveals numerological significance. Were the
attackers previously known to the security services, did they leave
ID behind or was the scene staged with crisis actors and dummies?
Another common occurrence is that a similar scenario is often
being enacted in a drill on or just before the actual ‘terrorist’
attack. Such drills provide much of the photographs or video
footage presented as being during the actual attack. On a similar
note, ask yourself why there just happened to be a mainstream
media cameraman or reporter on location to document the event
and examine the authenticity of witness statements? Don’t be
fooled. Don’t live in fear.
At some point in the near future it is likely that some form of
sub-cutaneous implanted chip will be offered or forced upon the
masses. Examples such as Verichip are already being marketed as
trendy and in the name of technological progress. Supposed
forward-thinking companies are recommending them for their staff
to access buildings or even purchasing items from the office fridge.
Knowing that the Luciferians are following their own biblical
agenda, it is no surprise that they want to introduce what exactly
resembles the ‘mark of the beast’. Revelation 13 states:
And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and
bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads:
342
And that no man might buy or sell, save that had the mark, or the
name of the beast, or the number of his name.
Wikipedia provides information on such planned microchip

implants:
A human microchip implant is typically an identifying integrated

circuit device or RFID transponder encased in silicate glass and
implanted in the body of a human being. This type of sub-dermal
implant usually contains a unique ID number that can be linked
to information contained in an external database, such as personal
identification, law enforcement, medical history, medications,
allergies, and contact information.
If wide-scale catastrophe does occur in the future, from

experience working in the aftermath of such scenarios, it is not
unreasonable to think that everyone will require a chip under the
skin before receiving food or aid hand-outs. When institutions
collapse, chaos soon ensues. In such a scenario it would provide an
easy excuse to enforce chipping of the population, blamed on the
need to identify beneficiaries. Be prepared for this eventuality and
what it could potentially entail.
To conclude this chapter, in addition to thinking about some of
the suggestions listed above, the most important thing each decent
human being can do is to defy being led into a deprived, sick and
selfish existence. Within every human being is an innate, natural
ability to respect, care for and show empathy for others. The top of
the Luciferian hierarchy of power are clearly hereditary
psychopaths that lack these normal human characteristics. Moral
standards of living are being constantly eroded, from all angles, by
the Luciferians and their middlemen. To counter this needs a
revival of former ethical behaviour, which means treating everyone
343
with respect, doing favours for strangers, not putting money as the
primary objective in life and starting to coordinate with fellow
human beings. Commander William Guy Carr, wisely said ‘to share
what we have with others in need provides the greatest happiness it is
possible to enjoy on this earth.’
As a closing comment before flicking the page to read the
conclusion of this book, here are some wise words from the late
William Cooper (1989):
Like it or not, everything is changing. The result will be the most

wonderful experience in the history of man or the most horrible
enslavement that you can imagine. Be active or abdicate. The
future is in your hands.
344
Chapter twenty-two
Conclusion
Some people are used to taking short-cuts in life. If you are such
a person and have skipped to read the conclusion first;
unfortunately, the important message this book entails cannot be
understood in a few paragraphs. Each chapter offers a brief
introduction to, what is together the greatest threat humanity has
ever faced. Only by reading the book in its entirety can this be
properly explained and comprehended.
At the start of this book it presented the notion that there has
been, for centuries, a small group of wealthy elites that have been
plotting to control the whole world and everyone in it. This
malicious plan involves a dramatic reduction in the total world
population, resulting in a tyrannical One-World Government
ruling over what the perpetrators call a New World Order. The
glue that binds these psychopathic bloodlines together, from
generation to generation is a religious belief that they are acting on
behalf of what they perceive to be the real god, Lucifer, as opposed
to Adonai, God the creator. The perpetrators at the top of the
hierarchy of power, above all other affiliation or nationality follow
a Luciferian doctrine. Although hiding behind different religious
beliefs or other identities, first and foremost they are Luciferians.
345
The scale and intricate planning behind such a historical, all-

encompassing plot can be described as nothing short of
remarkable. From the structured hierarchy, the infiltration of all
major institutions, mainstream media and religious organisations,
to the fraudulent system of financial usury. Spanning centuries and
therefore beyond the lifespan of the original instigators, it reveals
nothing short of absolute, evil genius.
Although the content of this book is quite likely to have caused
uncomfortable reading for many, it is hoped that the reader is now
in a much better state of awareness to be able to discern the truth
and make their own conclusions. Taken individually, the topics
presented are arguably coincidental in nature. However, when all
the elements are looked at together the combined evidence
overwhelmingly supports the original statement presented in the
introduction. By now the reader will fully understand why so many
elements of such a complex plot could not be covered in more
detail. The intention of this book has simply been to provide a
summarised introduction into what is really going on in the world
behind the veil of secrecy. The time and effort writing this book
has primarily been to offer information to fellow human beings
that have been conditioned to be ignorant of the truth.
Unfortunately, most people seem to fall into this category. It is
hoped that on digesting this information readers will be better
informed, enabling their own research of the truth from now on.
Reading some of the books mentioned within this book would be a
great place to start. For other readers that already question geo-
political events and may already be aware of some of this book’s
content, it is hoped that there may have been offered something
new or of interest.
346
For those that have persevered this far, the predicament faced
by humanity may well leave you feeling somewhat angry or
hopefully, motivated to do something about it. It is quite likely that
for some, due to the uncomfortable content presented, their
cognitive dissonance will simply not allow them to accept the truth.
Similarly, there will be some that fall into Leonardo Da Vinci’s
third category of people, ‘those that do not see’. Unfortunately, for
these individuals, having come this far it is beyond my ability or
intention to try to persuade you otherwise. For ‘those who see when
they are shown’ it is hoped that the time and effort to write this book
has not been in vain.
The Luciferians will not be defeated by a single unified
resistance because, at some point, like all other good organisations
it would be infiltrated by the same psychopathic vultures. This is
not a movie, like Star Wars, this is the real world. There will be no
resistance coming to save us. However, the solution to this evil
menace is offered by the Luciferian blueprint for a New World
Order, itself. The quote at the beginning of this chapter, from the
Protocols of the Elders of Zion, explicitly reveals the Luciferians’
greatest fear, that of personal initiative. This is why the education
system and society in general purposely aims to suppress every form
of personal initiative because this has the ability to grow into
genius. Each and every human being has an innate ability to
express their own personal form of genius, if they have the belief to
do so.
Although personally not an accomplished writer, by being
motivated to act on the knowledge received from many years of
research, this book hopefully expresses an individual genius that I
did not know I had. Similarly, each reader has the ability to far
exceed this effort if they use their own personal initiative. Now is
347
the time for you the reader to take up the baton of truth and to
run with it in your own unique way.
The bewildered herd is slowly becoming more orientated. As
each individual takes the baton of truth and acts on it, good,
honest individuals are expressing what it really means to be a
human being. Their numbers continue to grow. Once a critical
mass is reached the Awakened Herd will grow in confidence and
start to stampede. Forming a combined effort in the name of the
truth, it will be unstoppable. Stand up for what is right, proceed
ethically and with compassion, be strong, act!

This book is an expression of that seed bearing good fruit.
Thanks for reading,
Deano
348
Prologue
An Open Letter
To all Luciferians, in particular the thirteen generational

bloodlines that sit at the top of the hierarchy of power, this is an
open expression of empathy for the predicament in which you find
yourselves.
Born into extravagantly rich, in-bred families with seemingly
genetically psychopathic traits, your individual plight appears much
worse than the one that you have planned for each member of the
bewildered herd. No doubt sent off to boarding school as young
children, quite possibly abused as part of mind control procedures
and growing up without loving parents, it is no wonder that you
continue a life from all that you know, pure evil.
I pose a simple question; how is it that a humble member of the
bewildered herd can break a lifetime of conditioning that you have
laid out? Having counter-conditioned your deceitful means of mind
control and propaganda, I stand before you proud, strong and
defiant in the knowledge of the truth.
Rather than condemning your despicable actions, I offer
empathy for what seems to be an inescapable prison in which you
find yourselves. Conditioned to follow the same evil path as your
349
forefathers, surrounded by other psychopaths and with no

alternative means of existence, it can only be described as the
ultimate nightmare. Unable to break free from your own
conditioning or able to walk away from your pre-planned purpose
in life, it appears that for you, there is no escape.
As an address to your subordinates, the Council of 33, members
of the Committee of 300 and all the acting middle-men, you have
all been hoodwinked into believing in a Luciferian New World
Order. Selling your souls for material gain, you are just as guilty in
the planned decimation of humanity. Unbeknown to most, you
have been deceived by the hidden hand at the top of the hierarchy
of power that lurks in the shadows. When, and if the time comes,
you will be discarded alongside the rest of humanity, thrown under
the bus, if you will.
To all Luciferians, wherever you sit on the hierarchy of power;
believing that you possess a greater insight into life than the rest of
humanity, while following the ‘light of Lucifer’ through your secret
rituals and initiations, I leave you with something to ponder. Like
the bewildered herd, what if you too have also been deceived?
In response to Albert Pike’s glorification of Lucifer the ‘light-
bearer’, Corinthians 11:14 states:
And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of

light.
To finalise this letter and book, as part of the Awakened Herd, I

wish you the courage to counter your own conditioning. Only by
changing to what is good can your life be fulfilled.
You own everything, but have nothing.

I own nothing, but have everything.
Deano
350
The fantastic artwork by David Dees (ddees.com) on the

inside front cover of this book, depicts the world that the
Luciferians are implementing around us. It is only when a
critical mass of people understands what is really going on
that we can transform this into the world depicted below,
one that each good, honest human being surely strives for.
If you appreciate the effort made to produce this book,

please donate a small amount of your time
to help out a fellow human being in need.
Thank you.
351
In addition to the many authors quoted in this book, for further

reference a list of recommended sources is provided below:
• Myron C. Fagan – speech (1967)
Source: Archive.org
•Benjamin Freedman – speech (1961)
Source: Archive.org
• Ronald Bernard – interview with Irma Schiffers (2017)
Source: De Vrije Media TV
• Take Back Your Power – documentary (2017)
Source: https://www.takebackyourpower.net/watch-take-back-
your-power-2017/
•Vaxxed the Movie – From cover-up to catastrophe
Source: Vaxxedthemovie.com/stream
•Cut, Poison, Burn – documentary
•Seeds of Destruction – documentary
•What is more terrifying than Cancer? The Cure – documentary
Source: Vimeo.com
352
Websites & Blogs
•Geoengineeringwatch.org
•Globalresearch.ca
•Truthstreammedia.com
•Vigilantcitizen.com
•Educate-yourself.org
•Bibliotecapleyades.net/English
•Modernhistoryproject.org
•HenryMakow.com
•JamesPerloff.com
•Bollyn.com
•Ukcolumn.org
•Knowmorenews.org
•Mintpressnews.com
•Winterwatch.net
•Mikepiperreport.com
•Themillenniumreport.com
•Zerohedge.com
•Intellihub.com
353
•ae911truth.org
•cancerfungus.com
•Fluoridealert.org
•Illuminatiwatcher.com
•Thecrowhouse.com
•Naturalnews.com
•Presstv.com
•Activistpost.com
•Libertyblitzkrieg.com/author/mkriegs
•Caitlinjohnstone.com
•Hat4uk.wordpress.com
•Aanirfan.blogspot.com
•Kurtnimmo.blog
•Craigmurray.org.uk
•Twitter.com/ciabaudo
•Twitter.com/MarkWatts_1
354
355

A Seed That Fell On Good Ground

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Seed That Fell On Good Ground

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A Seed That Fell On Good Ground

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A SEED THAT FELL ON GOOD GROUND

Counter-conditioning for the bewildered herd

PDF Book Edition: version009_Apr2020

Copyright © 2020 Deano

The right of Deano to be identified as the author of this work

All Rights Reserved.

No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any

This Book is Not for Sale!

Modern society is governed by the pursuit of money and

This book is about a small influential group that, through the

It is my small gift to humanity.

Chapter one Naming the Culprits 22

Chapter two The Historical Plot 38

Chapter three The Hierarchy of Power 46

Chapter four The Organisational Structure 55

Chapter five Secret Societies 76

Chapter six Financing the Plan 88

Chapter seven The Bewildered Herd 101

Chapter eight The Georgia Guidestones 117

Chapter nine Food for Thought 124

Chapter ten Water – The Source of Life 142

Chapter eleven In Sickness and in Health 155

Chapter twelve Education or Programming? 175

Chapter thirteen Mainstream Media Propaganda 188

Chapter fourteen The Film Industry 206

Chapter fifteen Climate Change & Agenda 2030 224

Chapter sixteen Geo-Engineering 242

Chapter seventeen 5G and Everything Smart 262

Chapter eighteen Numerology and Gematria 277

Chapter nineteen New Age Religion 298

Chapter twenty The Reset - Social Cataclysm 314

Chapter twenty-one Time to Act 331

Chapter twenty-two Conclusion 345

Prologue An Open Letter 349

Dedication & Thanks

To my parents, for my moral upbringing,

To Paul R. Temple, for

To Montse Cortés, for the cover.

To David Dees for the inside cover (ddees.com)

To all the truth-seekers that face daily ridicule

To anyone that takes the time to read this book,

My particular journey down the rabbit hole which is detailed in

began a journey which continues to this day. The term conspiracy

facts and having reasoned debate. It acts as a barrier which keeps us

Preface by Paul R. Temple

What would you do if you uncovered a plot to murder

educated, extensively travelled, of rational thought and with

direction of the world, this is done to psychologically prepare the

Michael Tellinger, in his thought-provoking book ‘Ubuntu’,

To add to the complication of whether individuals can accept

There are three classes of people:

Those who see when they are shown, and

I agree to a certain amount with these claims. There are

We stand today at a unique and extraordinary moment. The

A One-World Government and one-unit monetary system, under

One of the most well-known proponents of an all-controlling

Back to the present, it could be argued that while on the verge

network of secret societies, international think-tanks and

The perfect dictatorship would have the appearance of a